JP2023136840A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can improve performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes counting means capable of counting a game value, and notification means capable of executing a first notification indicating execution of a game stop. The notification means may execute the first notification when at least a first condition is satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when the counting means counts a first value from a value lower than the first value. When the first condition is satisfied while a second condition is satisfied, the notification means does not execute the first notification.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines, for example, are conventionally known as one type of gaming machine. Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a notification means that can issue notifications (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-200302

It is desired to improve the performance of this type of game machine.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine whose performance can be improved.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine equipped with a counting means capable of counting a game value and a notifying means capable of executing a first notification, wherein the first notification is the execution of a game stop. The notification means may execute the first notification when at least a first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is that the counting means indicates a value lower than the first value. A condition that is satisfied when the first value is counted from , and if the first condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied, the notification means does not execute the first notification. This is a game machine that features:

According to the game machine according to the present invention, performance can be improved.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which an attacker front plate is removed from the attacker unit. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (a) It is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500; (c) It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (a) An example of a validity determination table for special symbols is shown. (b) An example of a table for determining the validity of a jackpot/sudden time saving is shown. (c) An example of a validity determination table for normal symbols is shown. It is a diagram showing an example of transition of gaming states. (a) A diagram showing an example of a starting dialogue determination table. (b) A diagram showing an example of a character pattern determination table (first time). (a) A diagram showing an example of a character pattern determination table (second and third times). (b) A diagram showing an example of character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit). It is a figure showing an example of an option pattern decision table. (a) to (r) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 1 of the decisive battle reach effect. (a) to (k) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 2 of the decisive battle reach effect. (h') to (k') are diagrams chronologically showing a part of Example 3 of the decisive battle reach effect. (a) to (g), (e'), (e'') are diagrams showing examples of card selection effects. (h) to (m) are diagrams showing an example of episode selection effects. (a) A diagram showing an example of timer measurement start conditions. (b) is a diagram showing an example of timer measurement stop conditions. (c) A diagram showing an example of timer reset conditions. (a) to (r) are diagrams showing Example 1 of the count performance in chronological order. (a) to (i) are diagrams showing Example 1 of the count performance in chronological order. (b'), (j) It is a figure showing the modification example 1 of a count performance in chronological order. (k) to (p) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of performance of the jackpot game (jackpot 1). (a) to (f) are diagrams showing Example 2 of the count performance in chronological order. (g) to (m) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 3 of the count performance. (i'), (j'), (k') This is an example of a performance when the end conditions (7, 1, 8) of the time-saving game state 1 are satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 being stopped due to a loss. (a) A diagram showing types of warning notifications and various conditions for each warning notification. (b) It is a time chart showing the notification timing etc. of the warning notification of the second left-handed player warning. (a) A diagram showing an example of a right-handed hit warning. (b) A diagram showing an example of a second left-handed player warning. (c) A diagram showing an example of the first left-handed player warning. (a) to (d) are diagrams chronologically showing example 1 of performance after power outage and power restoration. (e) to (i) are diagrams chronologically showing example 2 of presentation after power outage and power restoration. (j) to (m) are diagrams chronologically showing example 3 of effects after power outage and power restoration. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing specific examples of first to fourth notifications. It is a diagram showing Example 1 of notification in chronological order. (1) It is a diagram showing Example 2 of notification in chronological order. (2) It is a diagram showing Example 3 of notification in chronological order. (3) It is a diagram showing Example 4 of notification in chronological order. (1) It is a diagram showing Example 5 of notification in chronological order. (2) It is a diagram showing Example 6 of notification in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. 32 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 31 viewed diagonally from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 38 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 37 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 37. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and (c) is a side view schematically showing the field of view of a person H1 in a sitting position. FIG. 3 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of person H2. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the inside of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modification of the example of connection between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 37; It is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170. FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 52 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 51. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 53. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500. 12 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by changing settings and the states of related components. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 57. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is set to setting b. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the payment is made. 60 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 59. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking the settings with setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) shows the state when setting 1 is set. 3 is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking settings in power saving mode. 62 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 61. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the status of related components when checking the settings with setting b set, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting b is set in power saving mode. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when performing confirmation. 64 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 63. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations that are subject to the lottery in RT1 and the high and low winning probabilities. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure for explaining some of the winning combinations which are objects of winning lottery in RT2, and the height of the winning probability. It is a figure showing an example of payout rate of RT1 and RT2. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . If the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored, the related components This is a table summarizing the status. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, check the state of the related components in the event that a power outage occurs and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored. This is a summarized table. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. be. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting confirmation is performed once, and a game is played once. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. Relevant components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the status of . After the settings have been confirmed once, the state of the related components is summarized when a medal is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. This is a table. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. 83 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 82 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 81 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 80. FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. 7 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. It is a table showing medal number control state commands. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. (a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing details of a response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control section main processing. 95 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 94. 96 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 95. 97 is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 96. 96, FIG. 97, and FIG. 101 are flowcharts of the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605). 99 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 98. 99 is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 95 and 99. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 94. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control unit timer interrupt processing. 103 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. 102. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 102. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 102. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the medal number control part main processing. 107 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 106. It is a table showing the target range of RAM clear processing. 108 is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 107 and the like. 107 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 106. 107 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 106. 112 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 111. 107 is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 106. 107 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 106. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 106. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of medal number control part timer interruption processing. 117 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 116. 118 is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 117. 117 is a flowchart of the scheduled count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 116. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 116. It is a flowchart of the gaming control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 120. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 120. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 120. 124 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 123. 124 is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 123. 124 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 123. It is a flowchart of the game information setting process (step S4806, S4A19) in FIGS. 126 and 128. 124 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 123. 129 is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 128. 124 is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 123. 117 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 116. It is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 116. 117 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 116. 97 is a flowchart showing a modification of the process during medal insertion in FIG. 96. 100 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 99. 125 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the submission command reception process of FIG. 124. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 119. 120 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 119. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st example when the count button 171 was operated. It is a timing chart showing a first example of performance when counting is being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. It is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end effect. It is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 146(c), and (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 146(c). 2 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs and then power is restored. 139 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 138. FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is restored. It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. It is a figure which shows the example of a sound output showing that automatic counting is in progress. 17 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171. 153 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 152. FIG. 153 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 152. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. 7 is a diagram showing an example of another change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. 158 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 157. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 157. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be performed exceeding the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification. (a) is a timing chart when payout is about to be performed exceeding the second threshold for payout, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number; , is a diagram showing an example of notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification is issued to prompt counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. FIG. 7(c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count button 171 is operated at a disadvantage to the player. 165(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 165(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) This is an example of the modified example explained using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). It is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value. It is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed for a long time. It is a figure showing an example of the performance performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance performed according to the number of acquired medals in an AT state. It is a figure showing an example of operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement when the upper limit exceeded error of the number of game medals and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a period for allowing the output of the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. 177(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 177(a). 177(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 177(b).

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a pinball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a reel game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. Note that in this embodiment, a device whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes a ball storage tray 126 that can store a plurality of balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the balls to the firing device 110. A ball removal button 130 that allows the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to be ejected from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, and a ball that is guided to the firing device 110 by the player's operation to the game area 124 of the game board. A ball firing handle 134 that shoots out a ball, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices according to the player's operation, a button lamp 138 that is built into the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light, and A ball lending operation button 140 is provided to issue a ball lending instruction to the installed card unit (CR unit). Although not shown in FIG. 1, a return operation button is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and a decision button are arranged is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that strikes the ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. Equipped with This firing device 110 directs the ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player. This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

<Rear view>
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 that has an upwardly opening opening and is used to temporarily store balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the dispensing motor, and temporarily retains the balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the dispensing device 152, and also rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the dispensing motor. , so that the balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the dispensing device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the ball by applying a driving force to the ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the ball is passing, and a high or low signal when the ball is not passing. The other signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, the game value (balls) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs overall control processing of the game, and a main board case 158 that stores the main board 156 that configures the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing for the overall game. The first sub-board case 162 houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 5), which performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to presentation, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to ball payout. At the same time, a payout board case 172 houses a payout board 170 equipped with an error cancellation switch 168 that cancels the error by operation by a game clerk, and a launch board that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing regarding the launch of balls. 174, a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 5) that supplies power to various electrical game machines, and a power switch 178 that turns on and off the power by the operation of a game store clerk, and a power switch 178 that is operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by using 186 are installed.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode allows setting at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities. can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side. (YH) and continuous role object ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, single-color LEDs such as red, green, blue, and white, but it may also be a device capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or it may be a full-color LED. It may be. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player. Further, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162.

<Front view>
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side is sometimes called the front side or front side, and the back side is called the rear side or back side. There are cases.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 201. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which a ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot ball.

Areas other than the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as non-gaming areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, at least the area inside the area through which the ball passes when the ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the ball does not pass due to the presence of an effect device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the gaming area 124, and on this main control lamp board 254, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol are displayed. Display device 214, normal symbol retention lamp 216, first special symbol retention lamp 218, second special symbol retention lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, A round indicator lamp RR is provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performances, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and in this embodiment is configured with two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment, each is configured with eight LEDs in two stages, upper and lower.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation games are held until a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do so. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, the special symbol variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). This makes it possible.

Further, the high probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state. The electric support medium lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened. The right-hand hitting display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain benefits by playing right-handed, in a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, and an electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where the ball can roll. The warp device 242 discharges the ball that entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to the stage 244 from the warp exit 242b. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is a stage on which the ball that has passed through the warp device 242 exhibits movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the ball reciprocates or rotates, which increases the residence time of the ball. A stage cover 245 is provided on the stage 244.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first performance movable unit 7 is disposed so as to be supported by the main body 104. Further, a second effect movable unit 8 is disposed below and on the rear side of the stage 244 and supported by the main body 104, but the second effect movable unit 8 is not visible in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and a regular figure starting opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one installed in When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210, but in this example, the payout of the prize ball is is not carried out. Note that a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls may be paid out.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one first special figure start opening 230 (first start winning means) is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. This first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the right end of the lamp unit 9 extending to the left.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 operates in a low probability non-time saving game gaming state (a first gaming state. Hereinafter, it may simply be referred to as a "non-time saving gaming state") and a low probability time saving gaming state 1 ( The second gaming state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "time-saving gaming state 1") and the low probability time-saving gaming state 2 (third game; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "time-saving gaming state 2") ), and the non-time-saving gaming state (first gaming state) is a state in which it is recommended to win the first special figure starting opening 230 (first starting winning means).

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, four) of prize balls are paid out, and a special figure is displayed by the first special figure display device 212. Start the figure variation game. The players can freely take out the balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings.

In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure starting port 230 provided one at the lower center of the game board 200, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. A number of balls (for example, 4 balls) are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls, and a special pattern variable game using the first special pattern display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, an attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 124, and this attacker unit 23 is provided with a second special figure starting port 232. The second special figure starting port 232 will be described in detail in the description of the attacker unit 23, which will be described later.

In addition, the attacker unit 23 is provided with a third starting opening 232 and a variable winning opening (attacker) 235 in addition to the second special figure starting opening 232. The first special pattern starting port 230 shown in FIG. 3, which is provided at the lower center, has a configuration that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball when the ball is hit to the right due to its arrangement. On the other hand, a special route 244a is provided in the center of the stage 244 described above, which makes it easier for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special symbol starting port 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. There is. Note that it is also possible to aim at the first special figure starting port 230 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special symbol starting hole 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting hole through which a player can expect a ball to enter by hitting the ball to the left.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and the firing rod is activated. Then, the ball passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction conversion member 236, a game nail, etc., and either enters various winning holes or starting holes, or enters any winning hole or starting hole. The player reaches the out port 240 without winning the starting port or only by passing through the regular pattern starting port 228.

Further, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out-ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect passage of a ball received in the ball receiving port. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all the balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the balls ejected from the out port 240 and the balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, and are ejected in a predetermined manner. Although the configuration is such that the balls are ejected from the pachinko machine 100 via the passage, only the balls ejected from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

In addition, although this embodiment showed an example in which a general winning hole is not provided in the right side game area (lamp unit 9), it may be provided. In addition, if a general prize opening is provided, when a ball enters the general prize opening during a jackpot, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one) may be paid out, or in this case, the second special symbol starting hole It is preferable to display the number of prize balls in the same way as when the ball wins in 232.

<Attack unit>
Next, the attacker unit 23 provided at the lower right portion of the gaming area 124 will be explained.

The attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3 has an attacker sticker 2302 pasted on an attacker front plate 2303 (see FIG. 4). Note that in FIG. 3, the decorative pattern of the attacker seal 2302 is omitted from illustration.

FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3 with the attacker front plate 2303 removed.

The attacker unit 23 has a third starting opening (second type starting opening) 234, a variable winning opening 235, a second special figure starting opening 232, and an out opening 236 opened to the attacker base plate 2303.

<Third starting port>
The third starting opening 234 (third starting prize winning means) changes the ease with which a ball enters (winning) by advancing and retreating a plate-shaped shutter member 2341, as shown in FIG. 4(a). The shutter member 2341 is in a state of being extended forward. Further, the ball detection sensor 2342 for the third starting port 234 is disposed on the downstream side of the shutter member 2341 extending forward, facing the direction of the shutter member 2341. When the shutter member 2341 is advanced forward, the ball can pass over the advanced shutter member 2341 and pass through the cylindrical ball detection sensor 2342. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 4(a) is a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third starting port 234.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 operates in a non-time-saving game playing state (first gaming state), a time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state), and a time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state). The time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) is the state in which it is easiest to win a prize in the third starting opening 234 (third starting winning means) among these gaming states.

When the ball detection sensor 2342 detects the ball entering, it is assumed that the ball has entered the third starting port 234, and the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 1 ball) of balls as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. .

In this embodiment, when a prize is won in the third starting port 234 in the time-saving gaming state 1, a small hit occurs with a 100% probability, and in this small hit, if a ball is detected in a specific area (V area) (V If the player wins a prize), a jackpot (second jackpot) occurs (a small win is promoted to a jackpot). In addition, in this example, a dedicated sensor (not shown) that can detect that the ball has passed through a specific area (V area) (V winning) is provided, but the ball detection sensor 2352 of the variable winning opening 235 is provided. Passage of the ball in a specific area (V area) may be detected by other sensors such as .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), when the shutter member 2341 is retracted backward, the ball rolling toward the third starting port 234 is detected by the cylindrical ball detection sensor. 2342 is difficult to pass. Therefore, the third starting port 234 shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c) is in a state where winning is difficult.

<Variable winning opening>
The variable winning opening 235 (variable winning means) changes the ease with which a ball enters (winning) by advancing and retreating a plate-shaped shutter member 2351, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(c). The shutter member 2351 is in a state of being extended forward. Moreover, the ball detection sensor 2352 for the variable winning a prize opening 235 is arranged below the shutter member 2351 and facing upward. In a state where the shutter member 2351 has advanced forward, it is difficult for a ball to pass over the advanced shutter member 2351 and to pass through the cylindrical ball detection sensor 2352. Therefore, the variable winning hole 235 shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(c) is in a state where winning is difficult.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4(b), when the shutter member 2351 is retracted backward, the ball rolling toward the variable prize opening 235 cannot pass through the cylindrical ball detection sensor 2352. is possible. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 4(b) is a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning hole 235.

The jackpot state and small win state, which will be described later, are states in which it is easy to win in the variable winning hole 235, and it is recommended to win in the variable winning hole 235. When the ball detection sensor 2352 detects an entering ball, it is assumed that the variable winning hole 235 has entered a prize, and the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126.

In addition, when the shutter member 2351 retreats with the balls staying on the shutter member 2351, the balls staying on the shutter member 2351 fall all at once, and are detected by the ball detection sensor 2352 for the variable winning opening 235. be done. While the variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state, the ball that has passed through the shutter member 2351 and rolled into the variable winning opening 235 does not roll downstream from the variable winning opening 235, and as shown in FIG. As shown by the arrow shown by the solid line in (b), the ball passes through the ball detection sensor 2352, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and is then discharged to the game island side.

<Second special starting gate>
If the ball does not enter the third starting opening 234 or the variable winning opening 235 and falls as shown by the solid or dotted arrow in FIG. (starting winning means) are arranged. This second special figure starting opening 232 has a fixed winning opening size, and the ball detection sensor 2321 for the second special figure starting opening 232 is arranged facing upward. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 4(c) is a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second special figure start opening 232.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 operates in a non-time-saving game playing state (first gaming state), a time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state), and a time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state). The time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state) is a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second special figure starting opening 232 (second starting prize winning means), and the second special figure starting opening 232 (second starting prize winning means) This is a state in which it is recommended to win a prize (second starting prize winning means). Note that the non-time saving game playing state (first gaming state) is also a state in which it is easy to win a prize using the second special figure starting opening 232 (second starting winning means), but the second special figure starting opening 232 (second starting winning means) It is not recommended to win a prize using the starting prize winning means).

When the ball detection sensor 2321 detects an entering ball, it is assumed that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, and the payout device 152 is driven to place a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1 ball) into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the second special figure display device 214 starts the special figure fluctuation game. The ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2321 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the first guide port 2322, and then discharged to the game island side.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using FIG. 5. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the main control unit 300. It is composed of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the Pachinko machine 100.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing information, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 (this circuit has two built-in random value generation circuits) that derives a value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. ) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor that detects a ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, and lower tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 receives signals output by various sensors 320 including A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular figure display device 210, Various status display parts 328 (for example, general figure holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high precision medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-hand hitting lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) and various solenoids 332 that drive the opening and closing of predetermined movable members, such as the shutter member 2341 of the third starting port 234, the shutter member 2351 of the variable winning port 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 is connected thereto.

Random value generation circuit 318 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. There are two types of methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random number seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

In addition, when the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and transfers the latched value to the random number generation circuit built in the random number generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Furthermore, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting opening 232, the random number generation circuit 318 similarly controls the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting opening 232. The value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232, which is built in the random value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs information to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 336. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands etc. to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a , a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various performance data, etc. is connected to a ROM 406 in which is stored.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430 and a chance button detection sensor. A sensor circuit 428 outputs a detection signal from 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a sensor circuit 428 reads image data etc. stored in ROM 406 based on a signal from CPU 404 and uses a work area of VRAM 436 to generate a display image and decorate it. A VDP 434 (video display processor) that displays images on the symbol display device 208 is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and uses a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and a control program and data for image display. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

The basic circuit 502 also includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the movable effect body 224, a movable effect sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the movable effect body 224, and a detection signal from the movable effect sensor 424. a sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 that controls the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive circuit that controls the game board frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout control section, firing control section, power supply control section>
Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface section 606.

The firing control unit 630 receives a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control section 660 to the payout control section 600 and the second sub-control section 500, and the main control section 300, the second sub-control section 500 and the shooting control section are supplied from the payout control section 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314, and a value corresponding to 100,000 balls is set as an initial value in the safe (number of paid game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308 (for example, , 100000 in decimal), set 0 as an initial value in the out (number of fired game balls) counter stored in RAM 308, and set 0 as an initial value in the reference value counter stored in RAM 308. In this example, a value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set. The roles of the safe (number of game balls paid out), out (number of game balls fired), and reference value counter will be described later.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is outputted. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a value in the counter timer 312 that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power cutoff (before the power cutoff), and if the state before the power cutoff is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal that is sent when a clerk at a game store or the like operates the RAM (hereinafter also referred to as "RWM") clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (if no operation is performed). If the RAM clear signal is on (indicates that RAM clearing is required), the basic circuit 302 is returned to the initial state. The process then proceeds to step S113. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (RAM clearing is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is set to a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 in order to return to the state before the power cut, and if the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process advances to step S113 to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process also advances to step S113.

In step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Furthermore, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power restoration command, the The data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters are used to generate the initial values of the general figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, the general figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer random number counter. Update two random number counters for generating random numbers, respectively. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value of the general timer is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value of the general timer provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207, which will be described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt is not generated (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are sent via the input port of I/O 310. The presence or absence of a detection signal is monitored by inputting the signal and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 and partitioned for each type of sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned into the previous detection signal storage area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control section timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-previous detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and current detection signal storage area. That is, when the ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal the day before last, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two days ago, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). If the ball matches the information indicating that It is determined that 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that there has been a win in these winning holes 235 and these starting holes 230, 232, 234, and 228.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the regular winning random number value, which is used in the main control unit 300, is Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating the winning random number has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random number winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it also determines that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In addition, in this embodiment, although the counter for acquiring the random value of special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of special figure 2 were provided separately, the same counter may be used.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and statically displaying the symbol on the regular symbol display device 210, and a timer for measuring the time for fluctuating and statically displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. A special pattern 1 display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the pattern on the second special pattern display device 214, a special pattern 2 display pattern update timer for measuring the time for fluctuating and stopping the display of the pattern on the second special pattern display device 214, a predetermined winning performance time, and a predetermined opening time. , updates various timers including timers for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end performance period, and the like.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning hole 235 or the starting hole 230, 232, 234, or 228, the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read the value, add 1 to it, and set it in the original award ball count storage area.

In addition, in this winning opening counter update process, a reference value counter update process is performed to update the reference value counter based on safe (number of paid game balls) and out (number of fired game balls). The details will be described later, but in this reference value counter updating process, a process of adding safe (number of paid game balls) to the reference value counter, a process of subtracting OUT (number of game balls fired) from the reference value counter, etc. are performed.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting hole 230, second special figure starting hole 232, third starting hole 234, regular figure starting hole 228, and variable winning hole 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 repeatedly turns on and off. Performs lights-off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of normal symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general pattern fluctuation game and the second special pattern starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general pattern is inactive), and the pending general pattern fluctuation game is not controlled. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern fluctuation game is a win or a non-win by a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area mentioned above. A winning flag is set in the RAM 308 if the winning is determined. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, in step S225, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed. This special figure 2 state update process is performed depending on the state of the special figure 2, for example, during the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more). Now, a lighting/lighting-off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special symbol display device 214. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs variable display of special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable game).

Subsequently, in step S227, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process) is performed. In this special figure 1 state update process, each process equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process, with "special figure 2" replaced with "special figure 1", so the explanation is Omitted. In addition, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Also here, the special drawing related lottery process for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related drawing processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special drawing related drawing processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) is performed (step S229). ) is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start conditions of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the start conditions for the games are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game starts to fluctuate first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the prize winning in the second special figure start opening 232. This is carried out with priority over notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the first special figure starting slot 230.

In step S233, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command type (in this embodiment, specify the command type such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc.) bits 0 to 10 consist of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S205, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. , when a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the third starting port 234 and the variable winning port 235, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display device 212 are controlled via the display circuits 324, 326, and 330. , the second special symbol display device 214, the display data to be output to the various status display sections 328, etc. are set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing described above.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 8. Note that (a) in the same figure is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 4C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of image control processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 2(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not. In step S309, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311, if pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command set in step S319 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 434. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S605; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until In step S605, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S611; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 9. Note that (a) in the same figure is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 4B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 4C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 2(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S701. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 . In step S709, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is carried out, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 9(a). is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

<Table for determining validity for special symbols>
Next, the validity determination table for special symbols will be explained using FIG. 10(a). FIG. 10(a) shows an example of a validity determination table for special symbols.

This special symbol validity determination table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the special symbol validity determination table includes the determination result of the special symbol variation game, the type of special symbol, and the validity. Lottery value data for determination (random number range) are stored in association with each other. Note that the winning probability in FIG. 10(a) is provided for reference.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses a table for determining the validity of this special symbol and a predetermined ball detection sensor to detect that a ball has won in the first special symbol starting opening 230 (or second special symbol starting opening 232). Based on the special figure winning random number obtained when detected, special figure 1 correctness judgment (or special figure 2 correctness judgment) that determines the judgment result of special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) conduct.

In this example, in the special figure 1 correctness judgment and the special figure 2 correctness judgment, if the obtained special figure winning random number is between 0 and 217, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won (jackpot), and it becomes a jackpot. information indicating this is set in the RAM 308. In addition, the possible numerical range of the special drawing winning random number is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery value data is 0 to 217 (the size of the numerical range is 218). , the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/300.

In addition, in this example, in the case where the acquired special figure winning random number value is 218 to 65535 in the special figure 1 judgment, or when the obtained special figure winning random number value is 218 to 65099 in the special figure 2 judgment. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol variable game is a loss, and information indicating that the game is a loss is set in the RAM 308. In addition, the possible numerical range of the special drawing winning random number is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the losing lottery value data of special drawing 1 is 218 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65318). ), so the probability of winning the losing lottery ticket for special map 1 is approximately 299/300, and the numerical range of the lottery value data for the losing lottery ticket for special map 2 is 218 to 65099 (the size of the numerical range is 64881). , the winning probability of special drawing 2 is approximately 297/300.

Further, in this example, in the special figure 2 validity determination, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 65100 to 65535, it is determined that the time is suddenly shortened, and information indicating that the time is suddenly shortened is set in the RAM 308. In addition, the possible numerical range of the special drawing winning random number is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the sudden time saving lottery value data is 65100 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 436). Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 2/300.

<Table for judging whether it is a jackpot or sudden time saving>
Next, using FIG. 10(b), a table for determining whether a jackpot or sudden time saving is used will be described. FIG. 10(b) shows an example of a table for determining whether a jackpot or sudden time saving is used.

This table for determining whether a jackpot or sudden time saving is used is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the table for determining whether a jackpot or sudden time saving is used for determining whether a jackpot or sudden time saving is used includes symbol types and lottery value data for symbol distribution ( (not shown) are stored in association with each other. In addition, the probability of symbol distribution, the contents of the jackpot R, and the gaming state in FIG. 10(b) are described for reference.

Here, the low probability time-saving game state 1 is, as explained using FIG. 4(a), a non-time-saving game game state (first game state), a time-saving game state 1 (second game state), And, among the game states of the time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state), it is the state where it is easiest to win a prize using the third starting opening 234 (third starting winning means).

In addition, the low probability time saving game state 2 is a state in which it is recommended to win the second special figure starting opening 232 (second starting winning means), as explained using FIG. 4(c). .

The numbers in parentheses for low-probability time-saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8) and low-probability time-saving game state 2 (7, 140, 147) indicate the end conditions for each game state, and the number on the left is The number of variations of special figure 1, the number in the center is the number of variations of special figure 2, and the number on the right is the total number of variations of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

Therefore, in low probability time-saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8), if the number of variations of special figure 1 reaches 7 times, if the number of variations of special figure 2 reaches 1 time, or if the number of variations of special figure 1 reaches 1, And when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 reaches 8 times, the low probability time saving game state 1 is ended.

In addition, in the low probability time saving game state 2 (7, 140, 147), if the number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 reaches 7 times, if the number of fluctuations of special symbol 2 reaches 140 times, or if the number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 reaches 140, And when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 reaches 147 times, the low probability time saving game state 2 is ended.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used for determining the validity of the jackpot or sudden time-saving when a jackpot or sudden time-saving is won by the above-mentioned special map correctness judgment (special figure 1 correctness judgment or special figure 2 correctness judgment). Based on the table and the random number value obtained during the lottery, a symbol distribution lottery is performed to determine the stop symbols of the special pattern 1 variable game (or the special pattern 2 variable game).

If the result of the special drawing 1 judgment is a jackpot, special drawing A is selected with a winning probability of 60/100, and special drawing B is selected with a winning probability of 40/100. Special figure A is a 10R jackpot opened by the variable prize opening 235, and after the jackpot, the state shifts to low probability time-saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8). Special figure B is a 10R jackpot opened by the variable prize opening 235, and after the jackpot, the game shifts to a low probability non-time saving gaming state.

If the result of the special drawing 2 judgment is a jackpot, special drawing C is selected with a winning probability of 90/100, and special drawing D is selected with a winning probability of 10/100. Special symbol C is a 10R jackpot that is opened by the variable prize opening 235, and after the jackpot, the state shifts to low probability time-saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8). Special figure D is a 2R jackpot opened by the variable prize opening 235, and after the jackpot, the game shifts to the low probability time-saving game state 2 (7, 140, 147).

If the result of special drawing 2 validity judgment is suddenly time saving, select special drawing E (time saving pattern 1) with a winning probability of 80/100, and select special drawing F (time saving pattern 2) with a winning probability of 20/100. select. Special pattern E (time-saving pattern 1) and special pattern F (time-saving pattern 2) do not cause a jackpot, but they can transition to the time-saving gaming state, and special pattern E (time-saving pattern 1) has a low probability time-saving gaming state 1 ( 7, 1, 8), and the special figure F (time saving symbol 2) shifts to low probability time saving game state 2 (7, 140, 147).

As mentioned above, if you win in the third starting slot 234 in the low probability time-saving game state 1, a small hit will occur with a 100% probability, and if the ball passes through a specific area (V area) in this small hit, a jackpot will occur. occurs (a small hit is promoted to a jackpot), so the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) will essentially win the 10R jackpot opened by the variable winning hole 235.

In addition, if you win special map A or special map C, the next jackpot (10R jackpot) is virtually confirmed because you will move to the low probability time-saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8) after the jackpot. . In other words, if you win special map A or special map C, you will receive a series of 10R jackpots in a short period of time, and two 10R jackpots can be made to look like one 20R jackpot, creating a new game experience. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine having the above-mentioned features, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

<Table for determining validity for normal symbols>
Next, the correctness determination table for normal symbols will be explained using FIG. 10(c). FIG. 10(c) shows an example of a validity determination table for normal symbols.

This normal symbol validity determination table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the normal symbol validity determination table stores gaming states and determination results in association with each other. It should be noted that the winning probability and normal electric accessory release time in FIG. 10(c) are for reference only.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a normal symbol correctness judgment to determine the judgment result of the normal pattern fluctuation game based on this normal symbol correctness judgment table and the gaming state.

In this example, in determining the validity of ordinary figures, if the gaming state is a low probability non-time saving gaming state, the normal opening time (0.2 seconds) is selected with a 100% winning probability, and the normal electric accessory ( 3. The opening time for opening the shutter member 2341 of the starting port 234) is set to 0.2 seconds. In addition, if the gaming state is low probability time saving gaming state 1 (7, 1, 8), select the extended opening time (5.6 seconds) which is longer than the normal opening time with a 100% winning probability, The opening time for opening the shutter member 2341 of the normal electric accessory (third starting port 234) is set to 5.6 seconds. In addition, if the gaming state is low probability time saving gaming state 2 (7,140,147), select an extended opening time (0.3 seconds) that is longer than the normal opening time with a 100% winning probability, The opening time for opening the shutter member 2341 of the normal electric accessory (third starting port 234) is set to 0.3 seconds.

In this example, regardless of the game state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern judgment is set to 100%, but the opening time of the normal electric accessory (second special pattern starting port 232) depends on the gaming state. There is a difference between the shortest opening time, low probability non-time saving game state = 0.2 seconds (denchu winning difficult state) < low probability time saving game state 2 (7,140,147) = 0.3 seconds (State where it is difficult to win an electric chew) < Low probability time saving game state 1 (7, 1, 8) = 5.6 seconds (state where it is easy to win an electric chew).

In addition, only the low probability time saving game state 1 was provided as a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third starting opening 234 (third starting prize winning means), but in addition to the low probability time saving game state 1, the low probability time saving game state 1 You may provide a state in which it is easier to win a prize than the third starting opening 234 (third starting winning means), or in addition to the low probability time saving game state 1, it is possible to provide a state in which it is easier to win a prize than in the low probability time saving game state 1. A state in which it is easier to win than the probability time-saving game state 2 may be provided, or in addition to the low-probability time-saving game state 1, the third starting port 234 (third starting winning means) may be set in the same manner as the low-probability time-saving game state 1. A state in which it is easy to win a prize may be provided.

<Game status>
Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 11. Note that FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state.

In the normal gaming state, when condition (A) is met (in this example, when special drawing B (jackpot 1) is won), the game moves to jackpot 1 (1500 shots) (third jackpot game), and in jackpot 1 , when condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when jackpot 1 ends), the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

Also, in this normal game state, if condition (C) is met (in this example, if you win special map A (jackpot 2)), the game will move to jackpot 2 (first half of 3000 shots) (first jackpot game). In jackpot 2, when condition (D) is satisfied (in this example, when jackpot 2 (first jackpot game) ends), the time saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) is entered. In addition, in the time-saving game state 1, when condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, when a ball passes through a specific area (V area) during execution of a small winning game based on a winning of the third starting port 234), The game moves to Jackpot 3 (second half of 3000 shots) (second jackpot game), and when condition (F) is met in Jackpot 3 (in this example, when Jackpot 3 (second jackpot game) ends), the time is reduced. Transition to gaming state 2 (third gaming state).

In addition, in time-saving game state 2, when condition (O) is satisfied (in this example, when special drawing D (jackpot 4) is won), the state shifts to jackpot 4 (300 shots per hit), and in jackpot 4, condition (P ) is established (in this example, when jackpot 4 ends), the time saving game state 2 is entered.

In addition, in time-saving game state 2, when condition (I) is satisfied (in this example, when special symbol F (time-saving symbol 2) is won), time-saving game state 2 is continued, and when condition (G) is satisfied (main In the example, if you win special pattern E (time-saving pattern 1), you will move to time-saving gaming state 1, and if condition (H) is met (in this example, if you win special pattern C (jackpot 2)), you will win jackpot 2. When the condition (J) is satisfied (in this example, the end condition (7, 140, 147) of the time-saving game state 2 is satisfied), the game state is changed to the normal game state.

According to the gaming machine according to this example, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a new game property that allows players to hit consecutive jackpots in a short period of time, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, in time-saving game state 1, when condition (K) is satisfied (in this example, when special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) is won), the time-saving game state 1 is entered (reset), and condition (L) is satisfied. When the condition (M) is satisfied (in this example, when special map A and special map C (jackpot 2) are won), the game moves to jackpot 2, and when the condition (M) is satisfied (in this example, when the condition (M) for ending the time-saving game state 1 is won) , 1, 8)), the game shifts to the normal gaming state. In addition, in time-saving game state 1, when condition (Q) is satisfied (in this example, when special drawing B (jackpot 1) is won), the transition to jackpot 1 (1500 shots per hit) occurs, and when condition (R) is satisfied (In this example, when special drawing D (jackpot 1) is won), the game moves to jackpot 4 (300 shots).

<Decisive battle reach performance>
Next, the decisive battle reach effect will be explained. The decisive battle reach effect is one of the effects executed in the ready-to-reach state, and in this example, the decisive battle reach effect is executed according to one of three types of effect patterns (decisive battle reach patterns 1 to 3).

Decisive battle reach pattern 1 is a production pattern in which the production ends with the second attack, decisive battle reach pattern 2 is a production pattern in which the production ends with the third attack, and decisive battle reach pattern 3 is the production pattern in which the production ends with the third attack. Similarly, this is a performance pattern in which the performance ends with the third attack, but this is a performance pattern in which there is a follow-up attack after the second attack. It goes without saying that the type and content of the performance pattern are not limited to this example.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs a decisive reach pattern determination lottery for determining a decisive reach pattern using random values when starting the decisive reach effect.

In this example, in the decisive battle reach pattern determination lottery, if the special pattern validity judgment is a jackpot, one decisive battle reach pattern is selected from decisive battle reach patterns 1 to 3 (jackpot), and if the special pattern validity judgment is a loss , select one decisive battle reach pattern from decisive battle reach patterns 1 to 3 (loss).

<Starting dialogue determination table>
FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a starting dialogue determination table. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects a decisive battle reach pattern through a decisive battle reach pattern determination lottery, and then determines a dialogue pattern based on this starting dialogue determination table and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held.

For example, if the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (lose), select dialogue pattern 1 (speech content "Follow me!") as the dialogue pattern with an 80% chance of winning, Line pattern 2 (line content: ``Good opportunity!!'') is selected with an 18% chance of winning, and line pattern 3 (line content: ``It's hot!!!'') is selected with a 2% chance of winning.

On the other hand, if the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), regardless of the type of decisive battle reach pattern, there is a 50% chance of winning the dialogue pattern as dialogue pattern 1 (speech content "Follow me!"). ''), select line pattern 2 (line content: ``Good opportunity!!'') with a 35% chance of winning, and select line pattern 3 (line content: ``It's super hot!!!'') with a 15% chance of winning. select.

In this example, in the starting line determination table, the expectation level of winning the jackpot is as follows: Line pattern 1 (line content: “Follow me!”) < Line pattern 2 (line content: “Good opportunity!!”) < Line pattern 3 (line content: “Follow me!”) The content is set to increase in the order of "It's hot!!!"), and the content of the lines displayed at the start of the decisive battle reach effect can increase the player's expectations for the jackpot.

<Character pattern determination table (1st time)>
FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the character pattern determination table (first time). After selecting a decisive battle reach pattern through a decisive battle reach pattern determination lottery, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects a decisive battle reach pattern based on this character pattern determination table (first time) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. A character pattern determination lottery (first time) will be held to determine the pattern.

For example, if the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (lose), character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") is selected as the first character pattern with a winning probability of 80%. , character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja") is selected with a 15% chance of winning, character pattern 4 (attack character type "Tono") is selected with a 5% chance of winning, but character pattern 1 (attack character type "Tono") is selected with a 15% chance of winning. Type ``ronin (enemy character)'') or character pattern 5 (attacking character type ``panda'') are not selected.

On the other hand, if the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), select character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") as the first character pattern with a 50% chance of winning, and a 30% chance of winning. Character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja") is selected with a winning probability of 20%, character pattern 4 (attack character type "Tono") is selected with a winning probability of 20%, but character pattern 1 (attack character type "Ronin" (enemy character)") and character pattern 5 (attacking character type "panda") are not selected.

In addition, character pattern 1 (attacking character type "Ronin (enemy character)") is a character pattern used when the decisive battle reach effect is confirmed to have lost (missing decision of success or failure) and the decisive battle reach effect is ended. The pattern determination lottery (first time) is configured so that character pattern 1 (attacking character type "ronin (enemy character)") is not selected. In addition, character pattern 5 (attack character type "Panda") is a character pattern used when the victory (jackpot of judgment of success or failure) is confirmed in the decisive battle reach performance and the decisive battle reach performance ends, so the character pattern determination lottery ( The configuration is such that character pattern 5 (attack character type "panda") is not selected in the first time).

In this example of the character pattern determination table (first time), the expectation level of winning the jackpot is in the following order: character pattern 1 (guaranteed loss) < character pattern 2 < character pattern 3 < character pattern 4 < character pattern 5 (confirmed jackpot) The player's expectations for winning the jackpot can be increased depending on the character pattern (type of attacking character) of the decisive battle reach effect.

<Character pattern determination table (2nd and 3rd time)>
FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the character pattern determination table (second and third times). After completing the character pattern determination lottery (first time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the second lottery based on this character pattern determination table (second and third times) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. A character pattern determination lottery (second time) will be held to determine the character pattern.

Also, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time) (or after completing the pursuit character pattern determination lottery if there is a follow-up attack after the second attack), this character pattern determination table (second, third A character pattern determination lottery (third time) is performed to determine the third character pattern based on the type of decisive battle reach pattern.

Specifically, in the case of decisive battle reach pattern 1 (loss), character pattern 1 (attacking character type "ronin (enemy character)") is selected as the second character pattern with a 100% winning probability.

That is, in the case of decisive battle reach pattern 1 (loss), in the first decisive battle reach effect, character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess"), character pattern 3 (attacking character type "Ninja"), or character pattern 4 (Attack character type "Tono") is executed, then in the second decisive battle reach performance, the performance by character pattern 1 (Attack character type "Ronin (enemy character)") is executed. Then, the defeat in the decisive battle reach performance is confirmed (the loss of the judgment of success or failure), and the decisive battle reach performance ends.

In the case of decisive battle reach pattern 2 (lose) or decisive battle reach pattern 3 (lose), select character pattern 1 (attacking character type "ronin (enemy character)") as the second character pattern with a 60% chance of winning. Then, select character pattern 2 (attack character type "Princess") with a 29% chance of winning, select character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja") with a 10% chance of winning, and select character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja") with a 1% chance of winning. Character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") is selected, and character pattern 5 (attacking character type "Panda") is not selected.

In addition, in decisive battle reach pattern 3 (loss), there is a follow-up attack after the second attack, so after determining the second character pattern by the determination lottery (second time), first determine the character pattern by the pursuit character pattern determination lottery described later. A character pattern for pursuit is determined, and then a third character pattern is determined by a character pattern determination lottery (third time).

In the case of decisive battle reach pattern 1 (jackpot), character pattern 5 (attacking character type "panda") is selected as the second character pattern with a 100% winning probability.

In other words, in the case of decisive battle reach pattern 1 (jackpot), in the first decisive battle reach effect, character pattern 2 (attack character type "Princess"), character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja"), or character pattern 4 (Attack character type "Tono") is executed, then in the second time of the decisive battle reach performance, the performance by character pattern 5 (Attack character type "Panda") is executed, and the decisive battle reach is performed. A win (a jackpot in the judgment of success or failure) is determined in the performance, and the decisive battle reach performance ends.

In the case of decisive battle reach pattern 2 (jackpot) or decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), select character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") as the second character pattern with a 10% chance of winning, and a 25% chance of winning. Select character pattern 3 (attack character type "Ninja") with a winning probability of , select character pattern 4 (attack character type "Tono") with a 40% probability of winning, and select character pattern 5 (with a 25% probability of winning). Select the attacking character type "Panda") and do not select character pattern 1 (attacking character type "Ronin (enemy character)").

In other words, character pattern 5 (attacking character type "panda") is selected as the second or third character pattern only when the judgment is a jackpot, so character pattern 5 (attack character type "panda") is selected as the second or third character pattern only when the judgment is a jackpot. If a panda character corresponding to the attack character type "panda" is displayed, a jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, in Decisive Battle Reach Pattern 3 (Jackpot), there is a follow-up attack after the second attack, so after determining the second character pattern by the determination lottery (second time), first, by the pursuit character pattern determination lottery described later. A character pattern for pursuit is determined, and then a third character pattern is determined by a character pattern determination lottery (third time).

In the decisive battle reach pattern 3, if "character pattern 1" or "character pattern 5" is determined as the second character pattern, no follow-up attack will be performed after the second attack.

<Character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit)>
FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit). When the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects this character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit) and the character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit) after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time). Based on the second character pattern (second attacking character) selected in the pattern determination lottery (second time), a pursuit character pattern determination lottery is performed to determine a character pattern for pursuit.

For example, if the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (lose) and the second character is a princess, character pattern 3 (attacking character type "Ninja") will be selected as the pursuit character pattern with an 80% chance of winning. ) and select character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") with a 20% winning probability, thereby selecting a character pattern different from the second character princess.

If the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (lose) and the second character is a ninja, select character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") as the pursuit character pattern with an 80% chance of winning. By selecting character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") with a 20% chance of winning, a character pattern different from the second character ninja is selected.

If the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (lose) and the second character is Tono, select character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") as the pursuit character pattern with a 70% chance of winning, By selecting character pattern 3 (attacking character type "Ninja") with a 30% chance of winning, a character pattern different from the second character's lord is selected.

If the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot) and the second character is a princess, select character pattern 3 (attacking character type "Ninja") as the pursuit character pattern with a 40% winning probability, By selecting character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") with a 60% winning probability, a character pattern different from the second character princess is selected.

If the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot) and the second character is a ninja, select character pattern 2 (attack character type "Princess") as the pursuit character pattern with a 35% winning probability, By selecting character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") with a 65% chance of winning, a character pattern different from the second character ninja is selected.

If the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot) and the second character is Tono, select character pattern 2 (attacking character type "Princess") as the pursuit character pattern with a 40% winning probability, By selecting character pattern 3 (attacking character type "Ninja") with a 60% chance of winning, a character pattern different from the second character's lord is selected.

In addition, if "Character pattern 1" or "Character pattern 5" is determined as the second character pattern, a follow-up attack will not be performed after the second attack, but "Character pattern 1" or "Character pattern 5" Even if "5" is determined, a follow-up attack may be performed after the second attack.

<Option pattern determination table>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an option pattern determination table. After completing the character pattern determination lottery (first time), character pattern determination lottery (second time), and character pattern determination lottery (third time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects a character pattern in each lottery. An option pattern determination lottery is performed to determine an option pattern based on the attacking character selected and the type of decisive battle reach pattern.

<Choice pattern determination table/Attack character Ronin>
If the attacking character is a ronin (enemy character) and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (loss), there is a 35% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice details "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left : Ninja, lower right: Tono), select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 65% chance of winning, and select option pattern 3 ~ 6 is not selected.

If the attacking character is a ronin (enemy character) and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), there is a 65% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice details "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left : Ninja, lower right: Tono), select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 35% chance of winning, and select option pattern 3 ~ 6 is not selected.

<Choice pattern determination table/Attack character Princess>
If the attacking character is a princess and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (lose), there is a 30% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice details "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left: ninja, right Select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: Ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 30% probability of winning. Select option pattern with a 20% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 (choice details: "Top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda") and select option pattern 4 (choice contents: "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord") with a 20% chance of winning. , lower right: Princess) and do not select option patterns 5-6.

If the attacking character is a princess and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), there is a 15% chance of winning option pattern 1 (option contents "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left: ninja, right Select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: Ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 15% probability of winning, and select option pattern with a 30% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 (option content: "Top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda"), and select option pattern 4 (choice content: "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord") with a 30% chance of winning. , lower right: Princess), select option pattern 6 (option content: upper left: princess, upper right: princess, lower left: princess, lower right: princess) with a 10% chance of winning, and do not select option pattern 5. .

<Option pattern determination table/attack character ninja>
If the attacking character is a ninja and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (lose), there is a 55% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice details "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left: ninja, right Select option pattern 3 (choice details: upper left: princess, upper right: ninja, lower left: lord, lower right: panda) with a 15% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 with a 15% probability of winning. Select option pattern 4 (choice details: "Top left: Princess, top right: Ninja, bottom left: Tono, bottom right: Princess") and select option pattern 5 (Choice contents: "Top left: Ninja, top right: Tono, bottom left: Ninja") with a 15% chance of winning. , lower right: panda), and option patterns 2 and 6 are not selected.

If the attacking character is a ninja and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), there is a 40% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice details "top left: ronin, top right: princess, bottom left: ninja, right Select option pattern 3 (choice details: upper left: princess, upper right: ninja, lower left: lord, lower right: panda) with a 20% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 with a 20% probability of winning. Select option pattern 4 (choice details: "Top left: Princess, top right: Ninja, bottom left: Tono, bottom right: Princess") and select option pattern 5 (Choice contents: "Top left: Ninja, top right: Tono, bottom left: Ninja") with a 20% chance of winning. , lower right: panda), and option patterns 2 and 6 are not selected.

<Option pattern determination table/Attack character>
If the attacking character is Tono and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (lose), there is a 35% chance of winning option pattern 1 (option contents "Top left: Ronin, Top right: Princess, Bottom left: Ninja, Right Select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: Ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 35% probability of winning, and select option pattern with a 10% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 (option content: "Top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda"), and select option pattern 4 (choice content: "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: dono") with a 10% chance of winning. , lower right: princess), select option pattern 5 (option details: upper left: ninja, upper right: lord, lower left: ninja, lower right: panda) with a 10% chance of winning, and do not select option pattern 6. .

If the attacking character is Tono and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 to 3 (jackpot), there is a 20% chance of winning option pattern 1 (choice contents "top left: Ronin, top right: princess, bottom left: ninja, right Select option pattern 2 (choice details: upper left: Ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ronin, lower right: lord) with a 20% probability of winning. Select option pattern with a 20% probability of winning. Select option pattern 3 (choice details: "Top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda") and select option pattern 4 (choice contents: "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord") with a 20% chance of winning. , lower right: Princess), select option pattern 5 (option details: upper left: ninja, upper right: lord, lower left: ninja, lower right: panda) with a 20% chance of winning, and do not select option pattern 6. .

<Option pattern determination table/attack character panda>
If the attacking character is a panda, regardless of the decisive battle reach pattern, select option pattern 3 (option details "Top left: Princess, Top right: Ninja, Bottom left: Tono, Bottom right: Panda)" with a 50% chance of winning. With a 50% chance of winning, select option pattern 5 (option details: ``Top left: ninja, top right: lord, bottom left: ninja, bottom right: panda)'' and do not select option patterns 1, 2, 4, and 6.

Since the multiple options in the option pattern determination table according to this example include options that are not selected in the option pattern determination lottery, it is possible to increase the variation of options in the selection presentation and to provide surprises. , it is possible to prevent the players from getting bored with the performance and increase the players' interest.

Note that option pattern 2 (option content "Top left: Ronin, top right: Princess, bottom left: Ronin, bottom right: Tono") includes two ronin options, but when ronin is selected in option pattern 2, "Bottom left: Ronin" is always selected. In other words, even if ronin is selected in option pattern 2, "upper left: ronin" is never selected. In addition, option pattern 4 (option content "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: princess") includes two options for princess, but when princess is selected in option pattern 4, "Bottom right: Princess" is always selected. In other words, even if princess is selected in option pattern 4, "upper left: princess" is never selected.

Also, option pattern 5 (option content "Top left: ninja, top right: lord, bottom left: ninja, bottom right: panda") includes two ninja options, but when "ninja" is selected in option pattern 5, , "Bottom left: Ninja" is always selected. In other words, even if ninja is selected in option pattern 5, "upper left: human" is never selected. In addition, option pattern 6 (option content "top left: princess, top right: princess, bottom left: princess, bottom right: princess") includes four options for princess, but when "princess" is selected in option pattern 6, , "Bottom right: Princess" is always selected. In other words, even if princess is selected in option pattern 6, "upper left: princess", "upper right: princess", and "lower left: princess" are never selected.

As described above, the multiple options may include options that cannot be selected and displayed, so it is possible to increase the variation of options in the selection presentation and to provide surprises, so that the player can It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and increase the player's interest.

In addition, even if the same attacking character is selected, the expectation of winning the jackpot will vary depending on the type of option pattern, so it is possible to draw attention not only to the selected attacking character but also to the displayed options. This can prevent the players from getting bored with the performance and increase the players' interest.

<Example of decisive battle reach production>
Next, an example of the decisive battle reach effect will be described using FIGS. 15 and 16. Prior to the explanation of the decisive battle reach effect, the display contents on the decorative pattern display device 208 will be explained using FIG. 15(a). explain.

The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (hereinafter, these display areas may be referred to as "decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c") shown in FIG. 15(a) are The effect display area 208d is a display area that can display an image used for effect. In addition, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be changed freely within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

The special figure 1 reservation icon display area 281 located at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 is a display area where a reservation icon (for example, the reservation icon h11) indicating the reservation of the special pattern 1 can be displayed. The special figure 2 reservation icon display area 282 located at the lower right of 208 is a display area where a reservation icon indicating the reservation of special figure 2 can be displayed, and these special figure 1 reservation icon display area 281 and special figure 2 The variable icon display area 283 arranged between the pending icon display areas 282 is a display area in which a variable icon (eg, variable icon h0) corresponding to the special figure being displayed in a variable manner can be displayed.

At the upper left of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, there is a special pattern display area where a special pattern is displayed fluctuating or stopped in conjunction with the first special pattern display device 212 (or second special pattern display device 214) which is changing. SD is placed.

At the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a special figure 1 variable state display area ST1 where the state of the special figure 1 variable game can be displayed, and a special figure 2 variable state display where the state of the special figure 2 variable game can be displayed. A region ST2, a special figure 1 pending number display area SP1 that can display the number of reserves for the special figure 1 variable game, and a special figure 2 pending number display area SP2 that can display the number of reserves for the special figure 2 variable game are arranged. In addition, in the special pattern 1 variation state display area ST1 and the special pattern 2 variation state display area ST2, "-" is displayed during the special pattern variation, "〇" is displayed when the winning symbol stops, and when the losing symbol stops. "x" is displayed, and "△" is displayed when the time saving symbol is stopped.

<Example 1 of decisive battle reach effect>
FIGS. 15(a) to 15(r) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 1 of the decisive battle reach effect. This first embodiment is an example in which a decisive reach effect is executed according to a decisive reach pattern 3 (jackpot).

<Example 1 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Special Figure 1 Variable Game → Reach State>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a) is the state during the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, in the special figure 1 variation state display area ST1, a "-" indicating that the special figure is being varied is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. .

The state shown in FIG. 15(b) is the reach state of the special symbol 1 variable game. In this example, since special pattern A (jackpot 2) was won in the special pattern 1 variable game, the combination of decorative patterns corresponding to special pattern A (jackpot 2) (in this example , "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7") is displayed, indicating that it is in the reach state.

<Example 1 of Decisive Battle Reach Effect/Decisive Battle Reach Effect>
The state shown in FIG. 15(c) is the state where the decisive battle reach effect has started.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, triggered by the reach state in the special figure 1 variable game, uses random numbers to perform a decisive reach pattern determination lottery for determining a decisive reach pattern. In this example, since the judgment of the special drawing 1 is a jackpot, one decisive reach pattern 3 (jackpot) is selected from the decisive reach patterns 1 to 3 (jackpot).

Subsequently, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects a decisive reach pattern through a decisive battle reach pattern determination lottery, and then determines a line pattern based on the starting line determination table and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held to determine the lines. In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), dialogue pattern 2 (speech content "Good opportunity!!") is selected as the dialogue pattern.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), in this example, a start effect indicating that the decisive battle reach effect has started (in this example, a character string "Decisive Battle!!" is displayed) is displayed in the effect display area 208d. At the same time, the character C1 of the main character, the line R1 corresponding to line pattern 2 (line content ``Good opportunity!!''), and the character C2 of the enemy ronin are also displayed.

<Example 1 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Selection Production (1st Time)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(d) is the state where the selection effect (first time) has started.

After selecting a decisive battle reach pattern through a decisive battle reach pattern determination lottery, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects the first character pattern based on the character pattern determination table (first time) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. A character pattern determination lottery (first time) will be held to determine the character pattern. In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), character pattern 2 (attacking character type "princess") is selected as the first character pattern.

Subsequently, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (first time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 generates an option pattern for determining an option pattern based on the attack character selected in the lottery and the decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held. In this example, since the attacking character is a princess and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), option pattern 3 (option contents "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda)" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 15(d), in this example, the princess character S1 is created in response to option pattern 3 (option content "upper left: princess, upper right: ninja, lower left: lord, lower right: panda"). A ninja character S2 is displayed at the top left of the display area 208d, a lord character S3 is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display area 208d, a lord character S3 is displayed at the bottom right of the performance display area 208d, and a panda character S4 is displayed at the bottom right of the performance display area 208d. After that, by lighting up each of the characters S1 to S4 in order, a roulette display is performed to show which of the characters S1 to S4 will be lit up in the end.

The state shown in FIG. 15(e) is a state in which a character is selected in the selection effect. In this example, the princess character displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d is selected. In addition, in the selection performance, the player may arbitrarily select a character using an operating means, or the character may be arbitrarily selected by lottery or the like using a control means such as the first sub-control unit 400. It may be configured as follows.

<Example 1 of decisive battle reach performance / decisive battle reach performance (1st time)>
FIGS. 15(f) and 15(g) show states in which the decisive battle reach effect (first time) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 15(f), in this example, the princess character C3 corresponding to character pattern 2 (attack character type "Princess") and the character string "Princess attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. After that, as shown in FIG. 15(g), the remaining physical strength of the enemy ronin character C2, who was attacked for the first time, is displayed by a meter display HP1.

<Example 1 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Selection Production (Second Time)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(h) is the state where the selection effect (second time) has started.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the character pattern determination lottery (second time) for determining the second character pattern based on the character pattern determination table (second time, third time) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. I do. In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), character pattern 2 (attacking character type "princess") is selected as the second character pattern.

Subsequently, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 generates an option pattern for determining an option pattern based on the attack character selected in the lottery and the decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held. In this example, since the attacking character is a princess and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), option pattern 4 (option contents "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: princess)" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), in this example, the princess character S5 is created in response to option pattern 4 (option content "upper left: princess, upper right: ninja, lower left: lord, lower right: princess"). A ninja character S6 is displayed at the top left of the display area 208d, a lord character S7 is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display area 208d, a lord character S7 is displayed at the bottom right of the performance display area 208d, and a princess character S8 is displayed at the bottom right of the performance display area 208d. After that, by lighting up each of the characters S1 to S4 in order, a roulette display is performed to show which of the characters S1 to S4 will be lit up in the end.

According to the selection presentation in this example, since multiple identical choices (princess) may be displayed, it is possible to increase the variation of options in the selection presentation and to add surprise, allowing the player to It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and increase the player's interest.

The state shown in FIG. 15(i) is a state in which a character is selected in the selection effect. In this example, the princess character displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d is selected.

<Example 1 of decisive battle reach performance / decisive battle reach performance (second time)>
FIGS. 15(j) and 15(k) show states in which the decisive battle reach effect (second time) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 15(j), in this example, the princess character C3 corresponding to character pattern 2 (attack character type "Princess") and the character string "Princess attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. Afterwards, as shown in FIG. 15(k), the remaining physical strength of the enemy ronin character C2, who was attacked for the second time, is displayed by a meter display HP1.

<Example 1 of decisive battle reach effect / decisive battle reach effect (pursuit)>
FIGS. 15(l) and 15(m) show states in which a decisive battle reach effect (pursuit) is being executed.

When the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects the character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit) and the character pattern determination table 2 (pursuit) after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time). Based on the second character pattern (second attacking character) selected in the determination lottery (second time), a pursuit character pattern determination lottery is performed to determine a character pattern for pursuit.

In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot) and the second character is a princess, character pattern 4 (attacking character type "Tono") is selected as the pursuit character pattern.

As shown in FIG. 15(l), in this example, the lord character C1 corresponding to character pattern 4 (attack character type "Tono") and the character string "Pursuit! Tono attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. After displaying, as shown in FIG. 15(m), the remaining physical strength of the enemy ronin character C2 who was chased is displayed by the meter display HP1.

According to the decisive battle reach performance in this example, even if an option (princess) with low expectations is selected in the selection performance and a performance corresponding to the low expectation option is executed, the selection performance will not be selected later in the selection performance. Since there are cases where a performance is executed in accordance with a highly anticipated option (player) that was not available, the player's expectation level can be maintained and the operating rate can be increased. Note that if there is a case where a performance corresponding to an option that is not displayed as an option is executed in the selection performance, a surprising performance can be provided and the player's interest can be increased.

<Example 1 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Selection Production (3rd Time)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(n) is the state where the selection effect (third time) has started.

When the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 selects the character pattern determination table 1 (second and third time) and the decisive battle pattern after completing the pursuit character pattern determination lottery. Based on the type of reach pattern, a character pattern determination lottery (third time) is performed to determine the third character pattern.

In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), character pattern 5 (attacking character type "panda") is selected as the third character pattern.

Subsequently, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (third time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 generates an option pattern for determining an option pattern based on the attack character selected in the lottery and the decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held. In this example, since the attacking character is a panda and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 3 (jackpot), option pattern 5 (choice contents "top left: ninja, top right: lord, bottom left: ninja, bottom right: panda)" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 15(n), in this example, the ninja character S9 is created in response to option pattern 5 (option content "top left: ninja, top right: lord, bottom left: ninja, bottom right: panda"). The lord character S10 is displayed in the upper left of the display area 208d, the ninja character S11 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d, the ninja character S11 is displayed in the lower right of the effect display area 208d, and the panda character S12 is displayed in the lower right of the effect display area 208d. After that, by lighting up each of the characters S1 to S4 in order, a roulette display is performed to show which of the characters S1 to S4 will be lit up in the end.

According to the selection presentation in this example, since multiple identical options (ninja) may be displayed, it is possible to increase the variation of options in the selection presentation and add surprise, allowing the player to It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and increase the player's interest.

The state shown in FIG. 15(o) is a state in which a character is selected in the selection effect. In this example, the panda character S12 displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d is selected.

<Example 1 of decisive battle reach performance / decisive battle reach performance (3rd time)>
FIGS. 15(p) and 15(q) show states in which the decisive battle reach effect (third time) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 15(p), in this example, the panda character C4 corresponding to character pattern 5 (attack character type "panda") and the character string "Panda attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. Afterwards, as shown in FIG. 15(q), the meter display HP1 indicates that the enemy ronin character C2, who has been attacked for the third time, has 0 remaining physical strength.

The state shown in FIG. 15(r) is the state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended. In this example, since special pattern A (jackpot 2) was won in the special pattern 1 variable game, an "〇" is displayed in the special pattern 1 variation state display area ST1 to indicate that the winning pattern has stopped. In the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c and the special pattern display area SD, the combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7") corresponding to special pattern A (Jackpot 2) is displayed in a stopped state. are doing.

<Example 2 of decisive battle reach effect>
FIGS. 16(a) to 16(k) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 2 of the decisive battle reach effect. This second embodiment is an example in which a decisive battle reach effect is executed according to decisive battle reach pattern 1 (loss). The effects shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(g) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(g), so they are given the same reference numerals in the drawings and their explanations are is omitted.

<Example 2 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Selection Production (Second Time)>
The state shown in FIG. 16(h) is the state where the selection effect (second time) has started.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the character pattern determination lottery (second time) for determining the second character pattern based on the character pattern determination table (second time, third time) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. I do. In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 (loss), character pattern 1 (attacking character type "ronin (enemy character)") is selected as the second character pattern.

Subsequently, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 generates an option pattern for determining an option pattern based on the attack character selected in the lottery and the decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held. In this example, since the attacking character is Ronin (enemy character) and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 (loss), option pattern 1 (option content "Top left: Ronin, Top right: Princess, Bottom left: Ninja, Right Below: Selected.

As shown in FIG. 16(h), in this example, the ronin character S5 is produced in response to option pattern 1 (option content "upper left: ronin, upper right: princess, lower left: ninja, lower right: lord"). The princess character S6 is displayed in the upper left of the display area 208d, the ninja character S7 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d, the ninja character S7 is displayed in the lower right of the effect display area 208d, and the lord character S8 is displayed in the lower right of the effect display area 208d. After that, by lighting up each of the characters S1 to S4 in order, a roulette display is performed to show which of the characters S1 to S4 will be lit up in the end.

The state shown in FIG. 16(i) is a state in which a character is selected in the selection effect. In this example, the ronin character displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d is selected.

<Example 2 of decisive battle reach performance / decisive battle reach performance (second time)>
FIGS. 16(j) and 16(k) show a state in which the decisive battle reach effect (second time) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 16(j), in this example, the ronin character C2 corresponding to character pattern 1 (attack character type "ronin (enemy character)") and the words "ronin attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. After displaying the column, as shown in FIG. 16(k), a display (in this example, a display of the character string "defeat") indicating that the loss (loss of the winning/failing judgment) has been confirmed in the decisive battle reach effect is displayed. At the same time, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the loss (in this example, "Decoration 7-Decoration 8-Decoration 7") is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

<Example 3 of decisive battle reach effect>
FIG. 16(h') to FIG. 16(k') are diagrams showing a part of Example 3 of decisive battle reach effect in chronological order, and are diagrams corresponding to FIG. 16(h) to FIG. 16(k). It is.

This third embodiment is an example in which a decisive reach effect is executed according to the decisive reach pattern 1 (jackpot). Note that the effects before the effect shown in FIG. 16(h') are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(g), so their description will be omitted.

<Example 3 of Decisive Battle Reach Production/Selection Production (Second Time)>
The state shown in FIG. 16(h') is the state where the selection effect (second time) has started.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the character pattern determination lottery (second time) for determining the second character pattern based on the character pattern determination table (second time, third time) and the type of decisive battle reach pattern. I do. In this example, since the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 (jackpot), character pattern 5 (attacking character type "panda") is selected as the second character pattern.

Subsequently, after completing the character pattern determination lottery (second time), the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 generates an option pattern for determining an option pattern based on the attack character selected in the lottery and the decisive battle reach pattern. A lottery will be held. In this example, since the attacking character is a panda and the decisive battle reach pattern is decisive battle reach pattern 1 (jackpot), option pattern 3 (option contents "top left: princess, top right: ninja, bottom left: lord, bottom right: panda)" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16(h'), in this example, the princess character S5 is The ninja character S6 is placed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d, the lord character S7 is placed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the panda character S8 is placed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. After the display, each of the characters S1 to S4 is lit up in turn to create a roulette display that shows which of the characters S1 to S4 will be lit up in the end.

The state shown in FIG. 16(i') is a state in which a character is selected in the selection effect. In this example, the panda character displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d is selected.

<Example 3 of decisive battle reach performance / decisive battle reach performance (second time)>
FIGS. 16(j') and 16(k') show states in which the decisive battle reach effect (second time) is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 16(j'), in this example, the panda character C4 corresponding to character pattern 5 (attack character type "panda") and the character string "Panda attack!" are displayed in the effect display area 208d. After that, as shown in FIG. 16(k'), a display (in this example, a display of the character string "Victory") indicating that the victory (jackpot in the judgment of success or failure) has been confirmed in the decisive battle reach effect is displayed. , In the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") corresponding to special pattern A (Jackpot 2) is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

<Variation example of selection effect>
Next, a modification of the selection effect will be described using FIG. 17.

<Variation of selection effect/Card selection effect>
FIGS. 17(a) to 17(g) are diagrams showing an example of card selection performance. The card selection performance is a performance in which one card is selected from a plurality of cards (three in this example), and is a type of selection performance.

The state shown in FIG. 17(a) is the state during the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and in the special pattern 1 variation state display area ST1, a "-" is displayed to indicate that the special pattern is in the process of variation. .

The state shown in FIG. 17(b) is the state where the card selection effect has started. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the card selection performance when the start condition for the card selection performance is satisfied (for example, when a specific special symbol is won in the special symbol variation game).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in this example, a start effect (in this example, a display of a character string "Card Select Effect") indicating that a card selection effect has started is displayed in the effect display area 208d. At the same time, a message display MG1 (in this example, a display of a character string "Please select a card!") prompting the player to select a card is displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 17(c) to 17(e) are states in which the player is selecting a card in the card selection effect. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 displays a card selection screen in the card selection performance for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) after the start of the card selection performance.

As shown in FIG. 17(c), in the card selection screen of this example, a button image B1 imitating the appearance of the first operation means (in this example, the enter key of the operation key unit 190) is displayed in the effect display area 208d. , a meter display HP2 indicating the remaining time for card selection, a first card S5, a second card S6, a third card S7, and a downward selection indicating the position of the tentatively selected card. Arrow A1 is displayed.

Then, in accordance with the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the left and right keys of the cross key of the operation key unit 190), the position of the selection arrow A1 is moved to the left or right, and the remaining time indicated by the meter display HP2 is decreased. At the same time, when the first operation means (the enter key of the operation key unit 190) is pressed, the card indicated by the selection arrow A1 is selected.

FIG. 17(d) shows that the selection arrow A1 has been moved above the second card S6 by the second operating means (the left and right keys of the cross key of the operating key unit 190), and FIG. 17(e) shows that the selection arrow A1 has been moved above the second card S6. When the first operation means (the enter key of the operation key unit 190) is pressed, the second card S6 indicated by the selection arrow A1 is selected, the second card S6 is turned over, and the corresponding A display written on the front of the card (in this example, a display of the character string "pseudo-ren") appears.

As shown in FIG. 17(f), in this example, the card selection screen is erased in the effect display area 208d, and a pseudo-association effect corresponding to the display (pseudo-association) written on the front surface of the second card S6 is displayed. After executing the above, as shown in FIG. 6(g), the special figure 1 variable display that was being executed before the card selection effect is restarted.

Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is capable of performing a card selection performance that is different from the selection performance described using FIGS. 15 and 16, it is possible to increase variations in selection performance, and prevent players from getting bored with the performance. It is possible to prevent this and increase the interest of the players.

Although not shown, the display written on the front of the card, like the character pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Since this has been determined, as shown in FIG. Even if the display is the same as the display (pseudo-connection) written on the surface of the second card S6, the display is configured so that the same display as the display (pseudo-connection) appears, and no matter which option is selected in the card selection effect, the card Since the results after the execution of the selection performance (in this example, the pseudo-connection performance) are the same, the expectations held by the players after the execution of the card selection performance are also the same. In other words, in the card selection performance of this example, it can be said that the expectation level of winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the selected option (first card S5 to third card S7).

In addition, in this example, the character string "pseudo-ren" is shown as an example of the display written on the front of the card, but the display written on the front of the card is the character string "pseudo-ren". It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. For example, the character string "Episode Reach" may be displayed to suggest that "Episode Reach" will be executed, or it may indicate that there is a high expectation of winning the jackpot of the fluctuating effect such as "Chance". It is also possible to display a string of characters.

<Variation example of selection production/Episode selection production>
FIGS. 17(h) to 17(m) are diagrams showing an example of episode selection performance. The episode selection performance is a performance in which one episode is selected from a plurality of types (in this example, three types) of episodes as an episode executed during the episode reach, and is a type of selection performance.

The state shown in FIG. 17(h) is the reach state of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, it is indicated that the combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7") corresponding to special pattern A (Jackpot 2) is in the reach state. "Decoration 7 - (Fluctuating) - Decoration 7" is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 17(i) is a state in the middle of transition to episode selection presentation, and the state shown in FIG. 17(j) is a state in which episode presentation has started.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the episode selection performance when the start condition for the episode selection performance is satisfied (for example, when the ready-to-win state is reached in the special symbol variation game).

As shown in FIG. 17(i), in this example, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a transition effect (in this example, a part of the decorative pattern is After the start effect MG2 (in this example, the words "Episode Reach Development") indicating that the episode selection effect has started is displayed in the effect display area 208d, as shown in FIG. column display).

The states shown in FIGS. 17(k) to 17(l) are states in which the player selects an episode in the episode selection performance. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 displays an episode selection screen in the episode selection performance for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) after the start of the episode selection performance.

As shown in FIG. 17(k), in the episode selection screen of this example, a message display MG3 (in this example, a message "Please select an episode") prompting the player to select a card is displayed in the effect display area 208d. a button image B2 imitating the appearance of the third operation means (in this example, the cross key of the operation key unit 190), and a meter display HP3 indicating the remaining time for episode selection. The first episode S8, the second episode S9, and the third episode S10 are displayed.

Then, in response to the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the left and right keys of the cross key of the operation key unit 190), the first episode S8, the second episode S9, and the third episode S10 are displayed. The positions are changed, the remaining time indicated by the meter display HP3 is decreased, and the episode displayed in the center when the first operating means (the enter key of the operating key unit 190) is pressed is selected.

As shown in FIG. 17(l), in this example, the third episode S10 is moved to the center by the operation of the second operation means (the left and right keys of the cross key of the operation key unit 190), and the third episode When the means (decision key of the operation key unit 190) is pressed, the third episode S10 is selected, and the episode selection screen is erased in the effect display area 208d as shown in FIG. The effect C4 corresponding to the third episode S10 is being executed.

Since the pachinko machine 100 according to this example is capable of executing an episode selection effect that is different from the selection effects described using FIGS. 15 and 16, it is possible to increase variations in selection effects and prevent players from getting bored with the effects. It is possible to prevent this and increase the interest of the players.

In addition, since the execution of the episode reach is determined in advance depending on whether it is a jackpot or not, in the episode selection performance, the first episode S8 and the second episode S9 other than the third episode S10 are selected. Even if it is, the expectation level of winning the episodic reach jackpot remains the same. In other words, in the episode selection performance of this example, although the episodes (visual performance) to be executed differ depending on the selected option (first episode S8 to third episode S10), the expectation of winning the jackpot is Since the degree does not differ, it can be said that the episode selection performance is a performance in which the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the selected option (first episode S8 to third episode S10).

As mentioned above, the selection performance in decisive battle reach is a performance with different expectations for winning the jackpot depending on the selected option (character pattern 1 to character pattern 5), while the card selection performance and episode selection performance are It can be said that this is a performance in which the level of expectation of winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the choices made (first card S5 to third card S7, first episode S8 to third episode S10). By doing this, it is possible to increase the variety of selection effects, prevent the player from getting bored with the effects, and increase the player's interest.

Note that the card select effect and episode select effect have been described as modified examples of the selection effect in decisive battle reach, but all of these effects may be executed in the same variable effect, or any two may be executed in the same variable effect. It may also be executed in a variable performance.

<Count performance>
Next, the count effect will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 21. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a count effect that updates a count display (display showing a certain numerical value), and when a timer measurement start condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied, the count display is updated. It is configured to be updatable and to stop updating the count display when a timer measurement stop condition is met.

<Count performance/timer measurement start conditions>
FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of timer measurement start conditions. In this example, two types of conditions 1 and 2 are set as timer measurement start conditions. Note that the number of timer measurement start conditions is not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types.

Condition 1 of the timer measurement start condition is established when the special figure 2 variable display by the second special figure display device 214 is started in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving gaming state 2 (7, 140, 147). Condition 2 is a condition that is satisfied when the ball passes through a specific area (V area) while the timer is not measuring. In other words, condition 2 is a case where a small winning game is executed and the ball passes through a specific area (V area) without the special figure 2 variable display starting in a state where the timer measurement stop condition described later is satisfied. This is a condition that allows the timer to restart measurement even in regular situations.

When any of these conditions 1 to 2 is satisfied, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts counting (measurement) of the timer stored in the RAM 408, and starts the count effect. When the condition is met, a count performance that updates the count display indicated by the timer value is started.

The timer measurement start conditions of this example include that the second special symbol display device 214 is executing the special symbol 2 variation display (the second special symbol variation display), so the second special symbol variation display You can synchronize the execution and update of the count display. For example, if you leave your seat for a break during Rush, and the timer continues to update while you are away, the actual time played and the count display will be displayed. Although there is a risk that the numbers may deviate from each other, with this configuration, it is possible to count the time actually spent playing Rush.

In addition to the conditions 1 and 2 above, a condition may be provided that the prize is won in the third starting port 234 (third starting means) while the timer is not measuring.

<Count performance/timer measurement stop conditions>
FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of timer measurement stop conditions. In this example, six types of conditions 1 to 6 are set as timer measurement stop conditions. Note that the number of timer measurement stop conditions is not limited to six types, and may be one to five types, or seven or more types.

Condition 1 of the timer measurement stop condition is a condition that is satisfied when the special figure 2 variable display by the second special figure display device 214 is stopped, and condition 2 is a condition that is satisfied when the number of pending special figure 2 variable games becomes 0. Condition 3 is a condition that holds true when the jackpot game is not in progress, Condition 4 is a condition that holds true when timer measurement has started, and Condition 5 is a condition that holds true when the gaming state is Condition 6 is a condition that is satisfied in the time-saving game state 2, and condition 6 is a condition that is satisfied when the game is not irregular. Note that the irregular period refers to a period during which the guidance display MG12, which will be described later, is displayed.

The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 stops counting (measurement) of the timer when all conditions 1 to 6 are satisfied, and when the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. At this time, the count indicated by the value of the timer at the time of stop continues to be displayed.

<Count effect/timer reset conditions>
FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing an example of timer reset conditions. In this example, one type of condition 1 is set as the timer reset condition. Note that the number of timer reset conditions is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types.

Condition 1 of the timer reset conditions is a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot start command is received from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 sets (resets) the value of the timer to an initial value (for example, 0) when Condition 1 is satisfied.

<Example of count performance>
Next, an example of the count performance will be described using FIGS. 19 and 20. FIGS. 19(a) to 19(r) and FIGS. 20(a) to 20(i) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 1 of the count effect.

The state shown in FIG. 19(a) is a state in which the swing fluctuation display is performed during the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is in progress, a "-" indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is in progress is displayed in the special figure 1 variable state display area ST1, and the special figure 1 variable game is in progress. Since figure A (jackpot 2) has been won, the combination of decorative figures corresponding to special figure A (jackpot 2) (in this example, "decoration 7 - decoration 7 - decoration 7") is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 19(b) is the state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended. In this example, since the special pattern A (jackpot 2) has been won in the special pattern 1 variable game, "0" is displayed in the special pattern 1 variable state display area ST1 to indicate that the winning pattern has stopped. At the same time, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") corresponding to special pattern A (Jackpot 2) is displayed in a stopped state.

<Example of counting performance/Jackpot game (Jackpot 2)>
The state shown in FIG. 19(c) is a state in which jackpot 2 (first jackpot) among a plurality of types of jackpot games has been started. In this example, in the performance display area 208d, a jackpot start performance MG4 (in this example, a character string "Jackpot!! 3000pt" is displayed) indicating that a jackpot game (Jackpot 2) has started, and a message to the player is displayed. A first right-handed hitting warning U1 (in this example, a display of the character string “Right-handed →”) and a second right-handed hitting warning U2 (in this example, a character string “Right-handed →” is displayed) that encourages right-handed batting. Displaying an oval image).

The state shown in FIG. 19(d) is the state immediately after winning the variable winning hole 235 in the jackpot game (Jackpot 2) and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in this example). In this example, in the performance display area 208d, the first right-handed warning U1 is continuously displayed, and a jackpot background indicating that a jackpot game (jackpot 2) is in progress is newly displayed, and a payout is added. A first total number display MG5 indicating the total number of balls put out, a second total number display MG6 indicating the total number of balls put out, and a payout display indicating the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning opening 235 (in this example, "+15") The character string (display) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 19(e) is the state immediately after winning the second special figure starting hole 232 in the jackpot game (Jackpot 2) and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (in this example, one ball). . In this example, in the performance display area 208d, the first right hit warning U1, the jackpot background display, the first total payout number display MG5, and the second total payout number display MG6 are continuously displayed, and A new payout display (in this example, a display of a character string "+1") indicating the number of prize balls paid out by winning the second special figure start opening 232 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 19(f) is the state after the first total payout number display MG5 and the second total payout number display MG6 are updated. In this example, after adding the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 to the total number of paid out balls, in the effect display area 208d, the updated first total number of payouts is displayed MG5. and a second payout total number display MG6.

The state shown in FIG. 19(g) is the ending of the jackpot game (jackpot 2). In this example, at the ending of the jackpot game (Jackpot 2), a new warning display MG7 is displayed in the effect display area 208d to call the player's attention (in this example, "Be careful not to get carried away. Don't forget to take out the card. Displaying an image containing the string "Please be careful.") is displayed.

<Example of count performance/Jackpot game (Jackpot 2) → Time-saving game state 1>
The state shown in FIG. 19(h) is a state in which the time-saving game state 1 (second game state) that has been transferred from the jackpot game (jackpot 2) has started.

In the time-saving game state 1 (second game state), during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game (first symbol variable display), the variable display of decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol While the special figure 2 variable game (second pattern variation display) is being executed, the decorative pattern variation display (second decorative pattern variation display) is not executed in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c. It is configured not to run.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the gaming state based on the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

In addition, in this example, while erasing the attention display MG7 that was displayed at the end of the jackpot game (jackpot 2), in the performance display area 208d, the first alert display that was displayed during the jackpot game (jackpot 2) is deleted. The right hit warning U1, the jackpot background display, the first total payout number display MG5, and the second total payout number display MG6 are continuously displayed.

Time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) is a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third starting port 234 (third starting means), and the next jackpot is substantially determined, so it is a jackpot game (jackpot 2 ) By continuing the jackpot background (a certain performance) that was being performed in ), two wins can be made to look like one win, and the player's desire to play can be sustained.

In the state shown in FIG. 19(i), in the time-saving game state 1, a prize is won in the second special figure start opening 232, the number of reserved special figures 2 variable games is added by one, and a predetermined number (in this example, 1 This is the state immediately after paying out the prize balls.

In this example, in the effect display area 208d, the first right-hit warning U1, the jackpot background, the first total payout number display MG5, and the second total payout number display MG6 are continuously displayed.

In addition, in the production display area 208d, a payout display (in this example, a display of the character string "+1") indicating the number of prize balls paid out by winning the second special figure starting port 232 is displayed, and the time is reduced. When a predetermined period of time (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of game state 1, a third right-handed warning U3 (in this example, "Please hit right") is issued to prompt the player to play right. The character string ``underlined'' is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 19(j) is the state immediately after winning the third starting hole 234 in the time-saving game state 1 and paying out a predetermined number (in this example, one) of prize balls. In this example, after adding the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 to the total number of paid out balls, in the effect display area 208d, the updated first total number of payouts is displayed MG5. and a second payout total number display MG6.

On the other hand, in this example, the payout display (for example, display of the character string "+1") indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the third starting port 234 is not executed, and the total number of balls paid out is It is configured so that the number of prize balls paid out by winning the third starting hole 234 is not added.

The state shown in FIG. 19(k) is a state in which the ball has passed through a specific area in a small winning game based on the winning of the third starting port 234, and the state shown in FIG. 19(l) is from the time-saving game state 1. This is the state in which the transferred jackpot game (Jackpot 3) has been completed. In this example, in the performance display area 208d, after erasing the display of the jackpot background, a preview display MG8 (in this example, " !!” character string) is displayed.

<Example of count performance/Jackpot game (Jackpot 3) → Time-saving game state 2>
The state shown in FIG. 19(m) is a state in which the time-saving game state 2 (third game state) which has been transferred from the jackpot game (jackpot 3) has started.

In the time-saving game state 2 (third game state), while the special figure 1 variable game (first symbol variable display) is being executed, the variable display of decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol) is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. While the special figure 2 variable game (second pattern variation display) is not executed, the decorative pattern variation display (second decorative pattern variation display) is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c. is configured to run.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the gaming state based on the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

As shown in FIG. 19(m), in this example, in the special figure 2 variation state display area ST2, a "-" indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed, and in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the decoration is displayed. At the same time as displaying the fluctuation display of the symbols, in the performance display area 208d, the end condition of the time-saving game state 2 (in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 reaches 7 times, or when the number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 A remaining variable game count display RD (in this example, a display of a character string "140 times") indicating a part of the total number of fluctuating games (when the total number of fluctuating times reaches 147) is displayed.

In addition, in this example, in a state where Condition 1 of the timer measurement start condition explained using FIG. Since the second special figure display device 214 has started the special figure 2 variable display, the timer starts counting (measurement) and the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value (in this example, "RUSH TIME 00:00: A count effect has started to update the character string (display of the character string "00").

In the state shown in FIG. 19(n), a prize is won in the second special figure starting slot 232 in the time-saving game state 2, the number of pending special figures 2 variable games is added by one, and a predetermined number (in this example, 1 This is the state immediately after paying out the prize balls.

In this example, in the effect display area 208d, the first right hit warning U1, the jackpot background display, and the first payout total number display MG5 are continuously displayed, and the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value is displayed. The count continues to update.

On the other hand, in this example, the payout display (for example, display of the character string "+1") indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the second special figure start opening 232 is not executed, and the total number of balls paid out is It is configured so that the number of prize balls paid out by winning the second special figure start opening 232 is not added to the number.

The state shown in FIG. 19(o) is the state during the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, in the special figure 2 variation state display area ST2, a "-" indicating that the special figure is being varied is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. .

In addition, since all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions explained using FIG. Display TG1 is being updated.

The state shown in FIG. 19(p) is the state in which the special figure 2 variable game has ended. In this example, in the special figure 2 fluctuating state display area ST2, an "x" is displayed indicating that the losing symbol has stopped, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the losing symbol (in this example In this example, a stop display of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 1" is displayed.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 19(p), the second special figure display device 214 stops the special figure 2 variable display, the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is 0, the jackpot game is not in progress, and the timer measurement is started. Since the game has started, the game state is time saving game state 2, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are satisfied, the timer count is stopped and the timer value is set in the count effect. The count display TG1 indicated by is updated to the count display indicated by the value of the stopped timer (in this example, "RUSH TIME 00:19:99").

If the timer continues to count unconditionally, there is a risk that the count display will deviate from the actual time played in Rush, but according to the count performance in this example, if the timer measurement start conditions are not met. In addition, the count display may continue to be displayed in the count performance without updating the count display, so the count display can be updated accurately and the time actually spent playing Rush can be counted. .

The state shown in FIG. 19(q) is a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the previous special figure 2 variable game ended, and the state shown in FIG. 19(r) is the time saving game state 2. In this state, a prize is won in the first special figure starting hole 230 and the special figure 1 variable game is started.

In both states of FIG. 19 (q) and (r), all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are satisfied, so the timer count is maintained in a stopped state and the count performance is performed. , the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer is updated to the count display indicated by the value of the stopped timer (in this example, "RUSH TIME 00:19:99"). Note that when the timer stops counting, the last two digits of the count display TG1 are updated to "99". That is, if the timer measurement stop condition is satisfied, the state where the timer counting is stopped is maintained even during the special figure 1 variable game.

The state shown in FIG. 20(a) is a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is in progress and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 variable game is three. In this example, the special figure 2 fluctuation by the second special figure display device 214 is performed in a state where condition 1 of the timer measurement start condition is satisfied, that is, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving gaming state 2 (7, 140, 147). Since the display has started, counting of the timer is started (restarted), and in the count performance, the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer is updated.

The state shown in FIG. 20(b) is the state in which the special figure 2 variable game has ended. In this example, since the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) was won in the special symbol 2 variable game, "△" indicating that the time-saving symbol is stopped is displayed in the special symbol 2 variable state display area ST2, and In the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c and the special pattern display area SD, a stop display of the combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4") corresponding to the special pattern E (time saving pattern 1) is displayed. are doing.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 20(b) is a state in which the number of pending special drawing 2 variable games is three, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not satisfied, so the timer is Counting is continued, and the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value is updated in the count performance.

<Example of count performance/Time-saving game state 2 → Time-saving game state 1>
The state shown in FIG. 20(c) is a state in which the time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) which has been transferred from the time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state) has started.

In the time-saving game state 1 (second game state), during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game (first symbol variable display), the variable display of decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol While the special figure 2 variable game (second pattern variation display) is being executed, the decorative pattern variation display (second decorative pattern variation display) is not executed in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c. It is configured not to run.

Additionally, in this example, a fourth right-handed warning U4 (in this example, an oval image containing the character string "Right-handed →") is newly displayed in the effect display area 208d to prompt the player to play right-handed. ) is displayed. This fourth right-hand hitting warning U4 (attention-calling display) is a display in the time-saving game state 1 which is triggered by the winning (display) of the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1), and is shown in FIG. 19(i). At least part of the display format is different from the third right-handed warning U3 (alert display) in time-saving game state 1, which was transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game (jackpot 2), and the jackpot background continues to be displayed. It is not an indication that it is.

According to this example, the mode of the warning display can be changed depending on the trigger for transition to the second gaming state, and the variation of the warning display in the time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) can be increased. Can be done.

The state shown in FIG. 20(d) is the state immediately after winning a prize in the third starting slot 234 in the time saving game state 1 and paying out a predetermined number (in this example, one prize ball). In this example, the payout display (for example, display of the character string "+1") indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the third starting port 234 is not executed, and the third start It is configured so that the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting hole 234 is not added.

<Example of count performance/Time-saving game state 1 → Small hit game → Jackpot game>
The state shown in FIG. 20(e) is a state in which the ball passes through a specific area in a small winning game based on the winning of the third starting port 234, and the state shown in FIG. It has been upgraded to a game.

In this example, in the effect display area 208d, after erasing the fourth right-handed warning U4, a jackpot background indicating that the game has been promoted to a jackpot (jackpot 1), a first payout total number display MG5, and a second payout are displayed. A total number display MG6 and a payout display (in this example, a display of a character string "+15") indicating the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning hole 235 are displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 20(g) and (h) are states in which the jackpot game (jackpot 1), which has been promoted from the small win game, has been completed.

In this example, in the performance display area 208d, after erasing the display of the jackpot background, a preview display MG9 indicating that the game will move to time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) (in this example, " !!” character string) is displayed.

In addition, in the states shown in FIGS. 20(c) to (h), the jackpot game is in progress, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not satisfied, so the timer continues counting. In the count effect, the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer is updated.

<Example 1 of counting performance/Jackpot game → Time-saving game state 1>
The state shown in FIG. 20(i) is a state in which the time-saving gaming state 1 (second gaming state) has been entered. In this state, the special figure 2 variable game is in progress and the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is 1, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not met, so the timer is Counting continues, and in the count performance, the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer is updated to "RUSH TIME 01:24:10".

According to this example, since it is possible to perform a count effect that updates the count display, for example, a count display indicating the time from entering a so-called rush until the end of the rush is performed, and within a predetermined time (for example, It is possible to provide a new game in which a plurality of players compete to see how many jackpots they can win within 10 minutes, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine.

<Variation example 1 of count performance>
FIGS. 20(b') and 20(j) are diagrams illustrating the first modification of the count effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 20(b') is a state in which the special symbol F (time-saving symbol 2) is won in the special symbol 2 variable game. In this example, in the special pattern 2 fluctuation state display area ST2, a "△" indicating that the time-saving pattern is stopped is displayed, and in the special pattern display area SD, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern F (time-saving pattern 2) is displayed. A preview display MG10 indicating that the combination (in this example, "Decoration 1 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 1") is stopped, and also suggests that a new time-saving game state 2 will be started in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (In this example, the character string "Restart" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20(j) is a state in which the time-saving game state 2 (third game state), which is transitioned to when the special figure F (time-saving symbol 2) is won (displayed), has started. In this example, in the special figure 2 variation state display area ST2, a "-" indicating that the special figure is being varied is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since the time-saving game state 2 has been newly started, the remaining variation number display RD is updated from 137 times to 140 times.

In addition, the state shown in FIGS. 20(b') and (j) is that the number of pending special drawing 2 variable games is 1 or more, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not satisfied. From then on, the timer continues counting, and in the count performance, the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value is updated.

<Example of production of jackpot game (jackpot 1)>
Next, an example of the performance of the jackpot game (jackpot 1) will be explained using FIGS. 20(k) to 20(p). In addition, FIG. 20(k) to FIG. 20(p) are diagrams showing an example of performance of the jackpot game (jackpot 1) in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 20(k) is the state during the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is in progress, a "-" indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is in progress is displayed in the special figure 1 variable state display area ST1, and the special figure 1 variable game is in progress. Since Figure B (Jackpot 1) has been won, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to Special Figure B (Jackpot 1) (in this example, "Decoration 2 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 2") is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 20(l) is the state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended. In this example, since special pattern B (jackpot 1) was won in the special pattern 1 variable game, an "〇" is displayed in the special pattern 1 variation state display area ST1 to indicate that the winning symbol has stopped. In the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2") corresponding to special symbol B (Jackpot 1) is displayed in a stopped state.

The state shown in FIG. 20(m) is a state in which jackpot 1 (third jackpot) among a plurality of types of jackpot games has been started. In this example, in the performance display area 208d, a jackpot start performance MG11 (in this example, a display of a character string "Jackpot!! 1500pt") indicating that a jackpot game (Jackpot 1) has started is displayed, and In the same display format as the jackpot game (Jackpot 3), there is a first right-hand hitting warning U1 (in this example, a display of the character string "right-hand hitting →") that prompts the player to hit right-handed, and a second right-handed hitting warning U2. (In this example, an oval image including the character string "Right hit →" is displayed).

The state shown in FIG. 20(n) is the state immediately after winning the variable winning hole 235 in the jackpot game (Jackpot 2) and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in this example). In this example, in the effect display area 208d, the first right-handed warning U1 is continuously displayed, and a jackpot background indicating that a jackpot game (jackpot 1) is in progress is newly displayed, and a payout is added. A first total number display MG5 indicating the total number of balls put out, a second total number display MG6 indicating the total number of balls put out, and a payout display indicating the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable winning opening 235 (in this example, "+15") The character string (display) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 20(o) is the ending of the jackpot game (jackpot 1). In this example, at the ending of the jackpot game (jackpot 1), a new warning display MG12 is displayed in the performance display area 208d to warn the player (in this example, "Be careful not to get carried away. "Please be careful." is displayed with an underline.

Note that the warning display MG12 in the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is different from the warning display MG7 in the jackpot game (jackpot 3), which was explained using FIG. This is a warning display that is displayed only in 1).

With such a configuration, the second gaming state is a state in which it is easy to win the third starting means, and the next jackpot is substantially determined, so by making the warning display less noticeable, It is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted and to maintain the player's desire to play.

The state shown in FIG. 20(p) is a state where the state has shifted from the jackpot game (jackpot 1) to the normal game state. In this example, upon transition to the normal gaming state, a left-handed hitting warning U5 is displayed to prompt the player to hit left-handed (in this example, an image containing the string "Please return to hitting left-handed") is displayed. are doing.

<Example 2 of count performance>
FIGS. 21(a) to 21(f) are diagrams chronologically showing Example 2 of the count performance.

The state shown in FIG. 21(a) is a state that has transitioned to time-saving gaming state 2 (third gaming state), and is the same state as the state described using FIG. 20(i).

In this example, in the special figure 2 fluctuation state display area ST2, a "-" indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed, and in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed, and the effect is In the display area 208d, the end condition of time-saving game state 2 (in this example, when the number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 reaches 7 times, or the total number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 reaches 147 times) A remaining fluctuating number of games display RD (in this example, a character string displaying "140 times") indicating a part of the remaining variable number of games (if the number is reached) is displayed.

In addition, this state is a state in which the number of reservations for the special figure 2 variable game is one during the special figure 2 variable game, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not satisfied. The timer continues counting, and in the count performance, the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value is updated to "RUSH TIME 01:24:10".

The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is the state during the last special figure 2 variable game in the time-saving game state 2 (third game state), and the state shown in FIG. 21(c) is the state during the game during the count performance. This is the state in which the game results are being announced.

In this example, a result display RH indicating the end of the count performance (in this example, the character string "RESULT DISPLAY" is displayed) and a count display TG1 (in this example, the characters "RUSH TIME 03:26:77" are displayed) column display) and a second payout total number display MG6.

In addition, in this example, since the special figure A (jackpot 2) has been won in the special figure 2 variable game, the first preview display CG1 (in this example , the character string "77" reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed.

The count display TG1 of this example is a display that may suggest the possibility that the result of the judgment is the result of executing a special game, so it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the count display, and the game It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

The state shown in FIG. 21(d) is a state in which a preview indicating a jackpot is displayed during the last special figure 2 variable game of the time saving game state 2. In this example, a second preview display CG2 (in this example, a display of a character image of a lord) suggesting a jackpot is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

In addition, in this state, the special figure 2 variable game is in progress, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not met, so the timer continues counting, but the jackpot is not won. Therefore, the count effect of displaying the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer is not executed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(e) is the state in which the last special figure 2 variable game of the time saving game state 2 has ended. In this example, since the special pattern A (jackpot 2) has been won in the special pattern 2 variable game, "0" is displayed in the special pattern 2 variable state display area ST1 to indicate that the winning pattern has stopped. At the same time, in the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") corresponding to special pattern A (Jackpot 2) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, the states shown in FIGS. 21(a) to (e) are because the number of pending special drawing 2 variable games is 1 or more, and all conditions 1 to 6 of the timer measurement stop conditions are not satisfied. , the timer continues to count, and in the count performance, the count display TG1 indicated by the timer value is updated.

The state shown in FIG. 21(f) is a state in which jackpot 2 (first jackpot) among the plurality of types of jackpot games has been started. In this example, in the performance display area 208d, a jackpot start performance MG4 (in this example, a character string "Jackpot!! 3000pt" is displayed) indicating that a jackpot game (Jackpot 2) has started, and a message to the player is displayed. A first right-handed hitting warning U1 (in this example, a display of the character string “Right-handed →”) and a second right-handed hitting warning U2 (in this example, a character string “Right-handed →” is displayed) that encourages right-handed batting. Displaying an oval image).

<Example 3 of count performance>
FIGS. 21(g) to 21(m) are diagrams showing the third embodiment of the count effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 21(g) is a state in which the special figure 2 variable game has ended in the time-saving game state 2, and is the same state as described using FIG. 20(b).

In this example, since the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) was won in the special symbol 2 variable game, "△" indicating that the time-saving symbol is stopped is displayed in the special symbol 2 variable state display area ST2, and In the decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c and the special pattern display area SD, a stop display of the combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4") corresponding to the special pattern E (time saving pattern 1) is displayed. are doing.

The state shown in FIG. 21(h) is a state in which the time-saving game state 1 (second game state) which has been transferred from the time-saving game state 2 (third game state) has started. In this example, a fourth right-handed warning U4 (in this example, display of an oval image including the character string "Right-handed →") is newly added in the effect display area 208d to prompt the player to play right-handed. it's shown.

The state shown in FIG. 21 (i) is the state in which the special figure 2 variable game has ended in the time-saving game state 1, and the state shown in FIG. 21 (j) is the state in which the time for the stop display of the special figure 2 has passed. be.

In this example, since the special pattern E (time-saving pattern 1) was won in the special pattern 2 variable game, "△" indicating that the time-saving pattern is stopped is displayed in the special pattern 2 variation state display area ST2. is in the time-saving game state 1, so in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the special symbol display area SD, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) (in this example, "decoration 4-decoration") 4-Decoration 4) is not displayed.

As explained using FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is in a state where it is easy to win a prize using the third starting port 234 (third starting winning means). In the time-saving game state 1 (a state in which it is recommended to win a winning means), if the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) is won without winning the third starting hole 234 (conditions shown in FIG. 11) (K) is established), when special map A or special map C (jackpot 2) is won (when condition (L) shown in Figure 11 is satisfied), when special map B (jackpot 1) is won (If the condition (Q) shown in Figure 11 is met), If you win special map D (Jackpot 4) (If the condition (R) shown in Figure 11 is met), or Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 If the end conditions (7, 1, 8) of the time-saving game state 1 due to the fluctuation of stopped due to a loss are satisfied (if the condition (M) shown in FIG. 11 is satisfied), it has been substantially determined. The time-saving game state 1 ends without the jackpot being executed.

Then, in the time-saving game state 1, if such irregular conditions (K), (L), (M), (Q), and (R) are satisfied, the event will be canceled during the stop display of the special figure. The system is configured to display a guide indicating that regular conditions have been met.

The states shown in FIGS. 21(i) and (j) are the cases where the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) is won in the time-saving game state 1 (when the irregular condition (K) is established), so the special While the diagram is being displayed in a stopped state, a guidance display MG12 (in this example, a character string "Please wait for a while") indicating that an irregular condition has been established is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(k) is a state in which the time-saving game state 1 (second game state), which was transitioned to when the special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) was won, has started. In this example, a fourth right-handed warning U4 (in this example, display of an oval image including the character string "Right-handed →") is newly added in the effect display area 208d to prompt the player to play right-handed. it's shown.

Although the explanation is omitted, the state shown in FIG. 21(l) is a state where the small winning game has been promoted to the jackpot game, and is the same state as the state described using FIG. 20(f). Further, the state shown in FIG. 21(m) is a state in which the jackpot game (jackpot 1) promoted from the small winning game has been completed, and is the same state as described using FIG. 20(h).

Figure 21 (i'), (j'), and (k') are diagrams corresponding to Figure 21 (i), (j), and (k), and are due to the fluctuation of special chart 2 stopping due to a loss. This is an example of a performance when the end conditions (7, 1, 8) of the time-saving game state 1 are satisfied (when the condition (M) shown in FIG. 11 is satisfied).

In this example, the end conditions (7, 1, 8) of the time-saving game state 1 due to the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 being stopped due to a loss have been satisfied (the irregular condition (M) has been established), so as shown in FIG. As explained using (i) and (j), when special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) is won in time-saving game state 1 (when irregular condition (K) is established), the special symbol During the stop display, a guidance display MG12 (in this example, a display of a character string "Please wait for a while") indicating that an irregular condition has been established is displayed.

<Warning notification>
Next, warning notification will be explained using FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22(a) is a diagram showing types of warning notifications and conditions for each warning notification.

A warning notification is a notification that gives a warning regarding the game, and in this example, as a warning notification regarding the hitting method, a right-handed hitting warning (second notification) is given when the firing position is on the right and the player hits the left-handed ball. , the first left-handed hit warning (the first notification in the first notification mode) and the second left-handed hit warning (the first notification in the second notification mode) are issued when the firing position is on the left and the right-handed shot is made. There is a notification). Note that the warning notification is not limited to a warning notification regarding the typing method, but may also be a warning notification regarding various types of errors.

<Warning notification/Right hit warning>
The right-handed hit warning (second notification) is a warning notification that is started when the third condition is satisfied (in this example, when the ball enters the first special symbol starting port 230 once). The upper limit of the cumulative number of right-handed hitting warnings is one, and each time the third condition is satisfied (every time the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 once), the cumulative number of right-handed hitting warnings is increased. Reset to 0.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed hit warning. In the right-handed warning in this example, the display RA1 (in this example, a display of the character string "Please hit right") that prompts the player to strike right in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed for 6 seconds. , and at the same time, the speaker 120 outputs once a voice urging the player to play right (in this example, a voice saying "Please play right").

In addition, a movable performance (a certain performance) by the first performance movable unit 7 (movable body). In this example, a performance in which the first performance movable unit 7 is moved up and down and the light emitting means of the first performance movable unit 7 emits light. ), if the third condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 once) and the right hit warning is executed, the performance mode of the movable performance will not change. , it is configured so that the movable performance is not restricted (the movable performance continues).

According to the right-hand hit warning (second notification) in this example, by not changing from a certain performance in the first performance mode to a certain performance in the second performance mode, a certain performance is not regulated, so it is not necessary. In addition, the right-handed hit warning (second notification) can be reliably performed without interrupting the performance.

<Warning notification/Second left-handed hit warning>
The second left-handed hit warning (the first notification of the second notification mode) is issued when the second condition is met (in this example, when the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port 228 (gate) five times) This is a warning notification that starts at .

FIG. 22(b) is a time chart showing the notification timing of the second left-handed player warning. The upper limit of the cumulative number of second left-handed hitting warnings is five, and as shown in FIG. 22(b)(1) and FIG. ), the cumulative number of second left-handed hitting warnings is reset to zero when three minutes have elapsed since it was detected that the second left-handed hit warning was passed.

Note that after the ball has passed through the standard starting port 228 (gate) five times and before 3 minutes have elapsed since the ball was last detected to have passed through the standard starting port 228 (gate). (before resetting the cumulative number of times to 0), a second left-handed hit warning is executed each time the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port 228 (gate).

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing an example of the second left-handed player warning. In the second left-handed hitting warning, in the performance display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second left-handed hitting warning display LA2 (in this example, the text "Please return to left-handed hitting") is displayed to urge the player to play left-handed. column display) for 6 seconds, and the speaker 120 issues a second left-handed hitting warning voice LS2 (in this example, a voice saying "Please return to left-handed batting") to urge the player to bat left-handed. Output.

As shown in Figure 23(b)(3), during the special pattern stop period from when the stop display of special map 1 or special map 2 starts until the final display ends, the second left-handed hit warning is issued. The display LA2 is temporarily hidden, and after the special figure stop period has elapsed, the second left-handed hitting warning display LA2 is redisplayed.

In addition, a movable performance (a certain performance) by the first performance movable unit 7 (movable body). In this example, a performance in which the first performance movable unit 7 is moved up and down and the light emitting means of the first performance movable unit 7 emits light. ), if the second condition is met (the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port 228 (gate) 5 times) and the second left-handed hit warning is executed, the presentation mode of the movable presentation will be changed. The structure is such that the movable effect is not restricted (the movable effect continues) without causing any problems.

According to the second left-handed hit warning (first notification in the second notification mode) of this example, by not changing from a certain performance in the first performance mode to a certain performance in the second performance mode, Since a certain performance is not restricted, the left-handed hit warning (first notification) can be reliably given without interrupting the performance more than necessary.

<Warning notification/First left-handed hit warning> The first left-handed hit warning (first notification of the first notification mode) is issued when the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the ball hits the second special mark). This is a warning notification that starts when the ball enters the starting port 232 three times.

The upper limit of the cumulative number of first left-handed hitting warnings is three, and if three minutes have elapsed since the last time the ball was detected to have entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the first left-handed hitting warning will be issued. Resets the cumulative number of strike warnings to 0.

Note that after the ball has entered the second special pattern starting port 232 three times and before three minutes have elapsed since the last time it was detected that the ball entered the second special pattern starting port 232 ( (Before the cumulative number of times is reset to 0), the first left-handed hit warning is executed every time the ball enters the second special symbol starting port 232 once.

FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing an example of the first left-handed hit warning. In the first left-handed hitting warning, in the performance display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first left-handed hitting warning display LA1 that urges the player to play left-handed, which has a different display format from the second left-handed hitting warning display LA2. (In this example, displaying an oval image including the character string "Please return to left-handed batting. A first left-handed playing warning sound LS1 (in this example, a voice saying "Please return to left-handed playing" and a warning sound) that urges the player to play left-handed, which is different in form, is output once.

In addition, during the special pattern stop period from the start of the stop display of special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 until the final display ends, the display of the first left-handed hit warning display LA1 will be temporarily hidden, and the corresponding After the special figure stop period has elapsed, the first left-handed hitting warning display LA1 is redisplayed. Therefore, even when the first notification is being executed, a special symbol variation display that is important to the player can be executed, and the player will not be disadvantaged. Further, the first left-handed hit warning is not executed for 30 seconds after the final fluctuation of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state is stopped.

In addition, a movable performance (a certain performance) by the first performance movable unit 7 (movable body). In this example, a performance in which the first performance movable unit 7 is moved up and down and the light emitting means of the first performance movable unit 7 emits light. ), if the first condition is satisfied (the ball enters the second special figure starting port 232 three times) and the first left-handed hit warning is executed, the first effect movable unit 7 ( By stopping the light emission of the movable body), at least a part of the movable effect (in this example, light emission) is regulated, while the left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, and upper frame lamp 122U blink in red. From the movable performance (a certain performance by the first performance movable unit 7 (movable body)) in the first performance mode (with light emission) to the movable performance (first performance) in the second performance mode (without light emission). (a certain performance by the movable unit 7 (movable body)).

According to the first left-handed hit warning (the first notification of the first notification mode), by changing from a certain production in the first production mode to a certain production in the second production mode, a certain production Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notification by the notification means, and the first notification can be reliably conveyed to the player.

In addition, in this example, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect movable unit 7 (movable body) continues to move and stops emitting light, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, for example, in addition to (or instead of) the first effect movable unit 7 (movable body), by stopping the light emission of the second effect movable unit 8 (movable body) not shown, the second effect movable unit 8 At least a part (light emission) of the movable effect by the movable body (movable body) may be regulated (changed), and the presentation form of the movable effect by the second movable unit 8 (movable body) may be changed. Regulating (changing) at least a part of the output of the sound, the display by the display device of the movable body, the rotation of the movable body, the movement (movement) such as vertical movement, etc., and changing the mode of presentation of the movable performance by the movable body. Alternatively, the light emission mode of the first effect movable unit 7 (movable body) may be changed to another light emission mode (light emission mode indicating the first left-handed strike warning).

<Production after power outage/power restoration>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, effects after power outage and power restoration will be described.

<Example of performance after power outage/power restoration/Example of performance 1>
FIGS. 24(a) to 24(d) are diagrams chronologically showing example 1 of presentation after power outage and power restoration. This example is an example of a production in the case where a power outage/recovery occurs after winning the second special figure starting hole 232 in the time saving game state 1 and starting the special figure 2 variable game.

In this example, when the power is restored after the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 disappears due to the occurrence of a power outage, as shown in FIG. 24(b), when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 24(c), A recovery display MG13 indicating that the process is being executed (in this example, the string "Restoring..." is displayed) is displayed, and the first right-handed warning U1 that was displayed before the power outage is displayed. is being redisplayed.

The state shown in FIG. 24(d) after the power is restored is a state in which the time-saving gaming state 1 has transitioned to the normal gaming state. In this example, the special figure 2 variable game that started before the power outage ended during the power outage and power restoration, and the end condition of time-saving game state 1 (the special figure 2 variable game was completed once) was satisfied. After the power restoration process is executed, the normal gaming state is entered, and a left-right hitting warning U5 prompting the player to play left-handed (in this example, an oval image containing the character string "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed) is displayed.

<Example of performance after power outage/restoration/Example of performance 2>
FIGS. 24(e) to 24(i) are diagrams chronologically showing example 2 of presentation after power outage and power restoration. This example is an example of a performance when a power outage/power restoration occurs during the count performance in the time-saving game state 2. Note that the power interruption and power restoration states shown in FIGS. 24(f) and 24(g) are the same as the power interruption and power restoration states shown in FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c), so their explanation will be omitted. do.

The state shown in FIG. 24(h) after power restoration is the state in which the special figure 2 variable game that started before the power outage ended during the power outage and power restoration, and the state shown in FIG. 24(i) is the state shown in FIG. After the electric time processing is executed, the next special figure 2 variable game is started. In this example, upon power outage and power restoration, the timer's count is stopped, the timer value is reset to 0, and the count display TG1 that was displayed before the power outage is erased.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game after the power restoration process shown in FIG. ), the second special figure display device 214 started the special figure 2 variable display, so in the count effect, the count display TG1 indicated by the value of the timer that restarted counting from 0 is displayed. .

<Example of performance after power outage/restoration/Example of performance 3>
FIGS. 24(j) to 24(m) are diagrams chronologically showing example 3 of effects after power outage and power restoration. This example is an example of a performance when a right-handed hit is detected during execution of the power recovery process.

In this example, since the first condition was satisfied during the execution of the power restoration process shown in FIG. 24(l) (in this example, the ball entered the second special figure starting port 232 three times), As shown in FIG. 24(m), the first left-handed player warning (the first notification of the first notification mode) and the second left-handed player warning (the first notification of the second notification mode) explained using FIG. A third left-handed player warning is issued, which is different from the first warning. Note that the first left-handed hit warning (the first notification of the first notification mode) is issued when the first condition is satisfied (in this example, the ball enters the second special pattern starting port 232 three times). This is a warning notification that starts when

In this third left-handed hitting warning, since power restoration processing is being executed, a left-handed hitting warning voice (in this example, a voice saying "Please hit left") prompts the player to play left-handed from the speaker 120. ), while no display prompting the player to play left-handed is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably give a left-handed hit warning by voice without obstructing the visibility of the recovery display MG13.

In addition, in FIG. 24(l), the case where the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the power restoration process is illustrated, but when the second condition is satisfied (in this example, the ball is in the normal figure starting port 228 (When the ball passes through the gate five times), a third left-handed hitting warning may be issued in the same way, or a fourth left-handed hitting warning that is different from the third left-handed hitting warning may be issued.

In addition, if the third condition is satisfied during the execution of the power restoration process (in this example, when the ball enters the first special symbol starting port 230 once), the right A right-handed hit warning (a second right-handed hit warning) that is different from the hit warning may be provided.

As explained above, the game machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a first starting winning means (for example, the first special figure starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 3) and a second starting winning means (for example, the first special figure starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 3). means (for example, the second special figure start opening 232 shown in FIG. 4), a third start winning means (for example, the third start winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 4), and a variable winning means having a specific area (for example, the 4), a symbol display means capable of performing a symbol variation display, and a game control means capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of gaming states (for example, a variable winning a prize opening 235 shown in FIG. A main control unit 300 shown in FIG. It includes a display means (for example, the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 3), and when a ball enters the first starting winning means, the symbol variation by the first symbol display means. display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display"), and when a ball enters the second start winning means, the symbol by the second symbol display means can be executed. A variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variable display") can be executed, and when a ball enters the third starting winning means, a small winning game can be executed, The plurality of game states include a first game state (e.g., non-time-saving game game state), a second game state (e.g., time-saving game state 1), and a third game state (e.g., time-saving game state 2). ), the first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to win a prize in the first starting prize winning means, and the second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to win a prize in the first starting prize winning means, and the second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to win a prize in the first starting prize winning means, and the second gaming state is a The third starting winning means is a state in which it is easy to win a prize, and the third gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to win a prize in the second starting winning means, and the first symbol fluctuation display or the above When the first jackpot symbol among the plurality of types of jackpot symbols is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "first jackpot game"). For example, FIG. The jackpot 2) shown in FIG. When a ball is detected in the specific area during execution of the small winning game, a jackpot game different from the first jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot game”) It's called "Second Jackpot Game". For example, the game machine is capable of executing the jackpot 3) shown in FIG. 11, and can shift to the third gaming state after the second jackpot game ends.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a new game property that allows players to hit consecutive jackpots in a short period of time, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, when a second jackpot symbol different from the first jackpot symbol is displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game can execute a different jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "third jackpot game"; for example, jackpot 1 shown in FIG. 11), and immediately after the third jackpot game ends, the game state does not shift to the second gaming state. First, the display mode of the warning display may be different between the first jackpot game and the third jackpot game.

With such a configuration, the second gaming state is a state in which it is easy to win the third starting means, and the next jackpot is substantially determined, so by making the warning display less noticeable, It is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, when transitioning to the second gaming state after the end of the first jackpot game, a certain effect (for example, jackpot background) that was being executed in the first jackpot game can be changed to the second game state after the transition. It may be executed continuously in the second gaming state.

With such a configuration, the second game state is a state in which it is easy to win the third starting means, and the next jackpot is substantially determined, so the second game state is a state in which it is easy to win the third starting means. By continuing a certain performance, two wins can be made to look like one win, and the player's desire to play can be sustained.

Further, it is provided with a decorative pattern display means (for example, decorative pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208) capable of performing a decorative pattern fluctuation display, and when a ball enters the first starting winning means. In this case, the decorative pattern variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first decorative pattern variation display") by the decorative pattern display means is executable, and the ball enters the second starting winning means. In this case, the decorative pattern variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second decorative pattern variation display") by the decorative pattern display means can be executed, and in the first gaming state, the first pattern variation display can be performed by the decorative pattern display means. While the display is being executed, the first decorative symbol variation display is executed, but while the second symbol variation display is being executed, the second decorative symbol variation display is not executed, and in the third gaming state, While the second symbol variation display is being executed, the second decorative symbol variation display is executed; however, while the first symbol variation display is being executed, the first decorative symbol variation display is not executed; In the second gaming state, the first decorative symbol fluctuation display is not executed while the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, and the second decorative symbol fluctuation display is not executed while the second symbol fluctuation display is being executed. It may not be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the gaming state based on the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Furthermore, when a certain time-saving symbol (for example, special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1)) is displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, it is possible to shift to the second gaming state, The second gaming state that was triggered by the display of the certain time-saving symbol (for example, the time-saving gaming state that was transited to by the winning (display) of special symbol E (time-saving symbol 1) shown in FIG. 20(c) 1), and the second gaming state to which the first jackpot game has ended (for example, the time-saving gaming state to which the jackpot game (jackpot 2) has ended, as shown in FIG. 19(i)). 1), the display in the second gaming state (for example, the fourth right-handed warning U4 (attention-calling display) shown in FIG. 20(c) that makes the warning stand out, and the large At least a portion of the third right-handed hit warning U3 (warning display) performed while continuing the background may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the display mode depending on the timing of transition to the second gaming state, and it is possible to increase display variations in the second gaming state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes presentation means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U). 15(d), (h), ( n)), the plurality of choices include a first choice (for example, princess) and a second choice (for example, lord), and the production means After the first option is selected and displayed in one selection effect and the effect corresponding to the first option is executed, the first option that was displayed as an option in the first selection effect but was not selected and displayed is This game machine is characterized in that it may execute a performance depending on the second option.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if an option with a low expectation level is selected in the selection performance and a performance corresponding to the option with a low expectation level is executed, the performance corresponding to the option with a high expectation level is subsequently executed. Since there are cases where a certain performance is executed, the expectation level of the players can be maintained, and the operating rate can be increased.

Further, the plurality of options further includes a third option, and the presentation means selects and displays the first option in the first selection presentation, and displays the presentation according to the first option. After the execution, an effect corresponding to the third option that was not displayed as an option in the first selection effect may be executed.

With such a configuration, a performance may be performed in accordance with an option that is not displayed as an option in the selection performance, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance and increase the player's interest. be able to.

In addition, the same option as the plurality of options displayed in the first selection effect (for example, the upper left: Princess and the lower right: Princess of option pattern 4 of the option pattern determination table (attack character lord) shown in FIG. 14) There may be cases where two or more are displayed (for example, the selection effects shown in FIGS. 15(h) and (n)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of options in the selection performance and to provide surprise, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the performance and increasing the player's interest.

In addition, the plurality of options displayed in the first selection effect include options that cannot be selectively displayed (for example, the upper left of option pattern 4 in the option pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14; the upper left of option pattern 5; :Ninja, etc.) may be included.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of options in the selection performance and to provide surprise, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the performance and increasing the player's interest.

Further, the presentation means is a selection presentation that selects and displays one option from a plurality of options, and is different from the first selection presentation (for example, a card selection presentation or an episode selection presentation shown in FIG. 17). may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of selected effects, prevent the player from getting bored with the effects, and increase the player's interest.

In addition, in one special figure variation display, the first selection effect can be executed multiple times, while the second selection effect may not be executed multiple times (it may be executed only once). In this case, the first selection effect may be completed in one special figure variation display, the decisive battle reach effect may be executed multiple times in one special figure variation display, or the first selection effect may be executed multiple times in one special figure variation display. In the special figure variation display, the selection performance may be performed multiple times within one decisive battle reach.

Further, in the first selection performance, even if the same option is selected, the jackpot expectation level may differ depending on the type of option (option pattern).

With such a configuration, the level of expectation is conveyed only to players who have played the game many times, thereby making such players feel a sense of superiority and accomplishment.

In addition, while the first selection effect (for example, the selection effects shown in FIGS. 15(d), (h), and (n)) has different jackpot expectations depending on the selected option, the second selection effect has different jackpot expectations depending on the selected option. The selection performance (for example, the card selection performance or the episode selection performance shown in FIG. 17) may be one in which the jackpot expectation level does not differ depending on the selected option (one that does not suggest the jackpot expectation level).

Further, among the plurality of choices in the first selection presentation, there may be a plurality of the same choices, but there may or may not be a plurality of the choices with the lowest expectation level.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from decreasing due to the display of a plurality of options with low expectations.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has a first special symbol that stops the first special symbol in a manner according to the result of the validity determination after starting the variation of the first special symbol. A first special symbol display means (e.g., first special symbol display device 212) capable of displaying one special symbol variation, and a second special symbol display device 212, which is capable of displaying a variation of a special symbol, after starting variation of a second special symbol, according to the result of the validity judgment. A second special symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of performing a second special symbol fluctuation display that stops the second special symbol in a different manner, and a production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U), and the presentation means includes a count display (for example, a count shown in FIG. 19(m)). It is possible to execute a count effect (for example, the count effect shown in FIGS. 19(m) to (r) and 20(a) to (i)) that updates the display TG1), and under a predetermined condition (for example, the count effect shown in FIG. 18(a) The game machine is characterized in that the count display can be updated when the timer measurement start condition shown in ) is satisfied.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a count effect that updates the count display, so for example, a count display indicating the time from entering a so-called rush until the end of the rush is performed, and a predetermined number of seconds is displayed. It is possible to provide a new game in which a plurality of players compete to see how many jackpots they can win within a time (for example, within 10 minutes), and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

Moreover, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the display of the count display in the count performance may be continued without updating the count display.

If the timer continues to count unconditionally, there is a risk that the actual playing time of Rush may deviate from the count display, but with this configuration, the count display can be updated accurately. , you can count the time you actually played Rush.

Further, the predetermined condition may include that the second special symbol variation display is being executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to synchronize the execution of the second special symbol fluctuation display and the update of the count display. For example, when you leave your seat for a break during the rush, the timer will continue to operate while you are away. If the update is continued, there is a risk that the count display will deviate from the actual playing time of Rush, but with this configuration, the actual playing time of Rush can be counted.

Further, the count display may be a display that may suggest the possibility that the result of the validity determination is a result of executing a special game (for example, the first preview display CG1 ("decoration") shown in FIG. 21(c) 7-decoration 7-decoration 7)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the count display, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, it is equipped with a storage means capable of storing gaming information such as the certain time and the number of jackpots, and the history of this gaming information (for example, the history of the past 10 games) and the ranking (the order of the longest certain time, the number of jackpots, etc.) In this case, it may be displayed using a menu screen or a demo screen.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of making multiple types of notifications, and a certain effect (for example, the first effect movable unit 7). A game machine equipped with a production means (for example, the first production movable unit 7) capable of executing a plurality of productions including a production that moves up and down and emits light from the light emitting means of the first production movable unit 7. The plurality of types of notifications include a first notification (for example, the left-handed hit warning shown in FIGS. 23(b) and 23(c)), and the notification means is configured to notify the user when the first condition is satisfied. (For example, when the ball enters the second special figure starting port 232 three times), the first notification (for example, the first left-handed hit warning LA1 shown in FIG. 23(c)) is issued in the first notification mode. , a first left-handed hitting warning sound LS1), and the presentation means is capable of executing the first left-handed hitting warning sound LS1), and the presentation means is capable of executing the first left-handed hitting warning sound LS1) during execution of the certain presentation in the first presentation mode. When the notification is executed, the certain performance in the first performance mode is changed to the certain performance in the second performance mode (for example, while continuing the vertical movement of the first performance movable unit 7, This game machine is characterized in that the light emission from the light emitting means of the first performance movable unit 7 is stopped.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, in the first notification of the first notification mode, a certain effect is changed by changing a certain effect of the first effect mode to a certain effect of the second effect mode. Since the performance is regulated, the player can be made to pay attention to the notification by the notification means, and the first notification can be reliably conveyed to the player.

Further, the notification means may be configured to notify the first notification (for example, when the ball passes through the general pattern starting port 228 (gate) five times) in a second notification mode when a second condition is satisfied (for example, when the ball passes through the general pattern starting port 228 (gate) five times). , a second left-handed player warning LA2 and a second left-handed player warning sound LS2 shown in FIG. When the notification means executes the first notification in the second notification mode, the certain presentation in the first presentation mode is not changed to the certain presentation in the second presentation mode. It may be something.

With such a configuration, in the first notification of the second notification mode, a certain production is regulated by not changing a certain production of the first production mode to a certain production of the second production mode. Therefore, the first notification can be reliably performed without unnecessarily interrupting the performance.

Further, the first special symbol display is capable of executing a first special symbol variation display that stops the first special symbol in a manner according to the result of the judgment after starting the variation of the first special symbol. means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212), and a second special symbol that stops the second special symbol in a manner according to the result of the validity determination after starting the variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display means (e.g., second special symbol display device 214) capable of performing a variable display, and the notification means is configured to display a period during which variation of the first special symbol is stopped, or The first notification may be regulated during a period in which variation of the second special symbol is stopped.

With such a configuration, even when the first notification is being executed, a special symbol variation display that is important to the player can be executed, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

Further, the plurality of types of notifications include a second notification different from the first notification (for example, the right-handed hit warning shown in FIG. 23(a)), and the notification means is configured to satisfy a third condition. If this is established (for example, if the ball enters the first special symbol starting port 230 once), the second notification can be executed, and the presentation means may perform the above-mentioned notification of the first presentation mode. If the notification means executes the second notification while the performance is being executed, the certain performance in the first performance mode is not changed to the certain performance in the second performance mode. There may be.

With such a configuration, in the second notification in response to the establishment of the third condition, which has a lower degree of fraud than the first condition and the second condition, a certain production of the first production mode is By not changing to a certain performance in the second performance mode, a certain performance is not restricted, so the second notification can be reliably performed without unnecessarily interrupting the performance.

In addition, if the first condition or the second condition is met while waiting for a customer (not playing), the game information being displayed (for example, volume setting display, light intensity setting display, menu display, etc.) will be erased. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, by erasing displays that are not important to the player, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notification by the notification means, and the first notification can be reliably performed.

Further, while the first notification or the second notification is being executed, the settings of the volume and light intensity by the player may be restricted, or only while the first notification of the second aspect is being executed. , it may be configured such that the player's settings for volume and light intensity are regulated.

With this configuration, when the first notification or the second notification is performed using sound or light, it is possible to prevent acts such as intentionally lowering the volume or light intensity, and to reliably prevent fraudulent acts. I can do it.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is a game machine in which balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

<Various notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be explained.

<Various notification/notification means (display means)>
First, prior to explaining various notifications, the notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

The pachinko machine 100 includes a display means that can display information as one of the notification means. The display means included in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, the liquid crystal display device (decorative pattern display device) 208 described using FIG. 3, the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device. 214, etc., and these display means are comprised of a liquid crystal display, an LED, a segment display, etc. in this example.

<Various notification/notification means (sound output means)>
The pachinko machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of sound output means included in the pachinko machine 100 include the speaker 120 described using FIG. 1 and the like.

<Various notification/notification means (light emitting means)>
The pachinko machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 100 include the various lamps 418 described using FIG. 4 (for example, the left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, and chance button lamp shown in FIGS. 138, normal symbol retention lamp 216, first special symbol retention lamp 218, second special symbol retention lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.). In this example, all of these light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

Note that the various lamps 418 may be composed of one, a plurality, or all of the illustrated plurality of lamps, or may include other lamps in addition to (or in place of) these.

<Various notification/notification means (movable body)>
The pachinko machine 100 includes a movable body as one of the notification means. Examples of the movable body included in the pachinko machine 100 include the performance movable body 224 and accessories described using FIG. 4.

<Various notification/counting means>
Next, prior to explaining various notifications, the counting means provided in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

The pachinko machine 100 determines the gaming value (in this example, the maximum number of difference balls) (the increase in the number of game balls from the standard when the number of game balls decreases the most when the game result is obtained after the power is turned on). (so-called MY))) is provided with a counting means (in this example, a reference value counter updating process). Note that the gaming value is not limited to the difference in the number of game balls (= number of fired game balls - number of paid out game balls), but if the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference in the number of game medals (= number of acquired medals - number of paid out game balls). In the case of a game machine that does not use game balls or game medals, it may be an electronic medium (electronic medals, etc.) that is electronically stored or dispensed.

The reference value counter updating process (counting means) of the main control unit 300 is a process of updating a reference value counter for managing the number of difference balls of game balls, and in this example, the main control unit 300 described using FIG. This is executed in the winning opening counter update process (step S215) of the division timer interrupt process.

Here, the difference number of balls is the number calculated by "out (number of fired game balls) - safe (number of paid game balls)", and in the standard value counter update process (counting means) The difference in the number of balls is managed using a reference value counter calculated by subtracting the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of OUT (number of game balls fired).

Specifically, in the reference value counter update process (counting means), the value of the scheduled number of prize balls (the planned number of game balls to be paid out) is received from the payout control unit 600 as the value of the safe (number of game balls to be paid out), While adding the value to the reference value counter, the value of the number of shot game balls is received from the shooting control unit 630 as the value of out (number of shot game balls), and the value of the reference value counter is subtracted from the reference value counter. Update.

In this example, when the power is turned on, etc., the initial value of safe (number of game balls paid out) is set to 100000 in decimal notation, and the initial value of out (number of game balls fired) is set to 0, so the reference value The initial value of the counter is 100000 (=100000-0) in decimal notation. In addition, the initial value of the reference value counter may be set to 0, and the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) may be subtracted from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out) to update the value of safe (number of game balls paid out). If is 0, the subtraction may not be performed, and the lowest value of the reference value counter may be 0.

<Various notifications/first notification>
The notification means of the pachinko machine 100 is capable of issuing a notification (first notification: complete function activation warning) that suggests the execution of a game stop. The first notification may be, for example, the first notification FD1 shown in FIG. 25(c) (in this example, an image containing the character string "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"), or the first notification FD1 shown in FIG. 25(d). The first notification FD2 (in this example, an image including the character string "1000 balls left until complete function activation") is mentioned.

In the pachinko machine 100, the notification means may execute the first notification (for example, the first notification FD1 shown in FIG. 25(c)) when at least the first condition is satisfied.

Here, the first condition is that the counting means (in this example, the reference value counter update process) starts from a value lower than the first value (in this example, 190000, which is the value that triggers the complete function activation warning). In other words, this condition is satisfied when the first value is counted, in other words, when the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 90,000 from the time the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 is configured such that if the first condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied, the notification means does not execute the first notification.

Here, the second condition is an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, guaranteed power transformation support state, non-definite power transformation support state, special figure high probability state, special figure fluctuation time A condition that is satisfied when the first condition is not satisfied (at least one of the following states): shortened state, high probability state of general figure, shortened state of normal figure fluctuation time, extended state of electric chew open time), is satisfied once the first condition is satisfied conditions, and conditions that are satisfied when the demonstration performance is not performed after the first condition is once satisfied.

<Various notifications/Second notification>
Furthermore, the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 can execute notification (second notification) based on the count value (in this example, the reference value counter) of the counting means (in this example, the reference value counter update process). As the second notification, for example, the second notification SD shown in FIG. (images containing character strings).

In the pachinko machine 100, when at least the first condition is satisfied, the notification means may execute the second notification (for example, the second notification SD shown in FIG. 25(c)), and the notification time of the second notification may be is longer than the notification time of the first notification.

As mentioned above, the first condition is that the counting means (in this example, the reference value counter update process) is lower than the first value (in this example, 190000, which is the value that triggers the notification before the completion function is activated). A condition that is satisfied when the first value is counted from the values (for example, when the value of the reference value counter goes from less than 190,000 to 190,000 or more, as shown in FIGS. 25(c) and 25(d)) It is.

Further, the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 208) of the pachinko machine 100 displays a second notification (in this example, "Actual An image containing the character string "89990/95000" indicating "number of pitches difference/number of pitches at which the complete function is activated" can be executed.

<Various notifications/Third notification>
The notification means of the pachinko machine 100 can issue a notification (third notification) to notify the execution of the game stop when the third condition is satisfied. Examples of the third notification include the third notification TD shown in FIG. 25(f) (in this example, an image including the character string "Complete function activated, ends today").

Here, the third condition is that the counting means (in this example, the reference value counter update process) is larger than the first value (in this example, 190000, which is the value that triggers the complete function activation warning). If the second value is counted from a value lower than the second value (in this example, 195,000, which is the value that triggers the activation of the complete function), in other words, the maximum number of differential pitches will be 95,000 from the time the power is turned on. This is a condition that is satisfied when the target is reached.

<Various notifications/Fourth notification>
The notification means of the pachinko machine 100 is capable of issuing a notification (fourth notification: complete function activation notification) that foretells the execution of the game stop when the fourth condition is satisfied. The fourth notification includes, for example, the fourth notification PD shown in FIG. 25(e) (in this example, an image including the character string "Complete function will be activated soon").

Here, the fourth condition is that while the condition device and accessory interlocking operation device or special electric accessory is in operation, the counting means (in this example, the reference value counter update process) is set to the first value (in this example, the reference value counter update process). , 190,000, which is the value that triggers the complete function activation warning), and the second value is counted starting from a value that is lower than the second value (in this example, 195,000, which is the value that triggers the complete function activation). In other words, the condition is satisfied when the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 95,000 from the time the power is turned on while the condition device, the accessory interlocking operation device, or the special electric accessory is in operation.

<Various notifications/Specific examples of first to fourth notifications>
Next, specific examples of first to fourth notifications that can be executed by the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 25.

<Various notifications/normal state>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing specific examples of the first to fourth notifications, and FIG. 25(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification in the normal state after power is turned on.

In the normal state, a normal state background image (for example, a background image for the normal state) corresponding to the normal state is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, and a normal state sound corresponding to the normal state is output from the speaker 120. (For example, BGM for normal state) is output, and various lamps 418 are lit in a normal state light emission mode (for example, light emission pattern for normal state) corresponding to the normal state.

In addition, the reference value counter update process (counting means) is triggered by turning on the power and adding a value corresponding to 100,000 balls as an initial value (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) to the safe (number of payout game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308. ), set the out (number of game balls fired) counter stored in the RAM 308 to 0 as an initial value, and set the reference value counter stored in the RAM 308 as an initial value of ``safe (number of game balls paid out)''. In this example, a value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set.

<Various notifications/Jackpot status (notification where the first condition is not met)>
FIGS. 25(b) to 25(e) are diagrams showing an example of notification in a jackpot state, and FIG. 25(b) is an example of notification when the first condition is not satisfied in a jackpot state. FIG.

The reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, the value of the reference value counter is updated to 189950. .

In this example, the first condition is not satisfied in the jackpot state (in this example, the value of the reference value counter is less than 190,000, and the maximum number of differential pitches has not reached 90,000 since the power was turned on). In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a jackpot state background image corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, a background image for the jackpot state) and a right-hand hitting notification (in this example, "→Right-hitting") are displayed. An image containing a character string) and an attacker notification (in this example, an image containing a character string "Aim for the attacker →") urging the ball to enter the variable winning hole 235 are displayed, and the speaker 120 displays a jackpot condition. A corresponding jackpot state sound (for example, BGM for a jackpot state) is output, and various lamps 418 are lit in a jackpot state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for a jackpot state) corresponding to the jackpot state.

<Various notifications/Jackpot status (first notification)>
FIG. 25(c) is a diagram showing an example of the first notification in the jackpot state.

The reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, the value of the reference value counter is updated to 190100. .

In this example, in the jackpot state, the first condition was met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter went from less than 190,000 to 190,100, and the maximum number of difference pitches reached 90,100 since the power was turned on). In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, while continuing to display the jackpot status background image, right hit notification, and attacker notification, the first notification FD1 (in this example, the character string "5000 balls left until complete function activation") is displayed. ) and the second notification SD (in this example, an image containing the character string "90100/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated"). , the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"), and the various lamps 418 are set to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first notification ( In this example, it lights up (yellow).

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving excessive expectations to the player. can be done.

Furthermore, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (the first notification) is executed, the new player can recognize that the first condition has been satisfied by the second notification. This allows for increased convenience for players.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 transmits the first condition to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. It may be configured to output game information (control signal) indicating that the game has been established.

If a certain period of time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after starting the first notification FD1, the first notification FD1 is deleted and the speaker 120 outputs the audio corresponding to the first notification. Instead, the jackpot state sound (BGM for the jackpot state) is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in the jackpot state light emission mode (light emission pattern for the jackpot state) instead of the light emission mode corresponding to the first notification. On the other hand, the second notification SD continues to display until the next power outage. That is, the notification time of the second notification SD is longer than the notification time of the first notification FD1.

According to this example, even if the player changes after the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of a game stop is executed, the new player will be able to confirm that the first condition is satisfied by the second notification. can be recognized, increasing convenience for players.

Note that the timing of erasing the "first notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if a certain number of game balls are paid out after the start of the first notification, the timing of erasing the "first notification" is not limited to this example. If the gaming state changes after the start of the first notification, it may be deleted when another notification is executed after the start of the first notification. Furthermore, the timing for erasing the "second notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be erased, for example, when the complete function is activated, when an error occurs, or the like.

In addition, in this example, the first notification is started when the maximum number of pitch differences reaches 90,000 from when the power is turned on (when the number of pitch differences until the complete function is activated reaches 5,000). , the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, when the number of balls reaches 90,000, 91,000, 92,000, 93,000, and 94,000 (after the number of difference balls until the complete function is activated reaches 5,000, each time the number of difference balls increases by 1,000 ), or as explained next, if the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 94,000 from the time the power is turned on (if the number of differential pitches until the complete function activates reaches 1,000), the first The notification may be started based on other conditions.

<Various notifications/Jackpot status (other examples of the first notification)>
FIG. 25(d) is a diagram showing another example of the first notification in the jackpot state.

The reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, the value of the reference value counter is updated to 194000. .

In this example, in the jackpot state, the first condition was satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter went from less than 190,000 to 194,000, and the maximum number of difference pitches reached 94,000 since the power was turned on). In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, while continuing to display the jackpot status background image, right hit notification, and attacker notification, the first notification FD2 (in this example, the character string "1000 balls left until complete function activation") is displayed. ) and the second notification SD (in this example, an image containing the character string "94000/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated"). , the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "1000 balls left until the complete function is activated"), and the various lamps 418 are set to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first notification ( In this example, it lights up (yellow).

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving excessive expectations to the player. can be done.

If a certain period of time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after starting the first notification FD2, the first notification FD2 is deleted and the speaker 120 outputs the audio corresponding to the first notification. Instead, the jackpot state sound (BGM for the jackpot state) is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in the jackpot state light emission mode (light emission pattern for the jackpot state) instead of the light emission mode corresponding to the first notification. On the other hand, the second notification SD continues to display until the next power outage. That is, the notification time of the second notification SD is longer than the notification time of the first notification FD2.

According to this example, even if the player changes after the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of a game stop is executed, the new player will be able to confirm that the first condition is satisfied by the second notification. can be recognized, increasing convenience for players.

<Various notifications/Jackpot status (fourth notification)>
FIG. 25(e) is a diagram showing an example of the fourth notification in the jackpot state.

The reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, the value of the reference value counter is updated to 195000. .

In this example, the fourth condition is satisfied in the jackpot state (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 195,000 while the condition device and accessory interlocking device or special electric accessory is in operation, (The maximum difference pitch count has reached 95,000 since the power was turned on.) Therefore, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, the jackpot status background image, right-handed hit notification, and attacker notification are continued to be displayed, while the fourth notification PD (In this example, an image containing the text string "Complete function will be activated soon") and the second notification SD (In this example, "Actual number of difference pitches/Number of difference pitches for which the completion function will activate") At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the fourth notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function will be activated soon"). Then, the various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (in this example, orange) corresponding to the fourth notification.

If a certain period of time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after starting the fourth notification PD, the fourth notification PD is erased and the speaker 120 outputs the sound corresponding to the fourth notification. Instead, the jackpot state sound (BGM for the jackpot state) is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in the jackpot state light emission mode (light emission pattern for the jackpot state) instead of the light emission mode corresponding to the fourth notification. On the other hand, the second notification SD continues to display until the next power outage. That is, the broadcast time of the second broadcast SD is longer than the broadcast time of the fourth broadcast PD.

Note that the timing of erasing the "fourth notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if a certain number of game balls are paid out after the start of the fourth notification, the timing of erasing the "fourth notification" is not limited to this example. If the game state changes after the start of the fourth notification, it may be deleted after the start of the fourth notification and when another notification is executed.

<Various notifications/variable status (third notification)>
FIG. 25(f) is a diagram showing an example of the third notification in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot state.

The standard value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, the value of the standard value counter is updated to 196000. .

In this example, the third condition was satisfied in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot state (in this example, the value of the reference value counter went from less than 195,000 to 196,000, and the maximum number of differential pitches reached 96,000 from the time the power was turned on). Therefore, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a variable probability state background image (for example, a background image for a variable probability state) corresponding to the variable probability state and a right-handed notification are displayed, and the third notification TD (main In this example, an image containing the character string "Complete function activated, ends today") is started, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the third notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function activated, ends today"). is output, and the various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (in this example, red) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, it is possible to start the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop before the game stop is actually executed, so that the player is not surprised and the player is It can give you peace of mind.

In addition, when the complete function is activated, the various ball sensors (special figure start opening sensor, regular figure start opening sensor, general winning opening sensor, attacker sensor, V winning sensor) placed on the game board 200 are disabled. , the game is stopped by closing the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, and the firing is stopped by stopping the firing device 110, and the game information (control signal) indicating that the complete function has been activated is ) is output from the information output circuit 336 to the outside, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is stopped.

However, if there are any unpaid balls remaining, the payout device 152 can be activated, and if a special electric accessory or condition device is activated, the game is stopped after the operation is completed. When the complete function is activated, only the game stop may be executed, or both the game stop and the firing stop may be executed. Further, the complete function may be canceled by RWM clearing with a setting change, RWM clearing without a setting change, or both.

In this example, since the condition for activating the complete function (third condition) has been established, the second notification SD is ``actual difference pitch count/difference pitch count for which the complete function is activated''. Instead of an image containing the string "96,000/95,000," display an image containing the string "95,000/95,000," which indicates "number of pitches difference when the complete function is activated/number of pitches that are the difference when the complete function is activated." There is.

If a certain period of time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after starting the third notification TD, the third notification TD is erased and the speaker 120 outputs the sound corresponding to the third notification. Instead, the variable state sound (BGM for the variable state) is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in the variable state light emission mode (light emission pattern for the variable state) instead of the light emission mode corresponding to the third notification. On the other hand, the second notification SD continues to display until the next power outage. That is, the broadcast time of the second broadcast SD is longer than the broadcast time of the third broadcast TD.

According to this example, even if the player changes after the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of a game stop is executed, the new player will be able to confirm that the first condition is satisfied by the second notification. can be recognized, increasing convenience for players.

Note that the timing for erasing the "third notification" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if the complete function is activated after the start of the third notification, after the start of the third notification, When the complete function is activated and processing related to the complete function is completed, or when there is a next power outage, etc., the information may be deleted.

<Various notifications/normal state (after the first condition is met)>
FIG. 25(g) is a diagram showing an example of notification in the normal state after the first condition is satisfied.

This state transitions to the normal state after the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter goes from less than 190,000 to more than 190,000, and the maximum number of pitch differences from when the power is turned on reaches 90,000). , the reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, updates the value of the reference value counter to 189990. There is.

In this example, since the gaming state is a normal state (because the gaming state is not an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state), the first notification FD1 (for example, "XX balls left until complete function activation") Since the first condition has already been established and the second notification SD (image containing the character string ) has not started, the second notification SD ( In this example, the image containing the character string "89990/95000" indicating "actual difference pitch count/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") is continued, and the normal state background image corresponding to the normal state (e.g. . Lights up in a state light emission mode (for example, light emission pattern for normal state).

According to this example, since the first notification is not made when the gaming state is normal, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be made in an appropriate gaming state, and the player To maintain a player's desire to play without giving excessive expectations.

Furthermore, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (the first notification) is executed, the new player can recognize that the first condition has been satisfied by the second notification. This allows for increased convenience for players.

<Various announcements/demonstration performances (after the first condition is met)>
FIG. 25(h) is a diagram showing an example of notification during demonstration production in the normal state after the first condition is established.

The state shifts to the demo state after the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter goes from less than 190,000 to more than 190,000, and the maximum number of pitch differences from when the power is turned on reaches 90,000). , the reference value counter update process (counting means) subtracts the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out), and in this example, updates the value of the reference value counter to 189990. There is.

In this example, since the demonstration effect is being executed in the normal state (because the gaming state is not in an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state), the first notification FD1 (for example, "Complete function activated" Although the image containing the character string "00 balls left" does not start, the first condition has already been met and the second notification SD has started, so in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, Starts the second notification SD (in this example, an image containing the character string "89990/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated"), and corresponds to the demo state. A demo background image (for example, demo effect for the demo state) etc. is displayed, demo state audio corresponding to the demo state (for example, BGM for the demo state) is output from the speaker 120, and various lamps 418 are displayed. Lights up in a demo state light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting pattern for the demo state) corresponding to the state.

According to this example, since the first notification is not made when the gaming state is normal, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be made in an appropriate gaming state, and the player To maintain a player's desire to play without giving excessive expectations.

Furthermore, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (the first notification) is executed, the new player can recognize that the first condition has been satisfied by the second notification. This allows for increased convenience for players.

<Examples of various notifications/notifications>
Next, an embodiment of notification that can be executed by the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Example 1 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing Example 1 of notification in chronological order. Embodiment 1 shows, in chronological order, an example of notification in the case where the jackpot state and variable probability game state continue from 90,000 to 95,000 in the maximum number of differential pitches. This will be explained in detail below.

<Various Notifications/Notification Example 1/Power ON>
The state shown in FIG. 26(a) is a state in which the power switch 178 of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, and the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100.

In the same state, the reference value counter update process (counting means) uses the power-on as a trigger to set the safe (number of payout game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308 to a value equivalent to 100,000 balls as an initial value (for example, a decimal number). 100000), set the out (number of game balls fired) counter stored in the RAM 308 to 0 as an initial value, and set the reference value counter stored in the RAM 308 to ``Safe (number of game balls paid out)'' as an initial value. In this example, a value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set.

Further, since the gaming state after the power is turned on is set to the normal state, notification is performed in the notification mode (normal state after the power is turned on) described using FIG. 25(a).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25A, a normal state background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background image for the normal state), etc. is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, and the speaker 120 outputs normal state audio (for example, BGM for normal state) corresponding to the normal state, and lights up various lamps 418 in a normal state light emission mode (for example, light emission pattern for normal state) corresponding to the normal state. do.

<Example 1 of various notifications/notifications/Power OFF → ON when the initial value is 100,000 or more>
The state shown in FIG. 26(b) is a state in which the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power outage), and the state shown in FIG. It is in a state of being

In this example, since the power was cut off and restored while 100010 was stored in the reference value counter (the reference value counter exceeded the initial value of 100000), the reference value counter update process (counting means) When the power is turned on, a value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set as an initial value in the safe (number of payout game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308, The initial value is set to 0 in the counter (number of balls), and the value of out (number of game balls fired) is subtracted from the value of safe (number of game balls fired) as the initial value in the reference value counter stored in the RAM 308. In this example, a numerical value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set.

In addition, since the gaming state after the power is turned on is set to the normal state, notification is performed in the notification mode (normal state) explained using FIG. 25(a), and the normal state is The normal state background image (background image for normal state) corresponding to the normal state is displayed, the speaker 120 outputs the normal state sound (BGM for normal state) corresponding to the normal state, and the various lamps 418 are Lights up in a normal state light emission mode (light emission pattern for normal state) corresponding to the state.

<Example 1 of various notifications/notifications/Power OFF → ON when the initial value is less than 100,000>
The state shown in FIG. 26(d) is a state in which the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power outage), and the state shown in FIG. It is in a state of being

In this example, since the power was interrupted and the power was restored while 99990 was stored in the reference value counter (the reference value counter was below the initial value of 100000), the reference value counter updating process (counting means) When the power is turned on, a value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set as an initial value in the safe (number of payout game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308, The initial value is set to 0 in the counter (number of balls), and the value of out (number of game balls fired) is subtracted from the value of safe (number of game balls fired) as the initial value in the reference value counter stored in the RAM 308. In this example, a numerical value corresponding to 100,000 balls (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) is set.

In addition, since the gaming state after the power is turned on is set to the normal state, notification is performed in the notification mode explained using FIG. 25(a) (normal state after the power is turned on), and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208 , displays a normal state background image (background image for normal state) corresponding to the normal state, outputs normal state sound (BGM for normal state) corresponding to the normal state from the speaker 120, and displays various lamps. 418 is turned on in a normal state light emission mode (light emission pattern for normal state) corresponding to the normal state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Jackpot status (difference pitch count less than 90,000)>
The state shown in FIG. 26(g) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has not reached 90,000 since the power was turned on in the jackpot game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 189,990, and the first condition is not met (the value of the reference value counter is less than 190,000, and the maximum number of differential pitches has not reached 90,000 since the power was turned on. ) Therefore, the notification is made in the notification mode of the jackpot state (notification that the first condition is not satisfied) shown in FIG. 25(b).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a jackpot state background image corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, a background image for the jackpot state) and a right-hand display that encourages right-handed hitting are displayed. A hitting notification (in this example, an image containing the character string "→Right hit") and an attacker notification (in this example, an image including the character string "Aim for the attacker →") to encourage the ball to enter the variable winning hole 235. ), the speaker 120 outputs a jackpot state sound (for example, BGM for the jackpot state) corresponding to the jackpot state, and the various lamps 418 are displayed in a jackpot state light emitting mode corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, jackpot state). Lights up with a specific lighting pattern).

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Jackpot status (difference pitch count 90100)>
The state shown in FIG. 26(h) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 90,100 since the power was turned on in the jackpot game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 190,100, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 190,100, and the maximum number of pitch differences from when the power is turned on is 90,100. (reached), the notification is made in the notification mode of the jackpot state (first notification) shown in FIG. 25(c).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), while continuing to display the jackpot status background image, right hit notification, and attacker notification in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, the first notification FD1 (main notification) is continued. In this example, an image containing the character string "5000 balls left until the complete function activates") and a second notification SD (in this example, "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function activates") are displayed. At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"). The various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (yellow in this example) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving excessive expectations to the player. can be done.

Furthermore, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (the first notification) is executed, the new player can recognize that the first condition has been satisfied by the second notification. This allows for increased convenience for players.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Probability variable state (difference pitch count 90500)>
The state shown in FIG. 26(i) is a state in which the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 90,000 in the jackpot state, and after the first notification is executed, the state shifts to the variable probability state.

In the same state, since the gaming state has transitioned from the jackpot state to the variable probability state, the background image of the variable probability state, the display of the right-handed hit notification, and the second notification SD (in this example, the "Actual difference ball count/complete function (an image containing a character string "90500/95000" indicating the number of pitches activated), and the speaker 120 outputs a definite variable state sound (for example, BGM for a definite variable state) corresponding to the definite variable state. , the various lamps 418 are turned on in a variable probability state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for a variable probability state) corresponding to the variable probability state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Jackpot status (difference pitch count 94,000)>
The state shown in FIG. 26(j) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 94,000 since the power was turned on in the jackpot game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 19,400, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 194,000, and the maximum number of pitches difference is 94,000 from the time the power is turned on. Therefore, notification is made in the notification mode of the jackpot state (another example of the first notification) shown in FIG. 25(d).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(d), while continuing to display the jackpot status background image, right hit notification, and attacker notification in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, the first notification FD1 (main notification) is continued. In this example, an image containing the character string "1000 balls left until the complete function activates") and a second notification SD (in this example, "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function activates") At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "1000 balls left until the complete function is activated"). The various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (yellow in this example) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving excessive expectations to the player. can be done.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Jackpot state (difference pitch count 95,000)>
The state shown in FIG. 26(k) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 95,000 since the power was turned on in the jackpot state.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 195,000, and the fourth condition is satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter is 190,000 while the condition device and accessory-linked movement device or special electric accessory is in operation. 195,000, and the maximum number of difference balls has reached 95,000 since the power was turned on), the notification is made in the notification mode of the jackpot state (fourth notification) shown in FIG. 25(e).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25(e), while continuing to display the jackpot status background image, right hit notification, and attacker notification in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, the fourth notification PD (main In this example, an image containing the string "Complete function will be activated soon") and a second notification SD (in this example, "Actual number of difference pitches/Number of difference pitches for which the completion function will be activated") 95000/95000"), and at the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the fourth notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function will be activated soon"), Various lamps 418 are lit in a light emission mode (in this example, orange) corresponding to the fourth notification.

According to this example, it is possible to start the notification (fourth notification, complete function activation notification) that foretells the execution of the game stop before the game stop is actually executed, thereby preventing the player from being surprised. This allows the player to have peace of mind.

Note that in the same state, the third condition is satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter has changed from less than 195,000 to 195,000, and the maximum number of pitch differences has reached 95,000 since the power was turned on). ), the pachinko machine 100 is configured so that when the gaming state is a jackpot state or a small win state, the complete function activation flag is only turned on and the complete function is not activated.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Probability variable state (difference pitch count 95,000)>
FIG. 26(l) shows a state in which the jackpot state has transitioned to a variable probability state.

In the same state, the complete function activation flag is set to ON in the jackpot state before the transition (the third condition is met), and the gaming state is in a variable probability state (both the jackpot state and the small win state). Therefore, the notification is performed in the notification mode of the variable probability state (third notification) shown in FIG. 25(f).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(f), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a variable probability state background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, a background image for a variable probability state) and a right-handed hit notification are displayed. At the same time, the third notification TD (in this example, an image including the character string "Complete function activated, ends today") is started, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the third notification (in this example, A voice saying "Complete function activated, ends today") is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in a light emission mode (in this example, red) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, it is possible to start the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop before the game stop is actually executed, so that the player is not surprised and the player is It can give you peace of mind.

In addition, when the complete function is activated, the various ball sensors (special figure start opening sensor, regular figure start opening sensor, general winning opening sensor, attacker sensor, V winning sensor) placed on the game board 200 are disabled. , the game is stopped by closing the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, and the firing is stopped by stopping the firing device 110, and the game information (control signal) indicating that the complete function has been activated is ) is output from the information output circuit 336 to the outside, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is stopped.

However, if there are any unpaid balls remaining, the payout device 152 can be operated, and if a special electric accessory or condition device is in operation, the game is stopped after the operation is completed. When the complete function is activated, only the game stop may be executed, or both the game stop and the firing stop may be executed. Further, the complete function may be canceled by RWM clearing with a setting change, RWM clearing without a setting change, or both.

In addition, in this example, after the third condition is satisfied in the jackpot state (after the complete function activation flag is turned on), the maximum difference pitch count decreases to less than 95,000 in the subsequent jackpot state or variable probability state. Even if the complete function is activated, the complete function is activated without turning off the complete function activation flag.

In addition, in this example, even if the third condition is satisfied (the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 95,000), if the gaming state is a jackpot state or a small win state, the complete function activation flag is set. Although the configuration is such that the complete function is not activated by simply turning it on, the complete function may be configured to be activated even when the gaming state is a jackpot state or a small win state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Power OFF → Power ON without RWM clear>
The state shown in FIG. 26(m) is a state in which the power switch 178 of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off), and the state shown in FIG. 26(n) In this case, a power-on operation without RWM clearing (in this example, an operation of turning on the power switch 178 without pressing the RAM clear switch 180) is performed, and the power is turned on again (restored) to the pachinko machine 100. state.

In this example, since a power outage and power restoration were performed without RWM clearing, the main control unit 300 controls the gaming state (in this example, a variable state) and the safe state (number of paid game balls) before the power outage. The value of the counter, the value of the out (number of game balls fired) counter, and the value of the reference value counter (196000 in this example) are maintained respectively, and the probability change state shown in FIG. 25(f) is maintained in the same manner as before the power cut. The notification is made in the notification mode (third notification).

In this example, since the condition for activating the complete function (third condition) has already been established, the second notification SD is "actual number of differential pitches/number of differential pitches for which the complete function is activated". Instead of an image containing the character string "96000/95000" indicating "Difference pitch number when the complete function is activated / difference pitch number when the complete function is activated", an image containing the character string "95000/95000" indicating it's shown.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 1/Power OFF → Power ON with RWM clear>
The state shown in FIG. 26(o) is a state in which the power switch 178 of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off), and the state shown in FIG. 26(p) In this case, a power-on operation that involves clearing the RWM (in this example, an operation of turning on the power switch 178 while pressing the RAM clear switch 180) is performed, and the power is turned on (restored) to the pachinko machine 100 again. be.

In this example, since a power outage/power restoration accompanied by RWM clearing was performed, the gaming state is set to the initial state, the normal state, and the reference value counter update process (counting means) is started from the RAM 308 when the power is turned on. Set a value equivalent to 100,000 balls as an initial value (for example, 100,000 in decimal notation) in the safe (number of paid game balls) counter stored in the RAM 308; Set 0 as the initial value, and set the standard value counter stored in the RAM 308 as the initial value of "the value obtained by subtracting the value of OUT (number of game balls fired) from the value of safe (number of game balls paid out)", in this example, 100000. Set a numerical value (for example, 100000 in decimal notation) corresponding to the sphere.

Note that the power-on operation accompanied by RWM clearing is not limited to the operation of turning on the power switch 178 while pressing the RAM clear switch 180, but may include, for example, the operation of turning on the power switch 178 while pressing the setting change key 192. Good too.

<Example 2 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 27(1) is a diagram showing the second embodiment of notification in chronological order. Embodiment 2 shows in chronological order an example in which when the maximum difference pitch number reaches 90,000 twice in a jackpot state, the first notification is not executed on the second reaching.

Note that the states shown in FIGS. 27(1)(a) to 27(1)(c) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 26(g) to 26(i), so the explanation is Omitted.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Normal state (difference pitch count 89,000)>
The state shown in FIGS. 27(1) and 27(d) is a state in which the variable probability state has transitioned to the normal state.

In this state, since the gaming state has transitioned from the variable probability state to the normal state, notification is performed in the same notification manner as in the normal state (after the first condition is met) explained using FIG. 25(e). .

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a second notification (in this example, a character string "89000/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") is displayed. In addition to displaying a normal state background image (for example, a background image for a normal state) corresponding to the normal state, the speaker 120 outputs a normal state sound corresponding to the normal state (for example, a normal state BGM) is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in a normal state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for the normal state) corresponding to the normal state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Jackpot status (difference pitch count less than 90,000)>
The state shown in FIG. 27(1)(e) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has not reached 90,000 since the power was turned on in the jackpot game that has transitioned from the normal state.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 189,990, and the first condition is not met (the value of the reference value counter is less than 190,000, and the maximum number of differential pitches has not reached 90,000 since the power was turned on. ) Therefore, notification is made in the same notification mode as the jackpot state shown in FIG. 25(b) (notification where the first condition is not satisfied), and in the previous jackpot state shown in FIG. 27(1)(b). The display of the second notification SD that has started is continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a jackpot state background image corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, a background image for the jackpot state) and a right-hand display that encourages right-handed hitting are displayed. A hitting notification (in this example, an image containing the character string "→Right hit") and an attacker notification (in this example, an image including the character string "Aim for the attacker →") to encourage the ball to enter the variable winning hole 235. ), the speaker 120 outputs a jackpot state sound (for example, BGM for the jackpot state) corresponding to the jackpot state, and the various lamps 418 are displayed in a jackpot state light emitting mode corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, jackpot state). At the same time, although not shown, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a second notification (in this example, "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") is displayed. image containing the character string "89900/95000" indicating

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Jackpot status (difference pitch count 90100)>
The state shown in FIGS. 27(1) and 27(f) is a state in which the maximum number of difference balls has reached 90,100 since the power was turned on in the jackpot game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 190,100, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 190,100, and the maximum number of pitch differences from when the power is turned on is 90,100. However, if the first condition is met again after the first condition has been met (if the maximum difference ball count has reached 90100 twice since the power was turned on), the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 will ), the configuration is such that the first notification is not executed.

In this example, the first condition was satisfied once in the previous jackpot state shown in FIG. 27(1)(b), and this is the second time that the first condition is satisfied, so In the display area 208, the jackpot status background image, right-handed hit notification, attacker notification are displayed, and the second notification (in this example, ``90100'' indicating ``actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated'') is displayed. /95000"), the speaker 120 outputs a jackpot state sound (for example, BGM for the jackpot state) corresponding to the jackpot state, and the various lamps 418 are set to correspond to the jackpot state. The first notification (for example, an image including the character string "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated") is not performed.

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop does not become redundant and can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (the first notification) is executed, the new player can recognize that the first condition has been satisfied by the second notification. This allows for increased convenience for players.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Normal state (difference pitch count 89,000, demo production)>
The state shown in FIG. 27(1)(g) is a state in which the demonstration effect is started after transitioning from the jackpot state to the normal state.

In the same state, since the demonstration performance is started in the normal state that has transitioned from the jackpot state where the first condition is satisfied, the demonstration performance (after the first condition is satisfied) as explained using FIG. 25(h) The notification will be made in the same notification manner.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a second notification (in this example, a character string "89000/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") is displayed. At the same time, a demo background image (for example, a demo effect for the demo state) corresponding to the demo state is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a demo state sound corresponding to the demo state (for example, a demo effect for the demo state). BGM), and the various lamps 418 are lit in a demo state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for the demo state) corresponding to the demo state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Jackpot state (difference pitch count 90200)>
The state shown in FIG. 27(1)(h) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 90,200 since the power was turned on in a jackpot game that occurred after the normal state (demonstration performance).

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 190,200, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 190,200, and the maximum number of pitches that differ from the time of power on is 90,200. However, the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 does not perform the demonstration performance even if the first condition is satisfied again after the first condition has been satisfied. After that, the configuration is such that the first notification is executed.

In this example, the first condition is satisfied once in the previous jackpot state shown in FIG. 27(1)(b), but the demonstration effect is executed in the normal state shown in FIG. 27(1)(g). Therefore, the notification is made in the same notification mode as the jackpot state (first notification) explained using FIG. 25(c).

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a jackpot state background image corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, a background image for the jackpot state) and a right-hand hit notification (in this example, "→Right In addition to displaying an image containing the character string ``Aim for the attacker →'' and an attacker notification (in this example, an image including the character string ``Aim for the attacker →'') to encourage the ball to enter the variable winning hole 235, the first notification (In this example, an image that includes the character string "5000 balls left until the complete function activates") and a second notification (in this example, it shows "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function activates") At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"). , the various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (yellow in this example) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, since there is a possibility that the same player is playing because the demonstration effect is not being performed, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop will not be redundant. , can be executed at the right time. Further, if the player has changed, the second condition is not satisfied, so that the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing.

<Example 3 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 27(2) is a diagram showing the third embodiment of notification in chronological order. Embodiment 3 shows, in chronological order, an example in which the first notification is not performed when the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 90,000 in the normal state.

Note that the state shown in FIG. 27(2)(a) is the same as the state described using FIG. 26(g), so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 3/Normal state (difference pitch count 89900)>
The state shown in FIG. 27(2)(b) is a state in which the jackpot state has transitioned to the normal state.

Since this state is a normal state, notification is performed in the same notification mode as the normal state shown in FIG. 25(a).

Specifically, a normal state background image (for example, a background image for a normal state) corresponding to the normal state is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, and a normal state background image corresponding to the normal state is displayed from the speaker 120. Sound (for example, BGM for the normal state) is output, and various lamps 418 are lit in a normal state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for the normal state) corresponding to the normal state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 3/Normal state (difference pitch count 90100)>
The state shown in FIG. 27(2)(c) is a state in which the maximum number of pitch differences has reached 90,100 since the power was turned on in the normal state.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 190,100, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 190,100, and the maximum number of pitch differences from when the power is turned on is 90,100. However, the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 is configured not to perform the first notification if the first condition is satisfied in a case where the state is not an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state.

In this example, since the first condition is satisfied in the normal state, the first notification (for example, an image containing the character string "5000 balls left until complete function activation") is not displayed, and the LCD display is In the display area of the device 208, a normal state background image (for example, a background image for a normal state) etc. continues to be displayed, and from the speaker 120, a normal state sound corresponding to the normal state (for example, BGM for a normal state) is displayed. is output, and the various lamps 418 are lit in a normal state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for the normal state) corresponding to the normal state.

On the other hand, since the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the notification means may execute the second notification when at least the first condition is satisfied, the second notification SD (in this example, An image containing the character string "90100/95000" indicating "actual number of pitch differences/number of pitch differences for which the complete function is activated" starts.

According to this example, even if the player changes after the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of a game stop is executed, the new player will be able to confirm that the first condition is satisfied by the second notification. can be recognized, increasing convenience for players.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 3/Normal state (difference pitch count 90100, demo performance)>
The state shown in FIGS. 27(2) and 27(d) is a state in which the demonstration performance is started after transitioning from the jackpot state to the normal state.

In this state, since the demonstration performance has started in the normal state where the first condition is satisfied, the notification mode is similar to the demonstration performance (after the first condition is satisfied) explained using FIG. 25(h). Announcement will be made.

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a second notification (in this example, the character string "90100/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") is displayed. At the same time, a demo background image (for example, a demo effect for the demo state) corresponding to the demo state is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a demo state sound corresponding to the demo state (for example, a demo effect for the demo state). BGM), and the various lamps 418 are lit in a demo state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for the demo state) corresponding to the demo state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 2/Jackpot state (difference pitch count 90200)>
The state shown in FIG. 28(2)(e) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 90,200 since the power was turned on in a jackpot game that occurred after the normal state (demonstration performance).

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 190,200, and the first condition is met (in this example, the value of the reference value counter changes from less than 190,000 to 190,200, and the maximum number of pitches that differ from the time of power on is 90,200. However, the notification means of the pachinko machine 100 does not perform the demonstration performance even if the first condition is satisfied again after the first condition has been satisfied. After that, the configuration is such that the first notification is executed.

In this example, the first condition is satisfied once in the normal state shown in FIG. 28(2)(c), but the demonstration effect is executed in the normal state shown in FIG. 28(2)(d). Therefore, notification is performed in the same notification mode as the jackpot state (first notification) explained using FIG. 25(c).

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a jackpot state background image corresponding to the jackpot state (for example, a background image for the jackpot state) and a right-hand hit notification (in this example, "→Right In addition to displaying an image containing the character string ``Aim for the attacker →'' and an attacker notification (in this example, an image including the character string ``Aim for the attacker →'') to encourage the ball to enter the variable winning hole 235, the first notification (In this example, an image that includes the character string "5000 balls left until the complete function activates") and a second notification (in this example, it shows "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function activates") At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"). , the various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (yellow in this example) corresponding to the first notification.

According to this example, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the player's desire to play can be maintained without giving excessive expectations to the player. can be done.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which the first notification is started when the state shifts to the jackpot state after the first condition is satisfied, but if the state shifts to the small win state after the first condition is met The configuration may be such that the first notification is started immediately, or even if the first condition is met again after the first condition has been met, the small The configuration may be such that the first notification is executed in a winning state.

<Example 4 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 27(3) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment of notification in chronological order. Embodiment 4 shows in chronological order an example of notification when the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 90,000 while the liquid crystal display device 208 is being restored after the power is cut off and restored in a jackpot state.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the power is cut off or restored while the gaming state is in the jackpot state, small win state, or variable probability state, the value of the reference value counter is maintained and the initial value (in this example, 10 100000 in base numbers) is not set.

In this example, after the power is interrupted and restored with 189980 stored in the reference value counter, the game progresses while the liquid crystal display device 208 is being restored (during initialization), and the first condition is met ( In this example, the value of the reference value counter has changed from less than 190,000 to 190,100, and the maximum number of difference pitches has reached 90,100 since the power was turned on). While the second notification is not performed (cannot be displayed), the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the first notification (in this example, a sound saying "5000 balls left until the complete function is activated"). , the various lamps 418 are turned on in a light emission mode (yellow in this example) corresponding to the first notification.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which the value of the reference value counter is maintained when the power is cut off and restored while the gaming state is in the jackpot state, small win state, or variable probability state, but the present invention For example, a counter clear prevention button (operation means) that prevents the reference value counter from being cleared (initialized) is provided, and the power is cut off or restored while the counter clear prevention button is pressed. In this case, the value of the reference value counter may be maintained, or a power ON operation without RWM clearing (in this example, an operation of turning on the power switch 178 without pressing the RAM clear switch 180) The configuration may be such that the value of the reference value counter is maintained when the reference value counter is performed.

<Example 5 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 28(1) is a diagram showing Example 5 of notification in chronological order. Embodiment 5 shows, in chronological order, an example of notification in the case of a V winning after the maximum difference pitch count reaches 90,000 in a small winning state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 5/Small hit state (difference pitch count 94990)>
The state shown in FIG. 28(1)(a) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has not reached 95,000 since the power was turned on in the small winning game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 194,990, and the third and fourth conditions are not met (the value of the reference value counter is less than 195,000, and the maximum number of pitch differences is 95,000 from the time the power is turned on. (has not been reached), the notification is made in the notification mode of a small hit state (notification that the first condition is not satisfied).

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a small win state background image corresponding to the small win state (for example, a background image for the small win state) and a right hit notification that encourages right hit (in this example, The speaker 120 outputs a small win state sound (for example, BGM for the small win state) corresponding to the small win state, and various lamps 418 are displayed. It lights up in a small win state light emission mode (for example, a light emission pattern for a small win state) corresponding to the small win state.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 5/Small hit state (difference pitch count 95005)>
The state shown in FIGS. 28(1) and 28(b) is a state in which the maximum number of difference balls has reached 95005 since the power was turned on in the small winning game.

In the same state, the value of the reference value counter is 195005, and the fourth condition is satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter is 190005 while the condition device and the accessory-linked movement device or the special electric accessory is in operation. 195,000, and the maximum number of difference pitches reached 95,000 since the power was turned on), the notification is made in the notification mode of a small hit state (fourth notification).

Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, while continuing to display the small hit status background image and the right-handed hit report, a fourth notification (in this example, "Complete function will be activated soon") is displayed. (image containing a character string) and a second notification (in this example, an image containing a character string "95005/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated"). At the same time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the fourth notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function will be activated soon"), and the various lamps 418 are set to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fourth notification. It lights up (orange in this example).

<Various notifications/Notification Example 5/Small hit state (difference pitch count 95020)>
The state shown in FIGS. 28(1) and 28(c) is a state in which V is won in the small winning game and the maximum number of differential balls has reached 95005 since the power was turned on.

In the same state, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a small hit state background image, a right-handed hit report display, and a second notification (in this example, "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated") are displayed. The image containing the character string "95020/95000" indicating a small win) continues, while the speaker 120 outputs a small win state sound corresponding to the small win state (for example, instead of the sound corresponding to the fourth notification). BGM for the small win state) is output, and the various lamps 418 are changed to the light emitting mode corresponding to the small win state (e.g., the light emitting pattern for the small win state) instead of the light emitting mode corresponding to the fourth notification. ) lights up.

<Various notifications/Notification Example 5/Jackpot status (difference pitch count 95020)>
The state shown in FIGS. 28(1) and 28(d) is a state in which the maximum number of differential balls has reached 95020 since the power was turned on in the jackpot state that has transitioned from the small win state.

In the same state, the third condition is satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter has changed from less than 195,000 to 195,020, and the maximum difference in pitch count has reached 95,020 since the power was turned on), In the pachinko machine 100, when the gaming state is a jackpot state or a small win state, the complete function activation flag is only turned on and the complete function is not activated.

<Example 5 of various notifications/notifications/variable state (difference pitch count 96,000)>
FIG. 28(1)(e) shows a state in which the jackpot state has transitioned to a variable probability state.

In the same state, the complete function activation flag is set to ON in the jackpot state before the transition (the third condition is met), and the gaming state is in a variable probability state (both the jackpot state and the small win state). Therefore, the notification is performed in the notification mode of the variable probability state (third notification) shown in FIG. 25(f).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(f), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a variable probability state background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, a background image for a variable probability state) and a right-handed hit notification are displayed. At the same time, the third notification TD (in this example, an image containing the character string ``Complete function activated, ends today'') and the second notification (in this example, ``Actual difference pitch count/Complete function activated. At the same time, from the speaker 120, a sound corresponding to the third notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function activated, ends today") is started. ), and the various lamps 418 are lit in a light emission mode (in this example, red) corresponding to the first notification.

In addition, when the complete function is activated, the various ball sensors (special figure start opening sensor, regular figure start opening sensor, general winning opening sensor, attacker sensor, V winning sensor) arranged on the game board 200 are disabled. , the game is stopped by closing the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, and the firing is stopped by stopping the firing device 110, and the game information (control signal) indicating that the complete function has been activated is ) is output from the information output circuit 336 to the outside, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is stopped.

However, if there are any unpaid balls remaining, the payout device 152 can be operated, and if a special electric accessory or condition device is in operation, the game is stopped after the operation is completed. When the complete function is activated, only the game stop may be executed, or both the game stop and the firing stop may be executed. Further, the complete function may be canceled by RWM clearing with a setting change, RWM clearing without a setting change, or both.

<Example 6 of various notifications/notifications>
FIG. 28(2) is a diagram showing Example 6 of notification in chronological order. The sixth embodiment shows in chronological order an example of notification in the case where no V prize is won after the maximum difference pitch count reaches 90,000 in a small winning state.

Note that the states shown in FIGS. 28(2)(a) to 28(2)(b) are the same as the states described using FIGS. 28(1)(a) to 28(b), The explanation will be omitted.

<Example 6 of various notifications/notifications/variable state (difference pitch count 95020)>
FIG. 28(2)(c) shows a state in which the small winning state has shifted to the variable probability state without winning a V prize.

In the same state, the third condition was satisfied (in this example, the value of the reference value counter went from less than 195,000 to 195,020, and the maximum difference in the number of pitches since the power was turned on reached 95,020). ) The notification is made in the notification mode of the variable probability state (third notification).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(f), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208, a variable probability state background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, a background image for a variable probability state) and a right-handed hit notification are displayed. At the same time, the third notification TD (in this example, an image containing the character string ``Complete function activated, ends today'') and the second notification (in this example, ``Actual difference pitch count/Complete function activated. At the same time, from the speaker 120, a sound corresponding to the third notification (in this example, a sound saying "Complete function activated, ends today") is started. ), and the various lamps 418 are lit in a light emission mode (in this example, red) corresponding to the first notification.

In addition, when the complete function is activated, the various ball sensors (special figure start opening sensor, regular figure start opening sensor, general winning opening sensor, attacker sensor, V winning sensor) placed on the game board 200 are disabled. , the game is stopped by closing the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, and the firing is stopped by stopping the firing device 110, and the game information (control signal) indicating that the complete function has been activated is ) is output from the information output circuit 336 to the outside, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is stopped.

However, if there are any unpaid balls remaining, the payout device 152 can be operated, and if a special electric accessory or condition device is in operation, the game is stopped after the operation is completed. When the complete function is activated, only the game stop may be executed, or both the game stop and the firing stop may be executed. Further, the complete function may be canceled by RWM clearing with a setting change, RWM clearing without a setting change, or both.

<Various announcements/summary>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine not shown) has a machine that can count the game value (for example, the number of game balls and the number of game medals). means (for example, reference value counter update processing) and the first notification (for example, the first notification FD1 shown in FIG. 25(c) or the first notification FD2 shown in FIG. 25(d)). The game machine is equipped with a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208, a speaker 120, and various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 25), and the first notification is a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop (for example, (an image containing a character string "5000 balls left until complete function activation"), and when at least a first condition is satisfied, the notification means may execute the first notification, and the first condition is: A condition that is satisfied when the counting means counts the first value from a value lower than the first value (for example, when 190000 is counted as the value of the reference value counter), and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the first condition is satisfied in a state in which the game machine is playing, the notification means does not execute the first notification.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop at an appropriate timing, without giving players excessive expectations, and It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the state is not an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state.

With such a configuration, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed in an appropriate gaming state, without giving excessive expectations to the player, and improving the player's game. You can maintain your motivation.

Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied once the first condition is satisfied.

With such a configuration, the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop will not be redundant and can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when a demonstration performance is not performed after the first condition is once satisfied.

If such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the same player is playing because the demonstration performance is not being performed, so the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop becomes redundant. It can be executed at the right time. Further, if the player has changed, the second condition is not satisfied, so that the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Further, when at least the first condition is satisfied, the notification means may execute a second notification (for example, the second notification SD shown in FIG. 25(c)), and the second notification is The notification is based on the gaming value (for example, an image containing the character string "90100/95000" indicating "actual number of difference pitches/number of difference pitches for which the complete function is activated"), and the notification time of the second notification is , the notification time may be longer than the notification time of the first notification.

With such a configuration, even if the player changes after the notification suggesting the execution of the game stop (first notification) is executed, the first condition will be satisfied by the second notification when the new player It is possible to recognize what the player has done, thereby increasing convenience for the player.

Further, the notification means includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208 shown in FIG. 25), the display means is capable of displaying a demonstration effect, and the display means is configured to display the demonstration effect while displaying the demonstration effect. It may also be a means that can execute the second notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the first condition has been met even while the demonstration performance is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, the game is stopped when at least a third condition is satisfied (for example, a complete function is activated), and the third condition is such that the counting means starts from a value lower than the second value to the second value. The second value may be larger than the first value.

With such a configuration, it is possible to start the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop before the game stop is actually executed, and the game can be stopped without surprising the player. It can give people peace of mind.

<Various notifications/variations>
Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100. For example, when at least the fourth condition is satisfied, the notification means may issue the fourth notification (for example, FIG. 25(e) ) may be executed, and the fourth notification may be a notification that foretells the execution of the game stop (for example, an image containing the character string "Complete function will be activated soon"). It may be.

Further, the initial value of the reference value counter is not limited to 100000 in decimal notation, and may be any other numerical value. Further, the numerical value added to the reference value counter is not limited to the planned number of prize balls, but may be, for example, the actual number of paid balls. Further, when the reference value counter reaches 0, the subtraction may not be performed.

Moreover, it is preferable that the third notification is a notification including character strings such as "complete", "today", and "end". Further, while the complete function (safety device) is in operation, it is preferable that the liquid crystal display device and the lamp continue to provide notification even if notification by the speaker is stopped.

Furthermore, when the complete function (safety device) is activated, the reference value counter may or may not be reset (initialized) even if the power is restored after a power failure. Further, a notification may be made indicating that no balls have been fired (or within a certain number of shots such as 100 shots) since the reference value counter was reset (initialized), and this notification may be sent to the display of the main control unit 300. (For example, it may be displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196).

Further, the complete function (safety device) may be activated when the reference value counter reaches 195000 during the period from the closing of the attacker to the end of the residual ball detection time (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, if the reference value counter reaches 1950000 before the attacker closes and you win a V prize during the period until the end of the remaining ball detection time, the complete function (safety device) will occur when the jackpot operation ends instead of the small hit operation. may be activated.

In addition, if the complete function (safety device) is activated and the firing is stopped, the ball remaining in the firing device cannot be retrieved by the player. It may be possible to return it.

Further, when the complete function (safety device) is activated, in addition to (or instead of) the message "Complete function activated, ends today", a notification such as "Please clear RAM" may be made.

Additionally, when a specific display (such as a right-handed instruction or a V-direction instruction) is being displayed, the notification before the completion function is activated may be displayed in a small size so as not to overlap with the specific display. , it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the specific display (position that does not overlap), or it may be displayed semitransparently so that the specific display can be seen at a position that overlaps with the specific display (position that overlaps). , it may be displayed at a time when no specific display is displayed.

Also, during the jackpot when the complete function (safety device) is activated, a specific performance (held continuous performance) may not be issued. Furthermore, the operation of the movable body may be restricted after a specific time (the remaining round of the jackpot in which the maximum number of differential pitches reaches 95,000) before the completion function (safety device) is activated.

Also, based on the difference ball data (out-safe) output from the main control unit 300, the lottery results of various types of lottery (for example, performance lottery) in the first sub-control unit 400 (or second sub-control unit 500) are displayed. It may be changed. Further, when the complete function (safety device) is activated during the operation of the movable body, the movable body may be moved to the initial position immediately, or may be moved to the initial position after the operation is completed.

Further, while the complete function (safety device) is in operation, the third notification sound or light emission may be notified again by steering wheel detection. Further, RWM may be cleared by elapse of a certain period of time or by changing the date after activation of the complete function (safety device). In addition, the counter clear prevention button may also be used as a button with other functions such as a setting button, and when it is pointing to the setting key, it is "setting change", and when it is not pointing, it is "counter clear prevention button". It may be used as

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 to 44. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 29 to 44 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 29 to 44, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 44, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 29 to 44.

FIG. 29 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain this specifically using FIG. 30, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 includes three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 32) A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed (described later in FIG. 17) (the line on which winning determination is made). When the symbol corresponding to stops, it is determined that the prize has been won. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

In FIG. 30, there is a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples; for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is. Note that among the lines shown in FIG. 30, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The active line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, line L4 becomes valid. (becomes used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the lower right line L2, and the upper right line L3, may be used as active lines, or a number of active lines may be used depending on the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific prize winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state that will be described later. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 31(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 31) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 31) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board storage case 210. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 37) inside is arranged. be. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the right side plate 260, which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 37) and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value adjusts the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing games for a predetermined period of time. It is a value called a "payout rate", and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6".

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detects OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power control board 252B (FIG. 37 A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 31(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display numerically the game modes (setting values) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292.

In addition, the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed as a number, which can be used to check the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value confirmation process that allows checking the setting value is started, and the setting key switch 281 When the setting key is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value changing process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired gaming mode can be selected. can. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation is also referred to as the setting value change mode. The period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the start conditions and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, the conditions for starting the set value change mode are (1) that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the ON state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. , is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the starting condition for the set value confirmation mode is that the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the power is turned on, and (2) the front door 102 is left open. This is not a condition. Further, the conditions for ending the set value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in this embodiment, the start condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state, while the end condition for the set value change mode (set value confirmation mode) requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change process (set value confirmation process) while the front door 102 is in the closed state, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change process (set value confirmation process) is not started based on an illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudster cannot terminate the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process). Therefore, it becomes easier to apprehend fraudsters on the spot.

In addition, in the setting value change mode, the effecting devices such as the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to indicate that the setting value is being changed. In the setting value confirmation mode, the above production device is used to make a notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as setting value confirmation notification). )I do.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 32, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel unit 700R inside a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. At the top of this reel case 702, connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 are provided for connection to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 37) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 37). A left reel 110 is arranged in the left reel unit 700L, a middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m, and 112m (see FIG. 37) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m to 112m is a stepping motor. The following will explain the left reel unit 700L as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. The left reel unit 700L includes a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reel 110. It is attached to a mounting base 732.

Note that replacement work can be performed for each reel unit 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L breaks down, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

33(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 includes a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. In the reflector 742, three openings BK1 to BK3 communicating from the front side to the back side are formed in a row in the vertical direction. Furthermore, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 30) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LEDs 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the LED 745 is configured so that when irradiating light, it does not interfere with light irradiated to other positions. Thereby, light can be irradiated to each of the positions No. 1 to No. 9 shown in FIG. 30. For example, by lighting all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate some of the symbols from behind among the symbols that are visible to the player. Note that the number and position of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 31 will be described in detail. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 3.

FIG. 34(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 34(a) includes a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a circular rotating part 190a that projects outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. and an instruction section 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are placed, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number from among 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values representing settings (setting values). That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output information on the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. If it points to "B", it means that the hexadecimal value of "B" has been selected, and information on that value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, selects the numerical value (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) selected by the first selection switch 190. The first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value indicated by the instruction unit 190b as the selected setting value.

Note that instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 34(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 34(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may also be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 34(b) has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a notch window 191b formed in this rotating part 191a. . Further, on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

This rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value visible through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 34(b), if the numerical value visible from the notch 191b is "F", the hexadecimal numerical value F has been selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into 4 bits of binary It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, selects a selected numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal 0 to The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any one of the numerical values of F.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 34(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b that has 16 contacts and is slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

This slide switch 192 selects the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the location of the numerical value "0", it means that the numerical value of 0 in hexadecimal notation is selected, and the information of that numerical value is converted into binary notation. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, selects a selected value (a value from 0 to F in hexadecimal notation) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any of the following.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when the power is not supplied. Even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be maintained. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the value to the value intended by the game parlor, for example. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow you to confirm the selected numerical value, it is easy to confirm the set value, and it is highly convenient.

FIG. 34(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 34(d) is composed of a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 34(a) is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by the player, this second selection switch 194 cannot be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided in a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. For example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined period of time, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. Good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 when any one of the buttons is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, detects which of the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is such that this is possible.

Note that instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 34(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and either one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, it cannot operate when it is not energized and cannot hold the selected value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set values. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 is configured so that the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, it may be configured so that it is backed up.

FIG. 34(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 29. A left button 167 and a right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 34(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display can be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons can be used for a continuous hit effect, and the other chance button can be used as a hidden button. It's okay. Here, a hidden button is one that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, a button that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, an operation suggestion display or an operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a built-in effect lamp does not illuminate). (at least one or both), when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 include the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error This is the volume value of the sound (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by a player, and is a switch used by a clerk at a game parlor when selecting a setting value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration performance is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration performance is a performance that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the game being restarted after one game ended. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, when a demonstration effect is started with the power saving mode selected, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . Furthermore, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be reduced by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. Additionally, in the non-power saving mode, you can also select mute.

FIG. 35(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 34(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 35(A) displays that the selection value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the words "mute". Furthermore, none of the seven levels of horizontal level display are lit. When muting is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

FIG. 35(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 34(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 35(B) displays the words "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 35(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 34(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 35(C) displays the characters "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 35(D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 34(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 35(D) displays characters indicating that the selected volume value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for presenting the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, a special volume may be selected that cannot be selected using the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected using the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined period of time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 34(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 35(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. Further, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the words "power saving mode", seven volume level selection values, and seven horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 35(a) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. There is. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 34(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 35(b) displays the text "Power saving mode" and the text "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. There is. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. Setting to power saving mode is selected. Note that even if it is selected to set the power saving mode, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, in order to be set to the power saving mode, it is necessary to be in the demo state. becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 34(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even if the demo state is entered. Further, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to a non-power saving mode (normal mode).

Note that the volumes output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 35(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 35(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 35(C) is the same. The volume output with the selected value is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 35(a).

FIG. 35A is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 displays a third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 35(A) displays the words "Volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. Further, in the five level display, only the first level at the bottom is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). When the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once, the level increases by one level, and when the left button 167 is pressed once, the level decreases by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 35(A), the level will not drop any further. That is, muting cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. Note that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 35(a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 35(a) displays the words "Volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 5. Furthermore, in the five-stage vertical level display, all of the first to fifth levels are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 is in seven levels, while the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 is in five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values for each of the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the fifth row is 91, the sixth row is 109, and the seventh row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, excluding the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage, the remaining stages are the 2nd to 6th stages. That is, the second stage (36) of seven stages is the first stage of five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of seven stages is the fifth stage of five stages. Therefore, only the clerk at the game parlor can select the setting value (18) for the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) for the seventh stage. In addition, the first stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the first stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage of the 7th stage (54) ) may be the first stage of five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of seven stages may be the fifth stage of five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be set to 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

While the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect image display device 157, press the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that had been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, in the same state, if you press the right button 167 instead of the left button 167 once, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then will be replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, A display appears indicating that the selected volume value is at the fourth level. These displays are displayed no matter what selection value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the left button 167 is pressed once, the selected value of 2/5 will be displayed. Further, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value of 4/5 will be displayed. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the previous selection value is discarded, the initial value of the volume level of 3/5 of the third volume selection icon SI3 is reselected, and the left button 167 or the right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and when the second selection switch 194 is operated, the value changed from the initial value is set as the first value. 3 Displayed as volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intentions can be prioritized. On the other hand, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed on the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection By operating the switch 190, a value that has been changed from the previously selected value is displayed as the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 36. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 controls a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 37) provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and a solenoid provided to the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 that drives, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor 180m (see FIG. 37) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal input possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a drive circuit 328 that drives the game start lamp 121, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Each component of the main control unit 300 described above is mounted on the main control unit board 300B (see FIG. 37).

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel A lamp 164, a bet button lamp 200, a backlight module 740, a first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor 163m of the shutter 163 (see FIG. 37). The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-control unit 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-control unit board 400B (see FIG. 37).

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-controller 500.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit, hopper unit, and production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 37 shows a power control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and a production movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. 30. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, and DC1 are also shown in each of the reel unit 700, hopper unit 180, and production movable body unit 160U.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 37 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 37 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 37 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a hopper motor drive IC 326i and a reel motor drive IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 36. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 36 is configured on the main control board 300B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 328, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that had been supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are each supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, so that the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B, which is connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 700 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 700. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 37 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 37 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. 36. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 36 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that were supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are each supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U is driven. It becomes possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 36, and although not shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are also electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may also be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 (power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up when the power is on. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, as shown in FIG. 38, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 37) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 37, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 37 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up, it is possible that there is an abnormality in the harness MR1 or that the connectors RC1 and MC2 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. I can do it. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 does not light up, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. I can do it.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, there are LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs, such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL. For example, even if it is an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in a power outage state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a different purpose than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3, viewed diagonally from above.

The hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 39(a) also includes a connector HC1 shown in FIG. 37. This hopper unit 180 includes a storage tank 181 for storing medals, and a disk-shaped hopper disk 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181. In FIG. 39(a), a portion of this hopper disk 182 is visible. The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passing holes 1821 at intervals in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole large enough to allow a medal, which is a game medium, to pass through. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by a motor 180m (see FIG. 37), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passing hole 1821.

FIG. 39(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 39(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passing holes 1821 can be seen. Even in a power outage state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction by inserting a finger into the medal passing hole 1821.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 180m (see FIG. 37) that rotates the hopper disk 182. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 37, the induced current generated in the motor 180m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MH, and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. On the other hand, if harness MH is disconnected or not properly connected to connector HC1 and/or connector MC1, no matter how much you manually rotate hopper disk 182, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 will light up. First, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible that there is an abnormality in the harness MH or that the connectors HC1 and MC1 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

The induced current generated in the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B, similar to the induced current generated in the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above, and normalizes. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the respective boards 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, in the same way as when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is also possible to check for electrical connection failures on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

Note that when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated in a power outage state, the monitor LED lights up brightly due to the increased number of manually rotated movable bodies. Become.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 29 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 37) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 37, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied from the movable motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and 5V power line, respectively. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 37 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, it may be due to an abnormality in the harness SD or a problem with the connectors DC1 and SC3. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

Furthermore, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 37 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 37. Hereinafter, points different from the connection example explained using FIG. 37 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In this FIG. 40, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 40, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700. has been done.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided. Even in the connection example shown in FIG. 40, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Furthermore, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in a power outage state, if it is normal, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the monitors such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML The LED does not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 40, by providing the hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that a connection failure will occur. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

Note that the hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. A defective electrical connection can be confirmed by generating an induced current by manual operation in a power-off state, and by lighting up these monitor LEDs if normal.

In the explanation here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182, and the shutter 163 are used as movable bodies, but the explanation is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, points different from the internal configuration explained using FIG. 3 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted. Furthermore, the same reference numerals used up to now may be used for components having the same names as those described above.

FIG. 41(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is opened to 180 degrees with respect to the main body 101. As a result, both the inside of the main body 101 and the inside of the front door 102 face forward (towards the front in the paper of FIG. 41).

A reel unit 700 is attached to the vertical center portion of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 41(a). A main control board storage case 210 is arranged above the reel unit 700. The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has light-transmitting properties. The main control board 300B is housed in the main control board storage case 210. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 37, and the main control board 300B shown in FIG. LED5ML is shown. Furthermore, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41(a) is also equipped with an LED 3ML for error monitoring and a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292, which are operation means. That is, these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML), which are light emitting means, and the setting key switch 281 and setting change button 292, which are operation means, are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). Further, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. Further, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with an opening or a notch so that these operating means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41(a) has identification marks for each circuit component (board component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, etc. is displayed. Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 41(a), "LED1" is displayed below the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and "LED2" is displayed below the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML. "LED3" is displayed under the error monitoring LED3ML, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. Displayed. These displays are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210. Note that instead of displaying "LED1", "24V monitor LED" may be displayed, and instead of "setting key SW", "SW1" may be displayed. That is, the name or abbreviation of each component may be displayed, or an identification number or identification symbol may be displayed. Furthermore, a sticker 210S on which the management number of the stored board is printed is affixed to the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210. Although this seal 210S is non-transparent, it may be transparent or translucent. Alternatively, it may be a sticker with a stamped seal or handwritten sign. Alternatively, the display may be printed directly on the main control board storage case 210 instead of a sticker.

A power supply device 252 and a hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700. The power supply device 252 includes a power control board 252B having the same configuration as the power control board 252B shown in FIG. 37. The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 41(a) is housed in a transparent or semi-transparent resin case. In FIG. 41(a), a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and a power switch 244 are shown. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) which are light emitting means and the power switch 244 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (power control board 252B). Further, the light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power supply control board 252B also passes through the transparent or semi-transparent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. Further, the case of the power supply device 252 is also provided with an opening or a notch so that the power switch 244 can be accessed. Further, the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 41(a) also displays an identification display for each circuit component (board component), similarly to the main control board 300B. Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in Figure 41(a), "LED7" is displayed below the power control 24V monitor LED24PL, and "LED8" is displayed below the power control 5V monitor LED5PL. "Power SW" is displayed below the power switch 244. These displays are visible through the transparent or translucent case. Note that the case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LED as the light emitting means and the switch as the operating means are provided on the surface of the metal case, and the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the operating means can be operated. An identification mark is also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The main control board 300B, sub-control board 400B', and power supply device 252 may be located above or below movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 is arranged on the left side plate 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control board storage case 220 is 220' is arranged at the top of the front door 102. That is, it is arranged on the back side of the production device 160. The sub-control unit storage case 220' is also a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has translucency. A sub-control board 400B' is housed in this sub-control board storage case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is an effect control board that combines the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 37 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 36, but it is composed of only the first sub-control board 400B. Alternatively, the configuration may include only the control board of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 41(a) shows a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 41(a) also includes a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL that monitors the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 and a first selection switch 190 that is an operating means. Implemented. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) which are light emitting means and the first selection switch 190 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (sub control board 400B'). In addition, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs is confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. be able to. Further, the sub-control board storage case 220' is also provided with an opening or a notch so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 41(a) also displays an identification display for each circuit component (board component), similarly to the main control board 300B. Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 41(a), "LED4" is displayed below the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, and "LED5" is displayed below the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL. "LED6" is displayed below the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed below the first selection switch 190. Further, in the lower right corner of the sub-control board 400B', an indication 4001 of "board management number 0002" printed in two stages on the resist layer of the board is displayed. The identification display for each circuit component and the "board management number 0002" display 4001 are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220'.

FIG. 41(b) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H1 in a standing position, and FIG. 41(c) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in a sitting position. be.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views has the front door 102 opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101; 102 shows the front side. In addition, the people H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors and gaming parlors who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700. A person such as a store clerk is located directly in front of the main body 101.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the field of vision V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees is from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the LEDs such as LED 3ML for error monitoring mounted on the main control board 300B that emit light as a result can be seen at the same time, or the line of sight can be moved slightly upwards. It is only visible.

As shown in FIG. 41(c), the visual range V2 of the person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees is the range from the reel unit 700 to the power supply device 252 located below. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the LEDs, such as the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the power supply device 252, which emit light as a result, can be seen at the same time, or can be seen by simply moving the line of sight up and down a little. It is. In addition, the power supply device 252 and the hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 41(a)) placed next to it are also included in the viewing range V2, and the hopper disk 182 (see FIG. 39) operated by hand and the power source that emits light as a result. Each LED such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the device 252 can be visually recognized at the same time, or by simply moving the line of sight slightly from side to side.

Note that in FIGS. 41(b) and 41(c), the main control board 300B is schematically shown for easy understanding, so the front surface 300f (the surface on the person H1, H2 side) of the main control board 300B is the same as the reel unit 700. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 14(a) described later, the front surface 300f of the main control board 300B is located on the rear side (inner side) of the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. be. That is, the movable body unit protrudes more toward the person who operates the movable body by hand than the light emitting means. Therefore, from below the main control board 300B, the reel unit 700 becomes an obstacle and it is difficult to see the main control board 300B.

FIG. 42 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. That is, this FIG. 42 is a view of the slot machine of the second embodiment viewed from above, with the lower side of the figure being the front side and the upper side being the rear side.

FIG. 42(a) shows the front door 102 in a completely closed state, and FIG. 42(b) shows the front door 102 in a completely closed state. The door 102 is shown opened 90 degrees.

The main control board storage case 210 in which the main control board 300B is housed, and the reel unit 700 are shown in the main body 101 in FIG. 42(a). Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281 are shown on the main control board 300B. Also shown is a sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board storage case 210.

The front door 102 in FIG. 42(a) shows a sub-control board storage case 220' in which a sub-control board 400B' is housed. Three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190 are shown on the sub-control board 400B'.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, there is no light-emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emits light by manually operating movable bodies such as the reels 110 to 112 and the hopper disk 182. It is not visible from the exterior of 100.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 42(b) with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees, the range where light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches due to the back electromotive force is schematically shown in gray. Note that the way in which the range of light reaches here is shown with emphasis on the directivity of the LED, and in reality, the closer the light is to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range will be illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 that is opened 90 degrees. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', and the first selection switch 190 can be operated even in a dark place. In addition, the light reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 42(b)), making it possible to visually recognize the circuit components even in a dark place. . Furthermore, it becomes possible to visually recognize the identification display displayed for each circuit component. Furthermore, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches the display 4001 of "board management number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to confirm the board management number even in a dark place. In addition, although the seal 210S explained using FIG. You can now check what is displayed on the screen. Note that if the seal 210S is translucent, it will be easier to confirm. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and if a sticker is affixed to that part, the content displayed on the sticker is You can also check.

Although FIG. 42(b) schematically shows only the range where light reaches from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to back electromotive force, light due to back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, and the sub control board Most of the storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' can be seen even in a dark place.

As explained above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is emitted from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML). It reaches the sub-control board 400B', which is a board different from the board on which the 3ML) is mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that accommodates the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, but may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer the angle is to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for light to reach. On the other hand, light due to the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B' reaches the main control board storage case 210 and the main control board 300B.

Note that most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are exposed to light due to back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. , making it visible even in dark places. Furthermore, most of the main control board storage case 210 and most of the main control board 300B are illuminated by back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B, making it dark. It can be seen anywhere.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 37. Hereinafter, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 37 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals used up to now are used for components having the same names as those described above.

In a modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 43, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 that protect the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 37 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 that protect the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Further, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in FIG. 37 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. Further, the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 37 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT10. The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 using large-capacity capacitors can absorb the amount of charge of surge power, and can prevent circuit breakdown due to surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 also absorb the amount of charge of the back electromotive force, and no current due to the back electromotive force flows. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are operated manually, if these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are functioning, none of the LEDs will emit light. On the other hand, if some of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are damaged, the damaged protection circuit will not be able to absorb the charge of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force will flow. , a light-emitting LED will appear. Therefore, depending on which LED lights up when the disc 182 or reels 110 to 112 are operated by hand, it may be possible to locate the protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 that are suspected of being damaged.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 44(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. Furthermore, the protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 44(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 44(b), the protection circuit PT21 is connected between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power line in parallel with another element (in this figure, it is a resistor, but it may also be a coil, etc.). with connected diodes. Furthermore, the protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 44(b) is connected in parallel with another element (in this figure, it is a resistor, but it may be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. It has a diode.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, surge current that would otherwise flow in the opposite direction can be prevented from flowing through the rectification action of the diode.

The current caused by the back electromotive force generated when moving a movable body such as the reel 110 by hand also stops flowing due to the rectification effect of the diodes adopted in the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML does not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, they will be in an insulated state, so no current will flow in either direction, and no current due to back electromotive force will flow, so the reel Even if the movable body such as 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not emit light, but if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, they will be in an insulated state. A current flows through other elements connected in parallel, and a current due to the back electromotive force also flows, and when a movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML may emit light. be. Therefore, unless the capacitor is used together with the protection circuit PT3 having a large capacity (the main control board 300B shown in FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b) has the same When the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML emits light by manually operating a movable body such as the control 24V capacitor 24MC), the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22 It is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12 are damaged or disconnected, and that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above description also applies to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34, and examples of the movable body include a sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under control from the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 34), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a power-off state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 34) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are lit by this induced current if normal. do. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, the induced current that has flowed into the main control board 156P flows through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 34) to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 34), so that it is not normal. If so, the LEDs provided on the respective boards 182P and 160P are turned on. Further, as movable bodies, there may be a production movable body (for example, a croon) driven by a motor whose rotation is controlled by the main control unit, and two movable parts driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-control unit. It may be a performance movable body or the like.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, Sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML, second sub control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED , 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], a motor [e.g., motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.], and a movable body that can be operated by the drive of the motor [e.g., hopper disk 182 , left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.]; , a game machine comprising a removable harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness SD] that relays the board and the movable body unit, wherein the motor and the light emitting means connect the harness to the harness. The substrate is provided with impedance adjustment means [for example, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] between the light emitting means and the ground. The impedance adjusting means adjusts the impedance so that the light emitting means emits light by an induced current generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state. On the other hand, the impedance is adjusted so as to regulate the flow of induced current in the energized state, and the light emitting means drives the motor by manually operating the movable body in the energized state. Light may be emitted when a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force flows into the device.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness,
It is characterized by ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
`` Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising: the movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness);
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even in a power-off state.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, check whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light. This can be confirmed even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable unit is installed on the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the power outage state may be a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not supplied from the island equipment.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [for example, the reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [for example, the hopper unit 180], or a performance operation unit [for example, the performance movable body unit 160U] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 37 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 39) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, the game machine checks whether the harness is connected normally or whether the harness is disconnected. This can be confirmed even when the power is off.

Note that the board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control board 300B, 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control board 400B, 160P or second sub-control board 300B, 156P]. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, hopper relay board 901B, reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable body unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, and a plurality of harnesses MR11 and harness MR12 in series]. Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the light emitting means is energized or not. That is, in a power-on state, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, signal monitor), and in a power-off state, it can be used for checking electrical connections.

Also,
``The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means emits light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as " In the first case, the light emission continues even if the motor stops driving [for example, the light emission is caused by the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC. the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is properly connected, and furthermore, the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move). This makes the light emitting means easier to see. In addition, the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force no longer flows in, and the light-emitting means may continue to emit light even if the current due to the back electromotive force ceases to flow in. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed after the operation.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness,
It is characterized by ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"); There are cases where the light continues to emit even if the motor stops driving [for example, the light continues to emit due to the charge stored in the capacitor],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, it is possible to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means even if you stop manually operating the movable body, and it becomes easier to confirm the light emission of the light emitting means. .

Also,
``A capacitor that can store the electric charge generated by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by being equipped with a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC. ”
Also explained.

By using a common electronic component called a capacitor, it is possible to easily confirm the light emission of the light emitting means.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is
A game machine comprising a removable harness (for example, the various harnesses shown in FIG. 37 and the various harnesses shown in FIG. 39) that relay the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected normally, and by manually operating the third movable body. When operated, it is possible to check whether the third harness is properly connected, and it is possible to check the connections of the two types of harnesses separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, one common harness including three harnesses MR1 to MR3]. ,
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness,
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, whether the first movable body is manually operated or the third movable body is operated, it is possible to confirm whether the harness is properly connected. Moreover, the connection of one common type of harness can be confirmed by operating the movable body that is easier to manually operate between the first movable body and the third movable body. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body and driving the first motor in a power-off state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body and driving the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

After installing the movable body unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally by checking whether or not the common light emitting means is emitting light. You can check even if the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, even when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the movable body unit may include a fourth movable body (for example, the middle reel 111) that can be operated by driving a fourth motor (for example, the motor 111m).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a removable harness [for example, harness MR1, harnesses MR1 to MR3, or harness MR11 and harness MR12, or harnesses MR11 to MR31 and harnesses MR12 to 32] that relays the board and the first motor. Game console. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether the first harness is connected normally or the second harness is also connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed whether the first harness is disconnected or whether the second harness is disconnected.

Note that a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11, and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor The embodiment may include a harness [for example, a harness MR3, a harness MR31, and a harness MR32].

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the first movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the third movable body.

Also,
``Constructed so that the light emitting means emits light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light-emitting means is configured to emit light even by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
a first movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [for example, hopper disk 182] operable by the drive of a second motor [for example, motor 180m];
A game machine comprising:
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [for example, motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [for example, harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. This may cause it to emit light,
The light emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the power-off state to drive the second motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows into the light emitting means. It may also emit light by
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the movable body of the first movable body unit (the first movable body), it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected normally. By operating the movable body of the second movable body unit (the second movable body), it is possible to check whether the second harness is properly connected. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The first harness includes a first motor side harness [for example, harness MR12] and a first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11],
The certain board is electrically connected to the first motor [for example, motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [for example, harness MR12],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor side harness [for example, harness MH2] and a second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1],
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the second light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1]. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
a first movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [for example, hopper disk 182] operable by the drive of a second motor [for example, motor 180m];
A game machine comprising:
The first movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via harness MH),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body and driving the first motor in a power-off state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body and driving the second motor in a power-off state.
A game machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emitting device is used to check whether each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emitted from the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when each movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As explained above, it has the special effect of making it easier to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P, relay board (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] It is
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after installing each movable body unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is determined whether the first harness is connected normally or the second harness is also connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed whether the first harness is disconnected or whether the second harness is disconnected.

Also,
``The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when conditions are met],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the first movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the second movable body is stopped in the energized state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the second movable body.

Also,
``The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a power-off state. is,
The light-emitting means is configured to emit light also by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body and driving the second motor in a power-off state. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means, and to check whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally. This makes it easier to check whether or not they are electrically connected properly.

According to the above description,
``First light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a signal monitoring LED, a 7-segment display, a set value display, etc.];
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] A movable body unit having a movable body [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor and receiving a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor. The second light emitting means also operates the movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to check whether the common harness is connected normally by manually operating the common movable body using both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or malfunctioning, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), these light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

Also,
``Equipped with a certain board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
The harness includes a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32]. can be,
The certain board is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31]. and
The certain board is electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED5ML] and the light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With the increase in the number of certain boards, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection defects increases; however, electrical connection defects can be easily confirmed by manual operation in a power-off state. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
``First light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.] and
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a signal monitoring LED, a 7-segment display, a set value display, etc.];
It can be operated by driving a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] A movable body unit having a movable body [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness),
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when the power is off.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game machine for cleaning or maintenance, check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally or not by checking whether or not the plurality of light emitting means emit light. You can check even if the game machine is out of power. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually check the gaming machine even without a light projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable unit is installed on the game machine at the factory, it is necessary to check whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected properly even if the game machine is in a power-off state. I can do it. As explained above, it has a special effect of making it easier to confirm whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally.

Note that the first light emitting means is connected to a power line with a first voltage [e.g. 24V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line with a second voltage [e.g. 5V]. It may be connected to. Further, the first light emitting means is provided on a first board [for example, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B]. It may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp, and the second light emitting means may be a 7 segment display.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control board 300B, 156P, first sub-control board 400B, 160P, power supply control board 252B, 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine characterized by comprising a removable harness (for example, a harness to which both 24V and 5V power is supplied) that relays the board and the movable body unit. ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this game machine, when the plurality of light emitting means emit light, the surroundings of the board can be easily visually confirmed without the use of a light projecting means.

Also,
“The first light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [e.g., main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a different substrate from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first board and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check whether the movable body unit and the first board, and the first board and the second board are electrically connected normally.

Also,
“The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, constantly emitting light or periodically emitting light, or emitting light when a condition is met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light when energized [e.g., constantly emitting light, emitting light periodically, emitting light when a condition is satisfied],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether they are in the energized state or the power-off state. That is, in a power-on state, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, signal monitor), and in a power-off state, it can be used for checking electrical connections.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is one that can emit light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in the energized state [for example, a current monitoring LED, a voltage monitoring LED, an error monitoring LED, etc.]. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
``The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current (e.g., induced current) generated by a back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained. According to this game machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply allowing the current to flow through each of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. becomes easier to do.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
A second light emitting means [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL] provided on the second board [for example, power control board 252B],
Motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and movable bodies that can be operated by driving the motors [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprocket, croon, etc.] [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.];
A game machine comprising:
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first board;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
Equipped with
The motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness,
The motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first board, and the second harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
The second light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"A first light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] having a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m];
A game machine comprising:
A relay board [for example, hopper relay board 901B],
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33] that relays the movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180] and the relay board;
a detachable second harness that relays the relay board and the first board [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31];
Equipped with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board, and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body and driving the motor in a power-off state;
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for 2nd sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit having a croon, etc.];
A door body [for example, front door 102],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
When the door body is closed, the light emitting means is not visible [for example, FIG. 42(a)],
When the door body is opened, the light emitting means and the movable body are visible [for example, FIGS. 42(b) and 42(c)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means and the operation means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 41, the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 41] is,
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for 2nd sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is invisible from the exterior of the game machine [for example, FIG. 42(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since an unauthorized person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, he or she may use the light emitting means to confirm that power is not being properly supplied from the power source and attempt to attach an unauthorized device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41(b)]. machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Furthermore, the movable body unit may protrude further toward a person who manually operates the movable body than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position where it can be seen by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing position.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for 2nd sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit [for example, the reel unit 700] [for example, the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 41(c)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body by hand while sitting.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the performance of the game [for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a performance control board],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The sub-control board may perform control based on commands transmitted from the main control board (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from outside the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power-off state may be a state in which power cannot be received from outside the game machine (commercial power supply) (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.] and a motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc. ] A movable body unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit, etc.] having a movable body [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, croon, etc.] that can be operated by driving 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain printed display [for example, a display 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 41, a sticker 210S printed with "board number 0001" attached to the main control board storage case 210 ]and,
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain print display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. 42(b) When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101 as shown in , light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches].
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

In other words, the position where the light from the light emitting means reaches may be a position illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or a position within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. However, it may also be a position that becomes visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light (the same applies hereinafter).

The certain printed display is, for example, a display (for example, a display by silk printing) regarding any of the board components such as a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (The same applies hereinafter).

Note that instead of a certain printed display, a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display) may be used.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LED5ML, etc., various IC322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] can reach [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 42(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The certain circuit component may be, for example, a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (the same applies hereinafter).

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A certain board case [for example, main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, 220', case of power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] emits light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board that it houses, as shown in FIG. 42(b). , when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the LED 24ML provided on the main control board 300B stored in the main control board storage case 210 located at a 90-degree positional relationship reaches the main control board 300B. A game machine characterized in that it is installed at a location [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The certain board case may display management information such as a management number of the board. For example, a sticker with management information printed thereon, a seal with management information written thereon, a seal stamped, etc. (for example, "board number 0001" affixed to the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 41) is displayed. (hereinafter the same applies).

The certain board case may be the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage case 220, the first sub board case 162P, or the second sub board case. It may be the case 165P, the payout board case 172P, the ejection board case 176P, or the power supply board case 184P (the same applies hereinafter).

The certain board case may be a light-transmitting case (for example, a transparent resin case) or a non-light-transmitting case (for example, a metal case (case of a power supply device)). Good (hereinafter the same).

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] [for example, harness PM supplied via ],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

That is, it includes a power supply device [for example, the power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage, and the current converted to the predetermined voltage in the power supply device is supplied to the harness [for example, the harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML]. According to this aspect, when the power is cut off, it is possible to manually drive the motor and check whether the harness is connected by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light, and when the power is on, the power from the power supply can be checked by checking whether or not the light emitting means emits light. It is possible to check whether the harness is being supplied normally or not, separately from whether or not the harness is connected.

Further, the movable unit [for example, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] is removable from the game machine with the connector of the harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. Good too. When inspecting or cleaning the movable body unit, the harness connector is unplugged before removal, so it is easy to have a bad harness connection or forget to connect it. You can easily check to see if you have forgotten to make a connection.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The motor [for example, motor 180m, 110m to 112m] is connected to the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and the first harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3]. electrically connected to the
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM],
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] does not disable the movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left Reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112] may be operated by hand to drive the motor, and a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor may flow into the reel, causing light to emit light. ,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is operated by hand to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current (for example, induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when driven by the motor,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [for example, reel unit 700],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to the description so far,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an LED provided on a certain board (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML)],
The second light emitting means [for example, a different LED provided on a certain board (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) or an LED provided on a different board from a certain board (sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5ML) monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light-emitting means emits light by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light-emitting means ( Hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
The second light emitting means also emits light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
Even if the drive of the motor is stopped in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [e.g. 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC may continue to emit light due to the charges stored in them.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The harness may be, for example, harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR1. Further, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR1, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED],
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light emitting means,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means;
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, different boards such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
A second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
Movable bodies [for example, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, production movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.],
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [for example, harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the first light emitting means,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light emitting means;
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24V and 5V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an LED provided on a certain board (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML)],
The second light emitting means [for example, a different LED provided on a certain board (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) or an LED provided on a different board from a certain board (sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5ML) monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. There is a case where light is emitted due to the inflow of light (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"),
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ) may emit light due to the inflow of light (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), and the second light emitting means is also activated by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state. In some cases, the third motor is driven and a current (e.g., induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in, causing light emission (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case"). It is a thing,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
Even if the first motor stops driving in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, there is a case where light emission is continued due to the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC.
Even if the third motor stops driving in the third case and the fourth case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, there are cases where light emission is continued due to the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC.
A game machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The first harness may be, for example, a harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, a motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR1. Further, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR1, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

The third harness may be, for example, a harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, a motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED5ML via the harness MR3. Further, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL via at least the harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL via the harness MR3, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the harness MR3, and the harness PM. and electrically connected via harness PS2. Therefore, here as well, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
The second light emitting means [e.g., sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED], and the first motor [e.g. A game machine comprising a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a motor 110m],
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different boards [for example, different boards such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
A second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the first motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and generates a current [for example, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow of
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the first light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the second light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24V and 5V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A door body [for example, front door 102],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
When the door body is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 42(a)],
When the door body is opened, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body are visible [for example, FIG. 42(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
Operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operation means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 41, the power control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 41] is,
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where light from the light emitting means can reach. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operating means may be operable by relying on light from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place when the light emitting means emits light. good.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is invisible from the exterior of the game machine [for example, FIG. 42(a)],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since an unauthorized person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, he or she may use the light emitting means to confirm that power is not being properly supplied from the power source and attempt to attach an unauthorized device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
A game characterized in that the light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 41(b)]. machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. Furthermore, the movable body unit may protrude further toward a person who manually operates the movable body than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position where it can be seen by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing position.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit [for example, the reel unit 700] [for example, the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 41(c)],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

The movable body unit may be a reel unit.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body by hand while sitting. According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor and receiving current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It is something that is
The light emitting means emits light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the performance of the game [for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a performance control board],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A certain printed display [for example, a display 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 41, a sticker 210S printed with "board number 0001" attached to the main control board storage case 210 ]and,
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain print display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means can reach [For example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', as shown in FIG. When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 42(b)).
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

Note that instead of a certain printed display, a certain display (for example, a stamped display or a handwritten display) may be used.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
Certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LED5ML, etc., various IC322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] can reach [for example, the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 42(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
A certain board case [for example, main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, 220', case of power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It is something that is
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the third movable body in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current flowing therein due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. There is a
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The certain board case receives light from the light emitting means [for example, light from an LED provided on the board housed in the board case], as well as light from the front door 102 at 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 42(b). When the main control board 300B is housed in the main control board storage case 210 which is in a 90 degree positional relationship when the main control board 300B is opened, the light from the LED 24ML can reach the main control board storage case 210.
A gaming machine characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the first harness [for example, harness MR1] [for example, through harness PM]. supplied],
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without going through the third harness [e.g., harness MR3] [e.g., through harness PM]. supplied],
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m];
a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252];
A game machine comprising:
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [for example, harness PM], and the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] Even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [for example, harness PM], the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor to eliminate the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light due to the inflow of electric current (e.g. induced current),
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually to drive the third motor even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [for example, harness PM]. It may emit light due to the flow of current (e.g., induced current) due to the generated back electromotive force,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34]. ”
Also explained.

According to the description so far,
``Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED3ML for second sub-control voltage monitoring, LED6SL for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.],
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit [for example, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [for example, left reel 110] that can be operated by driving a first motor [for example, motor 110m]; ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [for example, right reel 112] that can be operated by driving a third motor [for example, motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means operates the first movable body manually in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light due to
The light emitting means operates the third movable body manually in the power-off state to drive the third motor, and a current [for example, induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and the light emitting means does not move even when the third motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [for example, reel unit 700],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 45 to 79. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 45 to 79 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 45 to 79, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 79, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 45 to 79.

FIG. 45 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain specifically using FIG. 46, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45 is equipped with three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been displayed (the line on which the winning determination is made), and when the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination stops on this active line, It will be judged as a prize winner. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

FIG. 46 shows a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special winning combinations 1 (BB1), special winning combinations 2 (BB2), replay winning combinations 1 to 3, and small winning combinations 1 to 7 (for example, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special gaming state to be described later. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 47(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 47) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 47) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. By operating the first selection switch 190, you can change the volume of the sound output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) or enter the power saving mode. Can be set. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing games for a predetermined period of time. , a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine ("payout rate"), etc. is included. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, in six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the on state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detect off state.

Like the first selection switch 190 described above, the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101, so that it can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket 181) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power control board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on a power control board. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a return passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. This medal selector 170 will be further described later. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 47(b). Like the setting key switch 281 and the like, the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset. Furthermore, by pressing and holding down the reset switch 291 (long-term pressing), the RAM of the main control section can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display representing the gaming mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

In addition, although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. Further, the setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170.

FIG. 48 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45. Further, in FIG. 48, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 47 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in a medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 48 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in the protruding state and pass through the return passage 266. The medals are discharged from the medal payout port 155. On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is in a state where it is retracted from inside the medal passage 171, the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. Projection of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and retraction from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an activation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) so as to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, if the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b. FIG. 49(a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, the default setting values may be changed immediately after shipping from the factory, after clearing the RAM including the storage area for storing setting values (RAM of the main control unit), or if the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area for storing setting values is lost. Setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the setting value, and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits is higher in setting 2 than setting 1, higher in setting 4 than setting 2, higher in setting 5 than setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player to earn profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is a setting that is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's ability to earn profits. In other words, setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player to earn profits. This setting b has a difference of only one segment from setting 6 in the 7-segment LED display, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If an unauthorized person performs an unauthorized operation thinking that the last setting displayed is the most advantageous setting, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person mistakes the setting as setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the fraudster can be disadvantaged.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated in the order of 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2, etc. by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" that is displayed first may be in any order. For example, the display on the setting value display 293 is 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2... may be updated.

FIG. 49(b) is a table summarizing the differences in performance for each setting value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called ball payout rate), performance B is the special winning (BB) first hit probability, performance C is the AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is the AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT acquisitions, performance F is the probability of small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications that suggest setting values (setting suggestion notifications), and performance H is setting suggestions as confirmed notifications. This is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications. Performances A to F correspond to performances that represent the degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits, and as described above, they have the relationship of setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. .

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, bass speaker 277, etc. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification mentioned here includes notifications such as simply turning off a lamp or outputting a warning sound, as well as setting suggestion effects such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. It will be done. Further, even if a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting-related presentation, setting-related notification). Furthermore, although a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification) is also included. When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of the demonstration animation (demo animation) on the effect image display device 157, and when setting values other than setting b are set, the demo animation is turned off. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light up at the start of the process. The demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any medal insertion (bet operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (power is turned on) with no bet operations being performed at the time of a power outage, the demo animation will start, but if a setting change is started, the demo animation will start after the setting change is finished. is started. Further, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in a state where setting b is set. On the other hand, in a state where a setting value other than setting b is set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where setting b is set, setting b confirmation notification may be performed once every predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). Note that in a state where setting b is set, setting suggestion notification indicating that setting b may be not performed may be performed, and only setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when setting b is set, the notification mode may include content that suggests that the player is at a disadvantage (for example, text display or audio output such as "A tough battle continues"). . The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) explained above is when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. The setting values other than setting b are almost the same.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is suggested as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmed notification that does not suggest settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and settings other than setting b are In a state where the setting value is set, a setting suggestion notification may also be made that suggests a setting value other than the set value. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd number confirmation notification is sent to notify that the odd setting value is confirmed, and when setting 2 is set, an even number setting value is set. An example of this is an even number confirmation notification that indicates that the current status is confirmed. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification that indicates that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, or a setting 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. There are also settings 2 or more confirmation notification that informs that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more has been set, and setting 5 or more confirmation notification that notifies that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more is set. Note that in a state where setting 6 is set, an effect of notifying only setting 6 as setting suggestion notification (setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) explained above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set. the next highest (e.g., 50%), and the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, and 5) have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%), which is lower than the state with setting 6. %).

FIGS. 49(c) to 49(f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157, which may be performed at the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle effect, the end of BB, or the end of AT. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting suggestion notification and setting confirmation notification. The setting-related notification here is a type of notification effect.

FIG. 49(c) is a diagram showing an example of even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 49(c), the words ``may be set to even number'' are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "may be even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting). Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may be performed even when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). It's okay. In this case, the setting value may be notified more easily when the setting value is an even number setting than when the setting value is an odd number setting.

FIG. 49(d) is a diagram showing an example of setting 5 or more suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 49(d), the words "I want to eat five or more pieces of sugar cane" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This text display, "I want to eat 5 or more pieces of sugar cane," suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is 5 or 6. Note that this setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may be performed also when the setting value is 4 or less. In this case, notification may be made easier when the setting value is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or less. Note that when the setting value is 4 or less, setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 49(e) is a diagram showing an example of setting 2 or more confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 49(e), first of all, the words "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The words ``Ah, business sorting'' itself corresponds to an announcement that suggests setting 2 or higher. Thereafter, the aunt's character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. For the old woman's character BBA, the words ``Does it have to be 1, or can it be 2 or more?'' are displayed as lines for sorting the business. The notification using this line denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the setting 2 or more confirmation notification may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed also when the setting is 1. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the aunt character BBA may not appear.

FIG. 49(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 49(f), first of all, the words ``Ah, God's message'' are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The words ``Ah, God's announcement'' itself corresponds to an announcement that suggests setting b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and a message is issued. God's character KGG displays the words ``A tough battle will continue'' as a warning. This notification is a notification that confirms setting b. Note that setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed for other setting values. However, in the case of setting values other than setting b, the panda character PND and the words ``Ah, God's announcement'' may be displayed, and the God character KGG may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given on the assumption that setting suggestion notifications include setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting confirmation effects, but setting suggestion notifications may also be read as setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting suggestion effects. It may also be read as a confirmed performance.

In addition, the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed as a number, which can be used to check the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting confirmation process that allows checking the set value is executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value change process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes from 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ・. . , and the desired game mode can be selected. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

Note that the period of setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first turning of the setting key clockwise to the last turning of the setting key counterclockwise in the setting value changing operation is also called set value change mode, and is called setting value confirmation operation. The period , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the set value confirmation mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode, which were explained in detail using FIG. 3, may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 50. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section including the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the performance of the game.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives a motor provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 that sorts inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121 , a storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 47) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418. An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed on this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected. There is.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 51 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 53.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control. In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

Next, details of the main control section initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process of FIG. 51 will be explained using FIG. 53. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 47 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 47 is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and this main control unit initialization process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the setting value is deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the power is momentarily cut off (the voltage temporarily drops below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 52). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both judgments are normal, the recovery data in the RAM 308 is It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing immediately before the power is cut off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the state shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch 281 is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that details of this setting change process will be described later using FIG. 54.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 53 will be described using FIG. 54. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process advances to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparations are made to transmit a setting change command indicating that a setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 of FIG. 52), and the process advances to step S1105. As a result, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to changing settings, and the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. Through this process, a temporary setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293. After that, the process advances to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1111; otherwise, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1111, the temporary setting value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the temporary setting values are updated one by one according to the display order explained using FIG. When is operated, the temporary setting value is set to 1. After this, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1115; otherwise, the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of determining the temporary setting value as a setting value is executed, and the process advances to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135. When the set value is determined, a display indicating that the set value is determined (in this case, the number 0) is displayed on the set value display 293. Note that once the set value is determined, the set value display 293 may continue to display the determined set value, may be switched to a blinking display, or may be non-displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 52) is executed. As a result, the display of the setting change in progress display on the effect image display device 157 ends. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before being changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Note that in the termination condition of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 54, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the termination condition is that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may also be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 55. Note that FIG. 55(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 55(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 55(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of input/output ports, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively. Note that the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Furthermore, if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 55(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 55(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 55(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 56. Note that FIG. 56(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 56(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 56(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 56(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 56(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initial settings, various variables stored in the RAM 508, etc. are initialized. Note that if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 56(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 56(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 56(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 56(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 56(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, a setting change in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45 will be explained. The setting change process is started by inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 47 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

FIG. 57 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by setting change and the states of related components. In FIG. 57, each stage is numbered from (a) to (b), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 57, component items include power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left The following items are shown: a side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R (top side lamp), an upper speaker 272, and a bass speaker 277 (speaker). Further, FIG. 58 schematically shows the setting value display 293, the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R, and the speakers (272, 277). has been done.

In FIG. 57(A), the power switch 244 is in an off state and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit, and the set values are not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Figure 30
In 05(A) and (B), various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown as unlit in white without any pattern (the same applies below).

In FIG. 57(a), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key is rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 57(c), the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. In FIG. 58(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by hatching downward to the left (the same applies below). Further, as described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. . When the setting change process is started, RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 54), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Further, when the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice notification (“Settings are being changed”) will now be output.

In FIG. 57(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "2" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 57(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and "4" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 57(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "5" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 57(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in the same figure (h), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more. When pressed, "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 58 (g) and the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. An unauthorized person attempting to change the number may mistake the display of "b" for the display of "6".

In FIG. 57(e), the start lever 135 is operated and the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 54), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, setting b is determined. Note that when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Further, the setting value may not be determined by operating the start lever 135, but may be determined by turning the setting key switch 281 into the OFF state.

In FIG. 57(C), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 54), and seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and become non-displayed. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the display of the demo animation will start immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, the setting change process will be delayed. will start after it has finished. In this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. Alternatively, the demo animation display was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the settings changing display overlapped and could not be seen, and even if it became visible from the scene at the time the settings changing display disappeared. good. Furthermore, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 58(C), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a demo pattern is represented by square hatching (the same applies below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit while the settings are being changed, but turns off when the settings are changed, and remains off until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . Turning off the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player). Furthermore, since the title panel lamp 164 remains lit during normal times, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be interpreted as notification of an abnormality (notification regarding a set value abnormality).

In FIG. 57(sa), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 57(b), medals are inserted. That is, the medals are taken care of or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, from the speaker (272,277),
A medal insertion sound is output, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern). In FIG. 58(b), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a normal pattern is represented by cross hatching (the same applies below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also starts to turn on. The title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, it may continue to turn off when medals are inserted, and it may start to light up when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or the title panel lamp 164 may start to turn on when the front door 102 is closed, or may continue to turn off when a medal is inserted, and start turning on when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or when the first It may start to turn on at the third stop of the game, or it may start to turn on when the payout of the first game is completed.

FIG. 59(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 59(a), each stage is numbered from (ta) to (nu), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 60 schematically shows the state of the components at each stage from (ta) to (nu) in FIG. 59(a).

In FIG. 59(a), the same items as in FIG. 57 are shown as component items, and in FIG. 60(a), each component is schematically shown as in FIG. 58.

FIG. 59(T) may be a continuation from FIG. 57(C), and the game has already started with setting b set. That is, there is a case where the game is started while ignoring the notification due to the title panel lamp 164 being turned off. In FIG. 59(T), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 59(H), a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) elapses after the third stop is performed without medals being inserted. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the demonstration animation starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is restored. Note that the title panel lamp 164 may be turned off and setting-related notifications may be started not only when a demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 but also when a demonstration effect is started or when a demonstration state is entered. .

In FIG. 59(T), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 60(T), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a door opening pattern is represented by hatching downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross hatching in FIG. 58(b). With the front door 102 opened, there is a possibility that settings will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. The speakers (272, 277) start outputting the voice "The door is open." Note that although the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the characters "door opening" may be displayed together with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 59(Te), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed without any setting change after the front door 102 was opened. To change settings, the setting key switch 281 must be turned on while the power switch 244 is off, so the power switch 244 must be turned off before a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again, and setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the settings. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are changed from the door opening pattern lighting to match the demonstration animation display on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is ended, and the lighting pattern returns to the demo pattern.

In FIG. 59(g), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to be lit in a demo pattern. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be made.

In FIG. 59(N), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG. 59(T) described above.

In FIG. 59(2), the front door 102 is closed again one second after the front door 102 is opened in FIG. 59(na). The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from the voice saying "The door is open" to the voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to illuminate in the door open pattern for the predetermined time period after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started until the predetermined time has elapsed after the front door 102 is opened. Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 59(N), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 in FIG. 59(N) was opened. As a result, a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any settings being changed, the title panel lamp 164 turns off, and setting-related notifications are started. . Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from door opening pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. It can be considered that the setting-related notification is started by turning off the lamp 164, and if the medal is inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 59(a) described above, when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 turns off (FIG. 59(h)), but other The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off depending on the conditions, for example, if the player enters a non-recommended gaming state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, if the player does not follow a specific push order navigation The title panel lamp may also be turned off (after releasing the third stop button). In the non-recommended gaming state, no lottery including the AT lottery is held, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or decreases slightly, but the non-recommended gaming state continues until the predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state where you can increase the number of medals. When entering a non-recommended gaming state, a suggestive display indicating that the non-recommended gaming state is entered may be performed on the effect image display device 157. (from the time the penalty bonus ends) may be displayed continuously. Furthermore, in the non-recommended gaming state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during both playing and non-gaming. Note that it may be possible to enter the non-recommended gaming state regardless of the setting value (even other than setting b), or to enter the non-recommended gaming state only when the setting value is set to setting b. It's okay.

FIG. 59(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 59(b), the payment button 134 starts from (ta) in the same state as (ta) shown in FIG. . That is, the payment operation is performed before a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without medals being inserted after the third stop. When the payment operation is performed, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. Furthermore, a game media payout sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, FIG. 207(N) schematically shows the configuration of the components in FIG. 59(N). In FIG. 60(N), horizontal hatching indicates that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a payment pattern (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross hatching in FIG. 58(b).

In FIG. 59(J), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 60(J) schematically shows the components in FIG. 59(J). Even after the payout is completed, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from lighting in the payment pattern to lighting in the demo pattern in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for the title panel lamp 164 to turn off as explained above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off with setting b set (FIG. 57(c)), the setting b is set. If the demo animation is started in (Figure 59 (H), the result is the same in Figure 57 (C)), if the payout according to the payment operation is completed with setting b set ( Figure 59(f)) is an example.

FIG. 61(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting 1, which is the default setting value, being set. In FIG. 61(a), each stage is numbered from (c) to (f), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, in the upper part of FIG. 62, the state of the components at each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 61(a) is schematically shown. (c) in FIG. 61(a) is the same as (te) shown in FIG. 59(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the difference from (te) is that the setting value Since this is not set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to be lit in white. Although demo pattern lighting is not executed in the title panel lamp 164, it may be executed, and in that case, the white lighting becomes demo pattern lighting. In FIG. 62(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by hatching downward to the left.

61(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and confirmation of set values is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1", which is the current setting value. In addition, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
277) also starts outputting a voice notifying that the settings are being checked ("Settings are being checked"). The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 62(H) displays "1", which is the current setting value. Further, the title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 62(A) are all lit white.

(F) in FIG. 61(a) is the same as (C) shown in FIG. 59(A), with the setting key switch 281 turned off. This is the point at which the confirmation ends, and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 does not go out but continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In FIG. 62(F), the setting value display 293 is hidden. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) display demo patterns represented by square hatching. It is switched on.

(F) in FIG. 61(a) is the same as (SA) shown in FIG. 59(A), with the front door 102 closed. It becomes a point that continues to be lit white.

FIG. 61(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in power saving mode with setting 1 set. In FIG. 61(b), each stage is numbered from (ka) to (ke), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (k) to (k) in FIG. 61(b).

(c) in FIG. 61(b) is the same as (c) shown in FIG. 61(a), which is the state 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (c) are as follows. That's right. First, as explained using FIG. 17(h), the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 remains lit in white without being extinguished, but its brightness is lowered (reduced). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 62(a) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 becomes dark and the title panel lamp 164 also becomes dark. It is also shown that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (ki) in FIG. 61(b), as in (hi) shown in FIG. 61(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and will be the same as in non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 62(B) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG. 62(H) directly above it.

At (x) in FIG. 61(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the setting confirmation has been completed, similar to (f) shown in FIG. 61(a). By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 62(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started has become dark, and the title panel lamp 164 has also become dark. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are off.

61(b) is the same as (f) shown in FIG. 61(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishing from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

FIG. 63(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting b set. In FIG. 63(a), time passes in the order of (TE), (BI), (KO), and (SA).

(TE) in FIG. 63(a) is the same state as (TE) shown in FIG. 59(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and is exactly the same state as (TE). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and the demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (B) of FIG. 63A, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. The only difference from (H) in FIG. 61A is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (B) in FIG. 63(a), the current setting value "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 64(B) displays "b" which is the current setting value. In addition, in the same way as in FIG. 62(H), in FIG. 64(B), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed" is output from the speakers (272, 277). has been done. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(C) in FIG. 63(a) is the same as (C) shown in FIG. 57, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and is exactly the same as (C). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 63(a) is the same state as (sa) shown in FIG. 57, with the front door 102 closed, and is exactly the same as (sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 63(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting b set. In FIG. 63(b), each stage is labeled with a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Moreover, the lower part of FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage from (ga) to (ge) in FIG. 63(b).

(Ga) in FIG. 63(b) is the same as (Te) shown in FIG. 63(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (Te) are as follows. That's right. First, the demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 64(g) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 has become dark. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 63(b), as in (b) shown in FIG. 63(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. , (B) is exactly the same state. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and will be the same as in the non-power saving mode. Note that the display of the set value display 293 and the like are different from (x) in FIG. 61(b). That is, "b" is displayed as in the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 64(g).

At (g) in FIG. 63(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the setting confirmation has been completed, as in (c) shown in FIG. 63(a). By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 64(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is darkened, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (x) in FIG. 61(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is being executed, as shown in FIG. 64(g).

63(b) is the same as (sa) shown in FIG. 63(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishment from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modification of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45 will be described.

<About the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, we will show examples of the winning probability and state transition of winning combination groups, as well as the relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all roles including replay, which is a replay role, and the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replay. A slot machine that can converge the payout rate to a suitable range by devising the following will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine in this modified example, the situations that can be controlled according to the progress of the game include the first situation (RT2, which will be described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as will be described later. By creating a second situation (RT1 described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate, the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range. can be done. Note that the slot machine in this modification also includes the technical matters explained using FIGS. 45 to 64. Here, the payout rate is the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the small role are stopped by the total number of medals set as the number of bets. . Also, the total payout rate that takes all the winning combinations into account is, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with a bet of 3 coins, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 3 medals are bet in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as follows. On the other hand, the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replay means that, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with 3 bets, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a bet has been made.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification. In the slot machine in this modified example, RT0 is the base gaming state (for example, a state in which most of the game is played, a state to be transitioned to due to a setting change, etc.), and a predetermined state in RT0. The gaming state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1, which is transferred by winning a transition combination A, and RT2, which is transferred by winning a predetermined transition combination B in RT0. In each of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to three. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game will be transitioned back to RT0 by playing the prescribed number of games 100 times. In RT0 in the slot machine in this modified example, in addition to the transition role A and the transition role B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to win a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc., and if the payout rate is less than 1, It is determined that it will become. In addition, in the slot machine in this modification, if a bonus winning combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the payout rate is transitioned to a bonus state of 1 or more, but for convenience of explanation, FIG. It is omitted from a). Note that the slot machine in this modification may be one in which the gaming state is changed between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT1 and the winning probabilities. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including 3-card roles with a payout of 3 cards, and push order roles that can pay out 15 cards, etc. will be subject to the lottery. It is determined. The 3-card combination always wins a prize in a winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, with the push order combination, when the presses are operated in a predetermined order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), a prize is won and 15 pieces are paid out, but when the push order is not operated in the predetermined order, no prize is won (other It may be possible to win a winning hand (for example, a one-card hand).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to be 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". It is determined that Therefore, the probability of winning the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages: when the set values are "b", "1", and "2", and when the set values are between "4" and "6". There is. In addition, the winning probability of replay b among the replay winning combinations is set to be a low probability (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the setting value, while the winning probability of the push winning combination among the small winning combinations is , is determined to have a high probability (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Note that even if the winning combination is won in RT1, the navigation effect that allows identification of an advantageous operation mode will not be executed (that is, it will not be controlled by AT). Therefore, even if the winning combination is won, the probability of winning is 1/6, and the probability of not winning is 5/6, for example.

On the other hand, regarding the winning probability of Replay a among the replayable roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the minor roles, the total winning probability is set to be uniform (for example, 50/200, etc.). , the ratio of winning probabilities of replay a and 3-card combination are determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "b" and "6", replay a has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.). It is determined that it will become. When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the three-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200, etc.). When the set values are "2" and "4", it is determined that replay a has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.). ing.

FIG. 65(c) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 and the winning probabilities. In RT2, similar to RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including a 3-card role with a payout of 3 cards, a push order role that can pay out 15 cards, etc. are subject to lottery winnings. It is determined that The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other roles is the same as that in RT1. It is determined that it will become. Moreover, when the push order combination is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when the winning combination is won in RT2, unless the operation mode is incorrect, the winning combination will be won and 15 medals will be paid out. Note that the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 are not limited to those determined in the same manner as in RT1, but may be determined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the total winning probability for Replay a and the 3-card combination (which is also the total winning probability because the player always wins when winning) is the same regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, they differ depending on the set value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the probability of winning/winning Replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the setting value is " When the set values are "1" and "5", the difference becomes relatively large, and when the set values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate becomes maximum. In addition, for both setting values 1 to 3, which affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, and setting values 4 to 6, the setting values that make the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate relatively small, and the total payout rate and It is determined to include a set value where the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is maximum.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. Note that the number of medals used to set the number of bets is three, and FIG. 66 illustrates a case where no bonus combination has been won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1 is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 10 times. Therefore, in FIG. 66(a), when the replay wins 10 times in 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. In addition, the "total number of IN coins" and "actual number of IN coins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but the "total number of IN coins" is the number including the number of medals automatically set after replay winnings. On the other hand, the "actual number of IN coins" is different in that it is the number excluding the number of coins automatically set after a replay win (the number of coins with the bet number after a replay win as "0"). In addition, the "total number of OUT medals" and "real number of OUT medals" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a small role, but the "total number of OUT medals" is the number of medals paid out when winning a replay prize. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning, whereas the "actual number of IN coins" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), if Replay wins 10 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 270 (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" has become "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≈120÷270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

Next, FIG. 66(b) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1 is 20/100 (= (35 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 20 times. Therefore, in FIG. 66(b), when the replay wins 20 times in 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 66(b), if the replay wins 20 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 240 (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "150" as in Fig. 66(a) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 65(b). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "90" (=150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (=90÷240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

As described above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, but as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate. Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 66(a) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 66(a) and FIG. 66(b). From this, it can be seen that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous for the player. It can be a state.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (no matter which setting value is used). The situation is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2 is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 30 times. In FIG. 66(c), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 30 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 66(c), if the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 210 (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" is "600" as a result of the navigation performance, and in this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "510" (=600-30 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.429 (≒510÷210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

Next, FIG. 66(d) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2 is 40/100 (= (35 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 40 times. In FIG. 66(d), the "total number of IN coins" when replay wins 40 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 66(d), if the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 180 (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "600" as in Fig. 66(c) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 65(c). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "480" (=600-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even if the set value is . Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and the "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 66(c) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and the 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 66(c) and FIG. 66(d). From this, it can be seen that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2. Become. In addition, during RT2, although the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. It can be a state.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine of this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, we focus on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 66(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, compared to a gaming machine where only one of the payout rates can be high, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range.

Note that the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but also when a specific losing symbol combination is stopped, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but also the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following.

In addition, the transitional combination A is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and the operation mode in which the transitional combination A is won according to the type of other combinations in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional combination B is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and an operation mode in which transitional combination B is won according to the type of other combinations in which transitional combination B is simultaneously won (e.g. The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional role A, transitional role B, and other roles a, b, etc. are won at the same time in the winning lottery, and the operation mode is such that transitional role A is won depending on the type of the other simultaneously won roles. , and the operation mode for winning the transition combination B may be determined to be different. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or transition winning combination B is won in RT0, a push order guessing game is generated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

For example, the transition winning combination A is the RT1 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the winning lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is won according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, the winning situations in RT0 include a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of a, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the RT1 transition replay win, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the normal replay a win. , when the winning situation b occurs, the reel control that causes the RT1 transition replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You can also do this.

In addition, transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is determined according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of c, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the normal replay a. , when winning situation d, the reel control that causes the RT2 transfer replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You can also do this.

In RT0 in this case, when one of the winning situations a to d occurs, it is announced that it is a press order guessing game. Messages such as ``This is your chance! Let them answer correctly on their own!'' are displayed when winning situations c and d are displayed, etc.) to provide fun that makes players think about the order in which they should press the stop button. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

In addition, in FIG. 65(a), the game state transition between RT0 and RT2 is illustrated, but the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all the winnings including replay and the real payout rate that takes into account the winnings other than replay. As shown in Figure 66(e), if there is a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, then this is the case. It is not limited to.

In addition, in FIGS. 65(b) and 65(c), when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, it can be seen that the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value. The difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate for any of the setting values ``b'', ``1'', ``2'', and setting values ``4'' to ``6'' that affect the winning probability of the bonus role. It has been explained that the set value includes a relatively small set value, a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the maximum. However, as shown in Figure 66(e), the winning probability is such that there are situations where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and situations where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate. If it is a game where a lottery is held (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set at 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. 65(a) or the game state transition shown in FIG. 65(b) This is not limited to the winning combinations and winning probabilities as shown in FIG. 65(c) and the like.

To summarize the characteristics of the slot machine according to the modified example explained above,
``A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and that can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops,
Determine whether or not you have won any of a plurality of roles, including the awarding role that involves the provision of the gaming value and the replaying role that allows you to start the next game without using new gaming value. a prize lottery means for performing a prize lottery;
A stop control means that performs stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning combination lottery;
a setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of gaming values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the awarding combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of gaming values set as the number of bets, In a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the predetermined number of gaming values are given as a result of the game, and the number of bets in the next game is A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets in a game when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped. The relationship with the second payout rate, which counts the game value given as 0 in the next game and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game as 0, is higher than the first payout rate. a first situation in which the rate is higher; and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In the notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. In the non-notification state where the winning combination is high and the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. The payout rate will be higher,
The plurality of types of setting values include at least a first setting value having the most advantageous degree and a second setting value having the most disadvantageous degree, and the setting value is higher than when the second setting value is set. The rate of the first situation is higher when the first setting value is set, and the second setting value is set more often than when the first setting value is set. The game machine is characterized in that the rate at which the second situation occurs is higher when the player is present. ”
become.

Also, according to the description from FIG. 45 onwards,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by either a clerk at the game parlor or a player. If you are a clerk at a game parlor, this information will confirm changes to the settings before the store opens, and if you are a player, this information will be important information that will lead to your own profits (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to execute the setting-related notification during the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

The first period may be a period from when the setting change termination operation is executed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the setting-related notification may be a notification suggesting that a predetermined setting value is set (selected) as the setting value (the same applies hereinafter). The predetermined setting value may be a setting value that provides the lowest advantage to the player among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

The setting-related notification can be read as a setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as a presentation means (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means does not perform the setting-related notification if a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set in the first period. It may be something that does not.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means may be set to a certain setting value rather than a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6]. is one in which the setting-related notification is executed more frequently [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 49(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, and is executed only when the one setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the execution frequency is as described above.

In the first period, the notification means determines that the setting value is higher when the one setting value is set than when a setting value different from the one setting value is set. Related notifications may be executed frequently, or during a period different from the first period (for example, during a period after the game has started (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of battle performance, at the end of BB) , at the end of AT, etc.), the setting-related notification is more effective when a setting value is set than when a setting value different from the setting value is set. It may be something that is executed frequently.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 49(a)];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first set value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [for example, setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [for example, setting b] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Furthermore, since a second setting value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first setting value, a cheater who illegally changes the setting value may be able to change the setting value without knowing it. There are cases where the setting value is changed to the second setting value, resulting in a disadvantageous game being played.

The second setting value may be the one setting value, and the notification means may be configured to provide a setting value related to one of the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification. It may be one that can execute notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means may display the currently set setting value (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means capable of displaying the setting value [e.g., setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value (for example, setting b) that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first setting value [for example, setting 1],
The setting value display means is configured to display a default setting value that is displayed first [for example, a setting value that is displayed for the first time immediately after shipment from the factory, a RAM that includes a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) that stores the setting value, and Display the first setting value [for example, setting 1] as the setting value displayed on the screen or the setting value that will be displayed first when the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area that stores the setting value is lost. is a means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, even if the game clerk forgets to change the settings and leaves the default settings as they are, it is easy for the player to play the game.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the game machine is initialized. That is, when the game machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be a setting value located at the beginning of the predetermined order.

Also,
``The first period is a period in which no game has been started since the power was turned on to the gaming machine [for example, from FIG. It is a period of time during which
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player will not suffer any disadvantages due to the setting-related notification being executed during a period when no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never been started may mean that the start lever has never been operated with the number of bets set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when an operation related to the setting change is performed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation for terminating the setting change (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The certain operation is an operation that is executed after the setting value is determined [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 54].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, after the setting value is determined, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation to end the setting change process (after turning on the start lever) after confirming the setting value in the setting change process (setting change key is turned on). (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with an operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means in the on state to the off state [for example, FIG. 57(c)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (for example, a setting change key) that is turned on when starting the setting change to an off state, and the on state may be the starting state. Alternatively, the off state may be an end state (the same applies hereinafter). That is, the operating means may be a means for switching between starting and ending the setting change when operated (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification in the first period [for example, the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, the information regarding the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, so that the setting value display means does not display redundantly and the control burden is reduced. Ru.

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period when the door body is open [for example, FIG. 57(C)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is in an open state, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The operating means may be operable when the door body is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the set value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may be invisible when the door body is closed (the same applies hereinafter). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to the player (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may be configured to perform door open notification when the door body is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door open notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period when the door body is closed [for example, FIG. 57 (S)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is closed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

Note that even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, and when the door open notification ends, the setting related notification is sent. (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is open during the first period, and may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is closed during the first period. may be executed (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door body is opened or closed, and may be a notification that ends when a bet number of 1 or more is set (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The one setting value may be a setting value that gives the player the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

I will continue to explain further. As described above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

In this way, the normal gaming state of the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a 2-bet bet internal winning state, but if a player plays a game with a 2-bet bet and wins a 2-bet bonus, If the bet bonus game is played out, the gaming state becomes a 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, if the reset switch 291 is pressed, the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state also occurs. Further, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 54) is performed, and initialization is automatically performed, resulting in a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state.

Note that when the setting change process is started, instead of being initialized automatically, it may be possible to select whether or not to initialize. For example, it may be possible to initialize setting values and gaming states using a setting change procedure. More specifically, like when changing settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes setting 1 and the gaming state becomes a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state. You can do it like this. Furthermore, it may also be set to a non-advantageous section state. Although the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 54) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, while the 2-bet bonus game is being played, a display indicating that the 2-bet bonus game is being played is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (for example, a flower shape display). ) is displayed. The remaining number of coins to be paid out, which is a condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining coins being spent"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting that is extremely disadvantageous to the player, such as setting b, which is not originally set, is prepared from the perspective of countermeasures against fraudulent players, etc., and is set to setting b by performing the setting change process. This situation can be avoided. However, even though the setting change processing has been carried out to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged, if the 2-bet bet bonus is not internally won, the player will still be disadvantaged in the end. Therefore, a notification indicating that the 2-bet bet bonus is not internally won is made.

In the following explanation, the first gaming state refers to a 2-bet bet bonus non-internally winning state, and the second gaming state refers to a 2-bet betting bonus internally winning state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous period state, a non-internal winning state not limited to betting on two coins, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b. The second gaming state can also be applied to a state that is more advantageous than those, for example, an advantageous section state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal gaming state, items and points. A state in which the setting is acquired or a state in which the setting is set to one of settings 1, 2, and 4 to 6 can be mentioned.

Further, the first voice is a warning alert of "Please check." The first display is a text display of "Please confirm", and this text display is also a warning alert.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a text display of "Completed".

Furthermore, when the game is started in the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state, a display indicating that a transition to the 2-bet bet bonus internal winning state is being attempted is displayed on the effect image display device 157; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the 2-piece bet bonus or a display prompting the player to shift to the 2-piece betting bonus internally winning state is displayed. Hereinafter, the notifications based on these displays will be collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As this fourth notification, for example, "Returning game" is displayed, and the number of games played in a state where the 2-bet bet bonus has not been won internally is displayed. A player who knows about this fourth notification can understand that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. Note that the fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played with two bets, or may be a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 67 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. In FIG. 67, each stage is numbered from (1) to (11), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 67 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Further, at the bottom, there is provided an item regarding the gaming status.

In FIG. 67(1), the power switch 244 is in an off state and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and monitor LED are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 67(2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise to turn the setting key switch 281 on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 67(3), the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as a default setting value. Note that in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if initialization is not performed, the setting value at the time of power cutoff stored in the power cutoff processing in step S221 is displayed. A settings changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the settings are being changed, and the speakers (272, 277) also emit a voice ("Settings are being changed") to notify that the settings are being changed. ) will now be output. Furthermore, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts outputting a detection signal indicating open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts lighting up. Note that when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to the external device. Furthermore, the gaming state is the first gaming state (two-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state) because the RAM has been cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 54). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the gaming state at the power-off time stored in the power-off processing in step S221 will be maintained. Therefore, there may be a second gaming state (two bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated every time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 67(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 54), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed", a voice such as "Settings have been changed" may be output.

In FIG. 67(5), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 54), and the seven segments are turned off and not displayed on the setting value display 293. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The audio output of "The door is open" that has been switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. Note that instead of "The door is open," it may be possible to output a voice saying "Setting change has been completed" or "Setting change is finished." Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. When the setting change process is completed, if the gaming state is the first gaming state, a first notification command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) executes notification control (presentation control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays a first display of characters such as "Please confirm" as a warning alert.

In FIG. 67 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 67(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to a close detection signal at the L level, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output. Note that on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 67(7), the front door 102 is opened and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door open pattern. Furthermore, since the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, the first display such as "Please confirm" also continues to be displayed. But the speaker (272,2
The voice from 77) returns to the warning voice "The door is open." That is, the output of the first sound starts when the front door 102 is closed, and ends when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the clerk at the game parlor is already aware that the first gaming state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing shown in FIG. In order to avoid this, the output of the first audio is terminated. Note that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened two or more predetermined times. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during play to resolve a hopper error or a ball jam, if the predetermined number of times is more than 2, it may become noisy to surrounding players. There is.

In FIG. 67(8), the front door 102 is closed again while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed," and the repeated warning notification is not executed. However, on the effect image display device 157, the first display such as "Please confirm" is continuously displayed along with the display of the demo animation. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting white again. .

In FIG. 67(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a gaming parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a warning notification that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).

In FIG. 67(10), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the step (7) in FIG. 67, a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed instead of or in addition to the first display, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in a two-bet bet state and the two-bet bet bonus is won internally, a notification indicating that the player has won internally is issued. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to help you avoid winning the 2-bet bet bonus. In this navigation performance, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the performance image display device 157 displays information about the reel stop position where a bonus win can be avoided.

In FIG. 67 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, by operating the start lever 135 for the first time, a two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and by a stop operation that avoids winning the bonus, the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 68 summarizes the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. This is a table. In FIG. 68, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21) to (23), and (11), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

In FIG. 68, the same items as in FIG. 67 are shown as component items, and the gaming status item is provided at the bottom (same up to FIG. 73).

Figures 68 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 67 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 67 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 68 (21), after the setting change process is completed, the front door 102 remains open and medals are inserted, such as cleaning the medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a game parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), confirming that it is in the first gaming state. The first display, which is a warning notification, is continuously displayed. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern.

In FIG. 68 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 68 (21), a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed instead of the first display or in addition to the first display, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed. Note that since the front door 102 remains open, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 68 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal). (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the first voice such as "Please check" is output from the speaker (272, 277) as an alert alert. In the example shown in FIG. 68, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. A clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate can be alerted by voice that the first gaming state is in effect. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting in white. Note that in the effect image display device 157, the normal background display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 68 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 68 (11) is the same as FIG. 67 (11), and the two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display due to the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 69 shows the relationship in the case where the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored. This is a table summarizing the status of the constituent elements. In this FIG. 69, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), and (25) to (27), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 69(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 67(1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 67(1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since Figure 69 (21) and Figure 69 (22) are the same as Figure 67 (21) and Figure 67 (22), the explanations for Figure 67 (21) and Figure 67 (22) are used, and the explanation here is Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 69 (25), the power is cut off while the game is being played with two bets (while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating), resulting in the same state as in FIG. 69 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in FIG. 69 (26), the power is restored and the reels 110 to 112 return to the state immediately before the power cut, with two bets still in place. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power is cut off, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power cut starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the door opening pattern lighting. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 69 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal). (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. It turns out. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the first voice such as "Please confirm" will not be output from the speakers (272, 277). This is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is present due to this first display.

FIG. 70 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. In FIG. 70, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time elapses in the order of the symbols.

70(1) to (5) are the same as FIG. 67(1) to (5), so the explanation of FIGS. 67(1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 70 (21) is the same as FIG. 67 (21), the explanation of FIG. 67 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 70 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of a 2-bet bet, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the 2-bet medals and the credit medals. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after the start of payout. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the subsequent FIG. 70 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. 70, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, the speaker (272, 277) will emit a message saying "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 71 shows a related configuration in a case where a power outage is restored after the power is restored and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored, before the front door 102 is closed and the inserted medals are being settled and put out. This is a table summarizing the states of elements. In FIG. 71, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 71 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 67 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 67 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 71 (21) is the same as FIG. 67 (21), the explanation of FIG. 67 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 71 (31) is the same as FIG. 70 (31), the explanation of FIG. 70 (31) will be used and the detailed explanation will be omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 71 (35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 71 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In the subsequent FIG. 71 (36), the power is restored and the remaining medals that have not yet been paid out begin to be paid out. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the payment pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound from the speakers (272, 277) is resumed. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 71 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state during payout, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. Become. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the first voice such as "Please confirm" will not be output from the speakers (272, 277), and the output sound will not be output. continues. The reason why the first voice is not output is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on confirming payouts after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is present due to this first display. Note that part or all of the payout sound does not have to be output during the period of paying out the remaining medals after the return.

FIG. 72 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. In FIG. 72, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (41), and (42), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 72(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 67(1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 67(1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 72 (41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 72 (5), is returned to the on state. The state shown in FIG. 72 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the OFF state to the ON state. , the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. Further, the monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 start lighting up. On the performance image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. Also, speakers (272,
277) also starts to output a voice notifying that the settings are being checked ("Settings are being checked"). The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting.

In FIG. 72 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 72 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. In the example in FIG. 72, the front door 102 is closed while the effect image display device 157 is displaying the setting confirmation display. That means that. In this case, the speaker (272,
277), a first voice such as "Please confirm" is output instead of the voice such as "Settings are being confirmed." Note that on the effect image display device 157, the setting confirmation display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 72, the text display such as "Please confirm", which is an alert alert, is referred to as the first display, but the setting confirmation display is referred to as the first display, and the first voice is referred to as the first display. In the example of FIG. 72, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. In FIG. 73, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), (45), and (46), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 73(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 67(1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 67(1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since Figure 73 (21) and Figure 73 (22) are the same as Figure 67 (21) and Figure 67 (22), the explanations for Figure 67 (21) and Figure 67 (22) are used, and the explanation here is Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 73 (45), the third stop operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display due to the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state. Also, speakers (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed."

In FIG. 73 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 73 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second gaming state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level close detection signal, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and the advantage is that the control processing does not become complicated. In other words, the store clerk is aware of the situation and is playing a game with two bets, and at the third stop stage (stage (45) in FIG. 73), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game that starts after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game has shifted to the second game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 73 described above, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation after the setting change processing is performed. As mentioned above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 54) is performed, and the gaming state becomes the first gaming state, so the setting value may not actually be the same. Regardless of whether the setting is changed or not, if the setting change process is performed, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state as shown in the last example of FIG. 73. That is, the first sound is outputted regardless of whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or not, as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process being performed, the first sound is not output, but the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is held down. The first sound may be output when the user is asked to do so. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed.

FIG. 74 shows the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summarized table. In FIG. 74, each stage is numbered from (50) to (59), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 74 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). At the bottom is an item for a medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 48. Note that the gaming state is always the second gaming state (same up to FIG. 78).

In FIG. 74 (50), the power switch 244 is in the on state and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs a closed detection signal at L level. The setting key switch 281 is in an off state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are off. A demo animation is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a demo pattern is lit on the top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L and a right side lamp 144R, and a white color is lit on the title panel lamp 164. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted will be referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 74 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open." Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 74 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, with the front door 102 open and the power turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. The effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also start outputting a sound (``Settings are being checked'') informing that settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protrusion thereof will be referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, the medals from the medal slot 141 cannot be maintained. In other words, medals cannot be inserted even if three medals, four or more medals, one or two medals are inserted. Furthermore, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 are not accepted, or even if accepted, the operations become invalid. Further, the operation of the start lever 135 and the payment operation are not accepted, or even if they are accepted, they are invalid.

In FIG. 74 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The set value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The audio from the speakers (272, 277) changes to "The door is open." The performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 becomes inactive.

In FIG. 74 (54), the front door 102 is pseudo-closed by manually pushing down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect this opening/closing piece. As a result, although the front door 102 is open, the open sensor 294 outputs a close detection signal of L level. The audio output from the speakers (272, 277) such as "The door is open" disappears.

In FIG. 74 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is an ON operation in a state where the close detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. In the previous explanations such as in FIG. 74 (51), the setting confirmation process was explained to be started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the power turned on. Strictly speaking, the process starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. Therefore, in this FIG. 74 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demo animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

In FIG. 74 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where it is possible to perform a bet operation, a start operation, and a settlement operation. The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 74 (57), the hand that was pushing down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, the open sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece, and an open detection signal is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open." Figure 22
1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state. Further, the state shown in FIG. 74 (57) is also a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set. If the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and a bet number of 1 or more is set, even if the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process will not start and the production image On the display device 157, the normal background display continues. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 74 (58), the settlement button 134 is pressed to start payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 74 (59), the payout is completed. In the state shown in FIG. 74 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the payout has been completed (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Additionally, the speakers (272, 277) begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked."
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (see (55) in the figure), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation in progress). When the payout process is completed ((58) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process starts (set in the effect image display device 157). This corresponds to the example (59) in the same figure) in which a confirmation message is displayed.

FIG. 75 summarizes the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and a game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 75, each stage is labeled with numerals (50) to (57), (61), and (62), and time elapses in the order in which the numerals are written.

In FIG. 75, the same items as in FIG. 76 are shown as component items (same up to FIG. 78).

Since Figures 75 (50) to (57) are the same as Figures 74 (50) to (57), the explanations for Figures 74 (50) to (57) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 75 (61), the start lever 135 is operated and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 75 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. In the state shown in FIG. 75 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the game has ended (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Additionally, the speakers (272, 277) begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked." The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 75 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the figure), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation message). is not displayed), the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) Corresponds to example.

In addition, to summarize the example in FIG. 74 and the example in FIG. 75, when the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the number of bets is set. When the state is reached, a setting confirmation process is started, and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 76 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 76, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (3) and (71) to (78), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 76(1) to (3) are the same as Figures 67(1) to (3), the explanations for Figures 67(1) to (3) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the settings change process has started.

In FIG. 76 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as the state shown in FIG. 76(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 76 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also returned to the off state while the power switch 244 is kept off, and in the subsequent step (73) in the same figure, the power switch 244 is turned on. When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 53 is started, and first, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) returns the state to the state immediately before the power was cut off. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, it is remembered that the setting key switch 281 was in the on state immediately before the power was cut off, and the setting value display 293 shows the setting immediately before the power cut. The value "1" is displayed. In addition, the information backed up at the time of power outage is returned on the sub-control unit side (400, 500), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says ``Setting confirmation in progress. ” is output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In addition, on the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in a game machine that does not store backup data at the time of a power outage, the initial setting at startup of the main control unit 300 (step S1001) indicates that the state immediately before the power outage is being changed. When the setting change command is recognized, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub control unit 400, and the sub control unit side (400, 500) displays the setting confirmation display based on the setting change command. is displayed and outputs a voice saying ``Checking the settings.''

As shown in the main control unit main process of FIG. 51, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) of FIG. 53 is executed only when the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, the determination in step S1005 is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, and then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 76 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 76 (75)). 76 (76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 76 (76), the set value "1" is displayed on the set value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. In addition, a message indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says "Settings are being changed".
A sound like this will be output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 76 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 54), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed", a voice such as "Settings have been changed" may be output. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 76 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 54), and the setting value display 293 becomes hidden. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Note that instead of "The door is open," it may be possible to output a voice saying "Setting change has been completed" or "Setting change is finished." Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 77 shows a case where, after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the states of related components. In this FIG. 77, each stage is labeled with symbols (50) to (54), (81), (82), and (57) to (59), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 77 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 74 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 74 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 77 (81), with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medal insertion such as medal care or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on again in FIG. 77 (82). However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is performed while the close detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The display remains as it is, the normal background continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also,
Medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

Since Figures 77 (57) to (59) are the same as Figures 74 (57) to (59), the explanations for Figures 74 (57) to (59) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends, and the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal. Then, the payment operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 77 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process will not start if the number of bets of 1 or more is set. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure). When the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation is displayed. This corresponds to an example in which the process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59) in the figure).

FIG. 78 shows the related components in the case where, after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. This is a table summarizing the status of . In FIG. 78, each stage is labeled with the symbols (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62), and the time is shown in the order of the symbols. It passes.

Since Figures 78 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 74 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 74 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

78 (81) and 78 (82) are the same as FIG. Although omitted, after the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set.

Since FIG. 78 (57) is the same as FIG. 74 (57), the explanation of FIG. 74 (57) will be used and the detailed explanation will be omitted here. Become.

Since Figure 78 (61) and Figure 78 (62) are the same as Figure 75 (61) and Figure 75 (62), the explanations of Figure 75 (61) and Figure 75 (62) will be used and detailed explanations will be given here. Although omitted here, the start lever 135 is operated to start the game, and when the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, a setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 78 described above is an example in which when the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, it is possible to continue playing the game with the set number of bets. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are also accepted. Priority is given to the set number of bets, the game continues with the number of bets, and after the game ends, processing (setting confirmation processing) corresponding to the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 is started.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 78, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process will not start if the number of bets of 1 or more is set ( The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157), the game with the set number of bets is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This also corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the figure).

Furthermore, to summarize the example in FIG. 77 and the example in FIG. 78, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the effect is The image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display, and the state is different from the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, the payout process) (completed state or game ended state), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In addition, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display 293, and the number of bets of 1 or more is set. When the state is different from the current state (a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically a state where the payout process is completed or a state where the game is finished), the setting value is set in the setting value display 293. The value is displayed.

Furthermore, whether the timing shown in FIG. 77 (57) or the timing shown in FIG. (82), corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIG. 77 (57) and FIG. 78 (57), the open sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened, such as by releasing the hand that was pressing down on the opening/closing piece while the bet number of 1 or more is still set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started and a setting confirmation in progress display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The matters described above using FIGS. 57 to 78 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper back side of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding balls falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the tank 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P. That is, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to a payout control section (not shown). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured so that they pass through the ball rail and reach the upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured so that the game ball passes through the ball rail and reaches the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. Based on this configuration, an amount of gaming value (game balls) corresponding to the awarding conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the figure, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158P that stores a main board 156P that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit to perform, a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit A second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that performs the processing, a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and includes an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels errors by operation of a gaming clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses a payout board case 172P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a launch board case 176P that accommodates a launch board 174P that constitutes a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. A power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that also includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a game store clerk, and a RAM clear switch 180P that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , and a CR interface unit 186P that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit and the card unit.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. Even in this pachinko machine 100P, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, it is possible to set at least one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities. Setting change processing begins. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this. In addition, by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P. Is displayed. Note that the setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on. , the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 79, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 45, are prepared, and the display order explained using FIG. are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order. Further, setting b is the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the setting value is to the player.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156P and placed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. Note that the accessory ratio/setting display 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 79, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, and the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, which detects when the main body is opened (not shown). The main body opening sensor corresponds to the opening sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the accessory ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 293. Further, a main board 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 79 and an external centralized terminal board (not shown) are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. Further, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are provided, and this liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speakers correspond to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game table frame is provided with a game table frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
``The first gaming state [for example, the 2-bet bonus non-internal winning state or the state in which setting b is set] and the second gaming state [for example, the 2-bet betting bonus internal winning state or the state in which setting 1 is set] a gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of gaming states including
A notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164] that can execute the first notification [for example, the first voice saying "Please confirm" or turning off the title panel lamp 164]; ,
A game machine comprising:
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first gaming state. It is a certain means,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first gaming state is a non-internal winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is a non-internally winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which the winning state has been won (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which a first number of coins is bet and a bonus is won, and the second gaming state is an internal winning state in which a player bets a first number of coins and wins a bonus. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which a person bets a number of coins and wins a bonus (the same applies below).

The second gaming state is a normal gaming state or an initial setting gaming state, and the first gaming state is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state [for example, a penalty bonus state, a setting b The first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a non-bonus winning state, a state where no points or items are acquired, etc. (The same applies below).

A door body may be provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or may be an operation to close the door body ( The same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification suggesting that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes him/her aware that the player is in the first gaming state [for example, a notification such as "This is the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Please confirm"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the speaker (272, 277)], a second notification means [for example, the title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [for example, the effect image display device]. 157] (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the gaming state when setting b is set may be the first gaming state, and in that case, the gaming mode may be changed during the gaming state with RT=gaming mode (the same applies below). ).

Furthermore, in place of the game state control means, a game control means that controls a game based on the setting of the first setting value and a game based on the setting of the second setting value. "The game executed based on the setting of the first setting value (first game) may be executed based on the setting of the second setting value. The game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game played (second game) (the same applies below). Furthermore, the first gaming state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second gaming state can be read as a state in which the second setting value is set (hereinafter (The same applies to

In addition, instead of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain combination is won internally as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of coins bet, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not the internal winning state" The non-internal winning state may be a state more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Further, the first gaming state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second gaming state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the reels are rotating [for example, FIG. 68 (23)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted.

The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means issues the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating. It may be a means that may be executed.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 68 (22), FIG. 69 (22)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the rotation of the reels [for example, FIG. 68 (23)],
The notification means may be configured to notify the reel when the reel is rotating and a power outage restoration occurs before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 69 (25) to FIG. 69 (26)]. Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the controller [for example, FIG. 69 (27)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 70 (32)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The payout means is a means that is capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the certain operation when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means. It may be a means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a payment operation after inserting a medal, or may be a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation is performed after inserting a medal.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [for example, 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The payout means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 70 (31) or FIG. 71 (31)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 70 (32)],
When the power is restored during the payout processing period and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 71 (35) to FIG. 71 (36)], the notification means Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 71 (37)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained. The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, a character display of "Please confirm"] [for example, as shown in FIG. 67 ( 6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the display on the display means is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The display means is a means capable of starting displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notifying means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed. The first notification may be executed when the notification is performed.

Also,
"The gaming state control means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition [for example, a condition such as winning a bonus winnings with a predetermined number of coins bet and not winning the bonus winnings]" is satisfied. A means for executing control for transitioning to a gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first notification serves as a reminder to perform the initial settings.

Also,
“The above-mentioned condition is a condition that includes executing one or more games [for example, one or more games must be executed to win a bonus combination]”
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the clerk of the game parlor executes the game before the shop opens, the player can play the game from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is a condition including that a game is played one or more times with a predetermined number of coins bet, and that a certain combination is won. In other words, the above-mentioned certain condition may be a condition that may be satisfied by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain combination. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain role, but not winning the certain role. What has been explained here is also the same below.

Also,
"The notification means is a means that does not perform the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined time [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG. 67 (8)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the certain operation is performed after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), the store clerk is often already aware of the operation, and redundant notifications can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice of "Completed]] when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second notification allows the player to confirm that the disadvantageous gaming condition has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification indicating that the game has moved to the second gaming state or a notification indicating that the game is in the second gaming state [for example, a notification such as "It is the second gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returning"] (the same applies below).

Also,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change means for performing the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 54],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process [for example, a process that includes operating the power switch 244, setting key switch 281, etc. that cannot be operated without opening the front door 102] is an operation,
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started. is a certain means [for example, Fig. 67 (6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even though the setting change process has started and the adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has started, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification. , it is possible to make the person making the setting change aware that the first gaming state is in effect.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door body is opened (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means is a means that can execute the third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 67 (3)] until the certain operation is performed [for example, Figure 67 (5)],
The third notification is a notification performed when the setting change process is completed [for example, a voice notification saying "the door is open" or "the settings have been changed"],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The notification unit may be a unit that executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change process has been completed or a notification indicating that the setting change process has been completed [for example, a notification such as "setting change has been completed"]. Alternatively, the notification may be a notification regarding the state of the game machine (for example, a notification such as "the door is open") (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 78 (81) in which the medals are taken care of or the medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 78 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 78 (81)] is 78 (61) to (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed.

Even if the game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game ends, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is completed. good.

If the operation means is operated while no medals have been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, if the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no bet operation is performed, the game may not be started.

The case where the operation means is operated means the case where the setting confirmation process is not executed. The operation means includes a setting change means for performing a setting change process of changing a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player, and the operating means It may also be a means that is operated when changing settings (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 78 (81) in which the medals are taken care of or the medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 78 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 78 (81)] is 78 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 78 (52)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened [for example, the open sensor 294], and the display means detects that the sensor detects that the door body is opened. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 74 (52)] when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected, and when the operating means is operated while the sensor is not detected. The first display may not be displayed when the first display is performed [for example, (55) in FIG. 74].

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An operating means operated when confirming the settings [for example, the setting key switch 281], a display means [for example, the effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 78 (81) in which the medals are taken care of or the medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 78 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 78 (81)] 78 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 78 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 77 (82)], and the payment operation is performed in the first state [for example, 77 (58)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 77 (59)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases. In addition, even if the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed, and even in this case, the first display may be displayed when the payment process is completed and the person leaves the seat, causing fraud. The act can be discovered and the wrongdoer may be exposed.

Note that the display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the display means detects that the door body is opened. means (for example, FIG. 74 (52)) for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is being detected; The first display may not be displayed when the operation means is operated in the detection state [for example, FIG. 74 (55)].

Also,
``A medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
the first passage,
a second passageway [e.g., storage passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, medal blocker 172] that distributes medals inserted from the medal slot into either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the first passage when the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 74 (52)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

After operating the operating means, a clerk at the game parlor can check how the medals have passed. Furthermore, the game cannot be started after the operating means is operated, and the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake. The medal return path is a path connected to a medal discharge port (eg, medal payout port 155).

The second passage is a medal storage passage (for example, the storage passage 173), and the medals that have passed through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) (for example, the bucket 181).

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 47(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The operation means is operated also in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means in which there are cases,
The medal blocker distributes medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 74 ( 55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The second state includes a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable by opening the door. It may also be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

Further, the medal blocker may be configured to distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 74 (55)].

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 74 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may be a means that does not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the operation means is operated. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the operation of the operating means is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operating means is operated, it is advantageous for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``Equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the operation means is operated. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. Particularly in the case where the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the set value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a performance image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means performs a first operation in a first state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 77 (81) or FIG. It is a means for not displaying the first display when [for example, an operation of turning on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, as shown in FIG. 77 ( 82) or Figure 78 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 77 (59) or FIG. 78 (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. Can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means displays a first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. 77 (82) or FIG. 78 (82) is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). )],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 77 (59) or FIG. 78 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation to cause the open sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed in the first state after the first case. It is a means of not displaying [for example, FIG. 77 (57) or FIG. 78 (57)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The second operation includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the second operation is performed when the sensor detects that the door body is opened. It may also be an operation to detect this.

Also, according to the above description,
A display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"];
a set value display means capable of displaying set values [for example, set value display 293];
78 (81) in which the medals are taken care of or the medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132]. means for not displaying the first display when an operation [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 77 (82) or Fig. 78 (82)],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state occurs [for example, payout is completed due to payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends] (hereinafter referred to as "second state"). ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 77 (59) or FIG. 78 (62)],
The set value display means is a means capable of displaying the set value in the second case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. Can be done.

The setting value may be selected from a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

In addition,
“The display means is a means for not displaying the setting value in the first case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the set value is also not displayed, maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with further priority.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state [for example, Fig. 77 (52), Fig. 77 (82), Fig. 78 (52), Fig. 78 (82)]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ” was also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
“The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 74 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

During maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the set value is not displayed due to the first operation, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and for example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special winning combination or jackpot, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may vary depending on the set value. Different (same below).

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the first operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the first operation is performed. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the first operation is being performed normally. Particularly when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
``An operation means that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation [for example, a setting key switch 281],
A game machine comprising a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may display a set value when there is an on operation [for example, FIG. 77 (52) or FIG. 78 (52)],
The on operation is an operation to switch the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the on operation is performed [for example, FIG. 77 (82) or FIG. 78 (82)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the set value display means is a means that sometimes displays the set value and sometimes does not display the set value when there is an on operation.

Even if the ON operation is fraudulently performed by an unauthorized person during business hours, the unauthorized person can be prevented from checking the set value.

The device includes a door body and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened, and the set value display means is configured such that the on-operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door body is opened. The set value may be displayed when the sensor is not detected, and the set value may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected.

Also,
``Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means that may display the set value when the operation means is in the OFF state [for example, FIG. 76 (73)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even when the operating means is in the OFF state, the set value can be confirmed, which may improve the workability of maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor.

If the power is restored after the operating means is in the on state and the operating means is switched to the off state, the display means will display the set value even if the operating means is in the off state. Display.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the turning-on operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is characterized by comprising a transmitting means [for example, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the above-mentioned on operation is performed. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the above-mentioned on operation is being performed normally. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely a list of the most preferred functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 80 to 179. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 80 to 179 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 179, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 80 to 179.

The slot machine described below uses a so-called medal-less configuration that uses information equivalent to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals), but in the following explanation, this information will be referred to as the "number of medals". We will use it.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends. This is a game machine that proceeds with a series of games that will end without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if the number of game medals has not been paid out.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 80 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 80 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 are the left reel upper symbols, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 are the left reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 are the left reel lower symbols, the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 are the middle reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the right reel 112 are the middle reel upper row symbols. The symbols displayed on the upper row are called the right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel lower row symbols, and each reel 110 Three symbols of each of the symbols 112 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of 9 symbols. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 80 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific prize winning combination (for example, a bonus prize, a special prize) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internally winning state has been carried over. This is a lamp to notify the player. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 80, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When it is pressed once, one sheet is inserted, when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 2 sheets) is inserted, and when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 3 sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112 is referred to as a "sequential push operation order" or simply The stop operation in which the first stop operation is a stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is a stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation of the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push". This is called ``order of operations'' or simply ``reverse push''. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display device for displaying information regarding the operation order (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a 7 segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, right stop button 139, middle stop button 139, When instructing to operate the stop buttons 138 in this order, "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (number of bets) to the number of medals control section 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 81.

The counting button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 81 to the lending machine 700.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 81) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker 272 (see FIG. 81) to the outside. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 80 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

Rental machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a gaming storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other type is a membership card, which is a gaming storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member at a gaming parlor. An IC card is used as the card.

A value is stored in the card. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)". The "number of game medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the number of bets and can be converted into the "number of medals held." The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "money balance" or "number of medals held" from the card. Furthermore, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning. This "number of game medals" is managed by the number of medals control unit 350 shown in FIG. 81, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) stored electromagnetically. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)". This "number of medals held" is memorized so that it can be specified by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals held", which can be stored on the card. Note that the "number of medals held" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals installed in the gaming hall.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting a card below. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the banknote is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance."

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display for providing operation guidance for the lending machine 700, the status of the slot machine 100, etc. in the form of text or images. Note that the surface may be configured as a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two levels, upper and lower. The monetary balance display 705 displays the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is displayed on the medal number balance display 706 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation to obtain the "number of game medals" by withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Further, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Furthermore, even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" for the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing it from the "number of medals you have" stored on the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. It is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to "number of game medals" from the "number of medals you have" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation. The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are arranged in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held" It will be converted. In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". This may confuse players who are accustomed to traditional slot machines, where you are lent real medals, insert the real medals to secure credits, and use those credits to set the number of bets. It is possible to provide a game using a new slot machine (managed gaming machine) that does not use real medals, without giving away any coins.

Note that although the "number of stored medals" is not mentioned in this specification, the "number of stored medals" is the number of medals that are not stored in the card but deposited at the gaming parlor. At the gaming parlor, the number of medals a player has acquired through games is managed as "scores" during the day using the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. It may also be managed as a number. If both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of medals held" are stored, the "number of medals held" is preferentially debited. Further, both the "number of medals held" and the "number of stored medals" may be stored in a host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 84) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number. When storing the card number in correspondence with the card number in the host server, data that can identify the time stored in the host server may be written on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "monetary balance" is written directly on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing at which the "number of medals held" is stored in the card (membership card, visitor card) or host server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored in the hall management terminal 800 as stored medals. When the player inserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 again on the same day as the day on which the card was returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day, which was once stored as stored medals, will be transferred to the lending machine again. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the game can be played.

Furthermore, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by an attendant at the game parlor, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 80, it was possible to lend out the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. The "number of medals held" may be debited and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", an LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. It lights up in a manner that represents. By operating the held medal button in this state, if the number of held medals is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces), a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces) of the "number of game medals" is added. In addition, the number of medals that a player has acquired through playing, as described above, may be stored on the card as "scores" during the day, or may be managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. If there is a "point", the LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 81. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

《Main control section》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control section 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal number control section 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel symbol arrangement, stop position, etc., and a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the medal number control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls the game when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. (Starts main control section main processing, which will be described later).

Further, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of each bet button 130, 132, start lever 135, each stop button 137 to 139, and settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process is executed in which the medals electronically stored in the medal number control unit 350 are electronically inserted into the game as medals. When it is detected that the start lever 135 has been turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used in the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, or right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stopable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. If it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal number control unit 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensor for the left reel 110, optical sensor for the middle reel 111, optical sensor for the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a drive circuit 322 that drives motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 82) provided on the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A drive circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, etc.). We are prepared.

Further, in the slot machine 100, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this setting value is connected to the game control section 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control section 302, and the main control section 300 inputs information to an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 84), etc. via this information output circuit 328. 650, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to each of the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with timer 362. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and RAM 308 but not the ROM 356 and RAM 358, and causes the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and RAM 358 but not the ROM 306 and RAM 308. Note that a WDT (watchdog timer), which is not shown, is also installed. Further, the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. The interrupt request is determined and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU 354 at each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control unit 350 executes an interrupt process (medal number control unit timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Furthermore, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also includes a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the circuit, control of the number of medals is started (starting the main processing of the number of medals control unit, which will be described later).

Connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control unit 350 are a game medal number display device 170 composed of a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display, a counting button 171, and a game medal number clear button 172.

Further, a lending machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 via a lending machine connecting terminal board 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs bidirectional communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302. Further, the game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the “number of game medals” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "number of game medals" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. The addition process includes a process based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, a process based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and a process based on a lending notice sent from the lending machine 700. can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control section 302.

Note that the game medal number clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player leaves the game with ``2'' remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to judge whether the player who left ``2'' intends to continue playing or not, and another player Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed early. Note that when the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared; for example, it is cleared when the number of game medals is 2 or less, and when it is 3 or more. , counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 is malfunctioning or the like and it cannot be recognized that the counting button 171 has been operated, it may not be possible to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of medals held", which may put the player at a disadvantage. However, if counting can be performed by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, there is no increase in costs. Note that clearing and counting may not be separated by determining the number of game medals, but may be separated into clearing and counting depending on the operating method of the number of game medals clear button 172. For example, if the button is pressed for a short time, it is cleared, and if the button is pressed for a long time, it is counted. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Further, when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the count is cleared, and when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time, it is counted. The possibility of making a mistake in operation is low, and it is easy to select between clearing and counting.

《Sub-control unit》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (gaming control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, (reel backlight, etc.) is connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit and the production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 82 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control part board 300B, a first sub-control part board 400B, a reel unit 109, and a production movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are also shown on each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 82 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 82 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 82 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Further, a reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 81. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes a game control section 302 and a medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 81, and also includes integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 326, etc. ing.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3 to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 109 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 109. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 82 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 82 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. 81. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 81 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that were supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are each supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U is driven. It becomes possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 80 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 81, and although not shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 (power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up when the power is on. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 82) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 82, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown at 82 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, it is possible that there is an abnormality in the harness MR1 or that the connectors RC1 and MC2 are not lit. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. I can do it. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is rotated manually, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 does not light up, suspect an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2. I can do it.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, there are LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs, such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL. For example, even if it is an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in a power outage state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a different purpose than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 80 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 82) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 82, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied from the movable motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 82 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, it may be due to an abnormality in the harness SD or a problem with the connectors DC1 and SC3. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

Furthermore, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 82 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 82. Hereinafter, points different from the connection example explained using FIG. 82 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In FIG. 83, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 83, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 83, since the reel relay board 902B is provided, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 82, so electrical connection failure may occur. It has become more sexual. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

Note that the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. A defective electrical connection can be confirmed by generating an induced current by manual operation in a power-off state, and by lighting up these monitor LEDs if normal.

In the description here, the left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 have been described as movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor may be used.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible. Note that these light emitting means do not move even when driven by the motor. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor, but is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted.

Note that the configuration described above is
A light emitting means;
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit having a movable body movable by driving a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state and receiving a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 84 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 80.

As shown in FIG. 84, the gaming system S includes a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 80, a lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. 80, a hall computer 600, a hall management terminal 800, an intermediate management terminal 810, and a management server 820. Note that the rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each gaming hall (hall) H1, H2, and is connected to the rental machine 700. Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information regarding the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (count information, lending information), the operating state of the slot machine 100, and other information are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided to comprehensively manage the gaming system 1, and provides information regarding the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Furthermore, the management server 820 is connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminal 810, and receives information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information regarding the number of medals and slot management terminals. Information such as the operating status of the machine 100 is also managed.

《Communication sequence and communication contents》
Commands are exchanged between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350. The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal number control unit 350 transmits a medal number control command (medal number control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control unit 350, a response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

In the communication between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 and the communication between the number of medals control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. Ru.

FIG. 85 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 85(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous state information includes information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB (RB information), information indicating whether the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It is composed of information (AT information) indicating whether or not the AT information is present. The setting status information includes information indicating whether the setting is being changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 81 (setting changing information), and information indicating whether the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation information). The front door status information is information indicating whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to help the player obtain advantageous results, such as notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notifying the symbols to be aimed at and stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 85(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of paid out tokens for accessory objects, total number of consecutive tokens paid out, information on the number of games played, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals information is information representing the number of inserted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out information is information representing the number of medals to be paid out that has been accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order for internally won winning combinations is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after entering this state. The information on the total number of tokens paid out for accessory objects is information representing the number of medals accumulated by the operation of the accessory object accumulated since the power was turned on. The total number of medals to be paid out for consecutive accessory items is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the RB, which has been accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The winning ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (accessory object ratio, continuous role object ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructional object ratio, and object condition ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling of a gaming machine. become.

The game machine installation information shown in FIG. 85(c) includes two pieces of information: game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control unit information is composed of ID number information of the IC chip of the game control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control unit information includes ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

FIG. 86 shows, from the left, a first sub-control unit 400, a game control unit 302, a medal number control unit 350, and a lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained. A medal number control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal number control section 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 86, a gaming machine information notification and a count notification are transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. Further, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350, and in response to this lending notification, the medal number control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between medal number control section 350 and lending machine 700.

FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing a data structure of a message exchanged in communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number in the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number in the counting notification, and the lending serial number in the lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when it reaches 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various types of data, and the checksum stores the lower 1 byte of the sum obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

FIG. 87(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data section of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of pachinko game machine, reel type game machine, arranged ball game machine, etc. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hole console/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using FIG. 85. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing details of the hole control/fraud monitoring information.

The game medal number information is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350.

The information on the number of inserted medals is the change in the number of inserted medals that has changed since the previous notification of gaming machine information, depending on the number of inserted medals and the number of returned medals if there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 80) is operated. The information will be (-3 to 3 pieces). That is, the information is based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the information on the number of settled medals, which are included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350.

The number of paid out medals information is information representing the number of paid out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on the information on the medal payout number included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 85(a), which was explained using FIG. In addition to this, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 88(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 88(b), the medal number control status command, various processing commands sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, and the game control priority command (error generated command).

Below, only errors that require special explanation will be explained. A medal number control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection in the medal number control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when detected. The game order abnormality is an error in which the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is outside the range of 0 to 15. That is, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out at one time is 15 coins. The mismatch in the number of coins to be paid is an error that occurs when the number of coins to be paid included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is greater than or equal to the number of inserted coins. The chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control section information shown in FIG. 85(c) is different from the previous information. The medal number control RAM error is an error indicating a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350. The rental machine communication abnormality is an error, which will be described in detail later, in which a rental notification has not been received even though the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is in an on state. Note that in any case where the various errors shown in FIG. 88(b) occur, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 80 are turned on, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker 272. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

In addition to the setting status information and front door information shown in FIG. 85 (a) explained using FIG. 85, the gaming machine fraud information includes information when fraud is detected and information indicating that the number of game medals has been cleared. Contains information and security signals indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information includes information on the current number of bets and information on the number of payouts. These two types of information are distinguished by type information. The current number of bets is included in the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. Becomes the current bet value. Further, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 87(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms includes gaming machine information of the code specified in the gaming machine information type. Stored. In other words, if the value of the game machine information type is 0, the game machine performance information, if the value of the game machine information type is 1, the game machine installation information, and if the value of the game machine information type is 2, the hall console - Fraud monitoring information is stored. Gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall console/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time period (for example, 180 seconds). The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time (for example, 60 seconds), and the hall console/fraud monitoring information is notified every third time (for example, the notification period of 300 ms), which is the shortest. If the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hole control/fraud monitoring information that receives the most notifications.

FIG. 87(c) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data part of the count notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 86, the count notification is notified within a range of 90 ms to 100 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a count notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 111, which will be described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the count button 171 shown in FIG. 80 is pressed once, the number of sheets to be counted increases by 1, and when the count button 171 is short pressed multiple times until a period of 300 ms arrives. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, if the count button 171 is held down for 500 ms or more and a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the number of sheets to be counted becomes 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet or 50 sheets at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information representing the number of medals counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The cumulative number of counted medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. FIG. 87(d) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data part of the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 86, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal number control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the counting notification. The medal number control unit 350 monitors whether or not a lending notification is sent within 170 ms using a lending notification interval timer that is set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 113, which will be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 80 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (for example, 50 medals) is is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals in response to the operation of the loan button 707 in this manner. Note that the predetermined amount or the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount can be set in advance using the lending machine 700.

FIG. 87(e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described in detail later, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the number of lending medals notified by the lending notification is 50 or less, or the number of gaming medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than a lending threshold (for example, 15,000). It is determined whether the number of loaned medals received is normal or abnormal. In the lending receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

Next, a description will be given of the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 86 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

FIG. 89 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 89 also shows command offsets used during transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, transmits a command representing setting state information (setting changing information, setting checking information). After 2.98 ms has elapsed, a command representing front door status information (door open information) is sent. This completes the transmission of gaming machine status information.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted sheet number information) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 13H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 14H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of coins to be paid out in 3 bytes (total number of coins to be paid out information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 16H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 17H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 19H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1AH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Furthermore, after 2.98ms have elapsed, the information representing the total number of paid out tokens in 3 bytes (total number of paid out tokens information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each at an interval of 2.98ms. Send by. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects in 3 bytes (information on the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game number information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 23H.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, role ratio monitor information is transmitted over five commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. In other words, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits information representing the ratio of accessories, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information representing the continuous accessory ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 26H transmits the information representing the ratio of useful objects. The command type with the upper byte of 27H is used to send information representing the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and the upper byte of the command type is 28H to send information representing the state ratio of accessories. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has passed, game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is divided into 4 times of 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 8 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 89 are repeatedly transmitted one by one every 2.98 ms. In addition, if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command will be interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 86 transmits to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be explained.

FIG. 90 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control status command is also a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 90 also shows the command offset used during transmission. The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an on state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into 1 byte each for upper and lower parts and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the lower 1 byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and after 5.96 ms, the upper 1 byte is transmitted with the command type in which the upper byte is 03H.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be counted (counted sheet number information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be lent (lending sheet number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained using FIG. 88(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 90 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, if there is a response command to the game control priority command, the transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms shown in FIG. 86 will be explained.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and information representing the number of sheets lent out. Note that the information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the counted number, and the information representing the number of lending medals are information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

Furthermore, various processing commands are also sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400. Various processing commands include, for example, a command to return to normal when the power is restored, a command to start setting changes related to changing setting values, a command to end setting changes including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and a command to change the number of sheets input. a bet command that includes a bet command, a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command that includes production information, a start lever reception command that indicates that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, and a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed. Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, a game information command containing game information, a payout start command indicating the start of payout, and the like. In addition, errors in the error generation command and error cancellation command include errors expressed by the error codes explained using FIG. This includes an open error, a rental machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, etc.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. If there is a request for retransmission from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again. FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is sent to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and when this response command is not returned, the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued. There are two types: The former game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 2. FIG. 91 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command is a command type whose upper byte is 04H and transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0 to 15), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 05H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in transmitting the payout command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The input command is a command type whose upper byte is 07H and transmits the number of sheets to be input (0 to 3 sheets), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, even when transmitting the input command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The settlement command is a command type whose upper byte is 0AH and sends the number of sheets to be paid (0 to 3 pieces), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 0BH, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, even when sending a payment command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 91 receives the game control priority command 1, it transmits a response command.

FIG. 92(b) is a diagram showing details of the response command sent back from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302.

The response command is sent in response to a payout command (payout response), sent in response to an input command (input response), and sent in response to a settlement command (payment response). There is. In the response command, the value of the upper byte, which is the value of the command type, is 00H. The dispensing response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the dispensing command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold (for example, 16,383 pieces) due to payout.

The submission response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the submission command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of input, and abnormality corresponds to failure of input or invalid input.

The payment response is a response command that includes any one of normality, abnormality, and re-request for payment command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payment, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a threshold value for payment (for example, 16,383 coins) as a result of payment. Note that the settlement threshold has the same value as the above-mentioned payout threshold.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type in which the upper byte is 01H, and includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 88(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type whose upper byte is 02H, and is a command that includes the normality of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302 or the failure of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the number of bets is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information representing the determined number of bets (current number of bets: 1 to 3) is included. This is a command.

《Design arrangement》
A predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types are arranged on each reel 110 to 112. In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range from the position where the stop operation is performed.

《Type of winning role》
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in the game, it is possible to win a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that depending on the winning combination, the internal winning results may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of gaming conditions》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game.

《Processing overview》
Hereinafter, the processing of the game control section 302, the number of medals control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 which has received this start signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including MY counters described later) are initialized. , allows operation of the WDT 314, sets initial values, etc. Note that when the settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, if it is determined in the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data in the RAM 308, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been successfully completed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 96.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random numbers obtained from the random value generation circuit 316. , determine the internally elected role. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302.

In step S106, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S107, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S108.

In step S108, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S109, medal award processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 101.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process.

Next, details of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in the game control section main process of FIG. 94 will be explained using FIG. 95. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process advances to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process advances to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation is accepted. If the setting key operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006, and if the setting key operation is not accepted, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350. If the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process advances to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, this medal insertion/start lever reception process is ended.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current number of bets) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number of coins). If the current number of bets is smaller than the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1011, and if the current bet number is greater than or equal to the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1012.

In step S1011, a process during medal insertion is executed, and the process returns to step S1001. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later using FIG. 96.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 100.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is ended.

Next, details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 95 will be described using FIG. 96. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 95.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the payment button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1102, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1103.

In step S1102, a payment button process is executed, and this medal insertion process is ended. Note that details of the payment button process will be described later using FIG. 97.

In step S1103, it is determined whether the operation of any of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process is ended.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1106. Note that this requested number of medals is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350.

In step S1106, the current number of bets and the maximum number of bets (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current number of bets is not equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1107, and if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1107, the value obtained by subtracting the current number of bets from the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet buttons 130, 132 that have been determined to have received an operation are the one-copy bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have received the operation is the one-copy bet button 130, the process advances to step S1109, otherwise the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 described above, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number of coins becomes 0. Also, if the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, if the current number of bets is 0 against the maximum number of bets of 3, the requested number is 3, and if the current number of bets is 1 The required number of coins is 2, and if the current number of bets is 2, the required number of coins is 1. Further, if the one bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1112. The details of the process of transmitting the variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 98.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1113; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, and the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is ended.

Next, details of the payment button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 96 will be explained using FIG. 97. This figure is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 96.

First, in step S1201 that is executed first, a payment button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is ended.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet amount are set, and the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1206. The details of the process of transmitting the variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 98.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", the payment button process is ended.

In step S1207, the current number of bets is set to 0, and this settlement button process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 98, the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit in the process of inserting medals in FIG. 96 (step S1111), the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit in the payment button process of FIG. ), details of the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit (step S1605) in the medal awarding process of FIG. 101 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 96, 97, and 101.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the value of the remaining number of transmissions, and the process advances to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process advances to step S1303. Note that this response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal number control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates an "abnormality".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is any error status, this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended, and if there is no error status, the process advances to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 100 ms) is set to the value of the response standby timer, and the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, the value of the remaining number of transmissions is subtracted by 1, and the process advances to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, this process of transmitting the variation information to the medal number control unit is ended.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. Note that details of this three-command transmission process will be described later using FIG. 99.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal number control unit 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "re-request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the reception result is other than that, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is stored as a response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, using FIG. 99, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in FIG. 98 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command consisting of a group of three consecutive commands, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. 92(a) is It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 that is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 100.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a command serial number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 100.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 100.

Next, using FIG. 100, the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 95 (step S1014) and the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and S1409) will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 95 and 99.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, details of the medal granting process (step S109) in the game control section main process of FIG. 94 will be explained using FIG. 101. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 94.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be paid out is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1601.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1605. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 98) is executed, and the process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is ended.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process advances to step S1601.

《Game control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the game control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger to trigger the game control unit timer interrupt. start the loading process at a predetermined period.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing corresponding to various errors such as an abnormality in the communication state with the medal number control unit 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door is performed. Note that if there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, medal number control command reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 104.

In step S207, a game control command transmission process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 105.

In step S208, a performance command transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main process, timer interrupt process, etc. of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, where bit 15 is strobe information (when turned on, it indicates that data is being set), and bit 11 is strobe information. -14 are command types (for example, basic commands, bet commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal winning commands, reel rotation start commands associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and commands associated with acceptance of operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands when the reels 110 to 112 stop, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), bits 0 to 3 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the game control unit 302. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Further, various lamps 336 and various seven segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the game control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal".

Next, using FIG. 103, details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 102, will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 102.

First, in step S2001 that is executed first, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 0, the process advances to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 0, the process advances to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2003, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2004, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process advances to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process is ended. In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2007, and if there is any error status, this disconnection determination process is ended.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is ended.

Next, details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 102 will be explained using FIG. 104. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 102.

First, in step S2101 that is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process advances to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2102, information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal number control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal number control status commands (FIG. 90) and response commands (FIG. 92(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2104, and if there is any error status, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command that includes an error code (an error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. Note that if there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating normality will be set in the error status, but in this case, there will be no error status.

Next, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 102 will be explained using FIG. 105. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 102.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 89) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as explained using FIG. 89, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in order from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Among the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, the last command (41st transmitted command) is a check generated based on the transmitted contents of the previous commands. It's Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are output to the medal number control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). Note that the information output here is received by the medal number control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off, the process advances to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process advances to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal number control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

《Medal number control section main processing》
Next, the medal number control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. 106. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control section.

As described above, the medal number control section 350 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 that receives this activation signal starts a reset by the reset interrupt and executes the medal number control section main processing shown in FIG. 106 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, a power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt cycle is set. be done. Furthermore, communication circuit settings, etc. are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Note that details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later using FIG. 107.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Note that details of this preparation process will be described later using FIG. 110. In step S304, a gaming machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S305. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 111.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S306. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 113.

In step S306, a rental notification reception confirmation process is executed, and the process advances to step S307. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 114.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a process for transmitting a loan receipt result response is executed, and the process returns to step S304. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 115.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described using FIG. 107. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 that is executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process advances to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358, and the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage, and if these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. , if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 108, the normal RAM clear processing has the least number of objects to be cleared. In addition to the area for storing information during gaming, the RAM 358 includes an area for storing hardware information such as chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and information received from the gaming control unit 302. There is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, but in normal RAM clearing processing, the area that stores information during the game is mainly cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3006. The all RAM clear process clears the most areas among the four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 108, the entire area is cleared.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM defective" is stored as RAM defect information, and the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process advances to step S3008.
In step S3008, if the game medal number clear button 172 is being operated, the process advances to step S3009, and if it is not being operated, the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process advances to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal number clear detection information, and the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal on from the game control section 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal on is detected, the process advances to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not a gaming control unit RAM clear command among the gaming control priority commands shown in FIG. 92(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process advances to step S3017, and if it has not been received, the process advances to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates clearing is "normal", the process advances to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate "normal", the process advances to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 108, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 108, the area excluding chip information etc. is cleared.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as RAM defect information, the process advances to step S3021; if information indicating "RAM defect" is not stored as RAM defect information, this RAM abnormality determination process is ended. do.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. Note that details of this error request setting process will be described later using FIG. 109.

Next, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process etc. in FIG. 107 will be described using FIG. 109. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 107 and the like.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code has already been set, the error request setting process is ended.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 88(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 88(b), the process advances to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process is ended.

Next, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described using FIG. 110. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 106.

First, in step S3201 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal number control unit 350 is updated. Note that this information is stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeatedly executed while the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described using FIG. 111. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 106.

First, in step S3301 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment). In step S3303, the value of the count notification interval timer is set to a value equivalent to 90 ms.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 112.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, preparations are made to send the gaming machine performance information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, preparations are made to send the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine information type is prepared to be sent. If the value of the machine information type is 2, preparations are made to transmit hole control/fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process advances to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3308, the value of the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to zero.

In step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b)) are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification sending process of FIG. 111 will be described using FIG. 112. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 111.

First, in step S3401 that is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3404, 2 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is ended.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described using FIG. 113. This figure is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 106.

First, in step S3501 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, the rental notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3508, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always in an on state and is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 if it is normal.

In step S3508, if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process advances to step S3509, and if the planned number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process advances to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the number of coins to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3511, and if the number of coins to be counted is less than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set to the number of medals to be counted.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S3514, the value of the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to OFF.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number is added to the cumulative number of medals. In step S3518, the cumulative number of medals is transmitted to lending machine 700.

In step S3519, the checksum is transmitted to rental machine 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described using FIG. 114. This figure is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 106.

First, in step S3601 that is executed first, if the rental notification reception flag is off, the process advances to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3603, and if the same value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the rental notification reception confirmation process is ended. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state.

In step S3604, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 115, details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 106 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 106.

First, in step S3701 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to OFF.

In step S3703, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the lending serial number is set in the checking lending serial number. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 118), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the length of the message, the command type, the normal lending serial number, the receipt result of the number of lending sheets, and the checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the previous transmission content.

In step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending reception result response transmission process is ended.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission from step S3707 to step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process ends.

《Medal number control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the medal number control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. 116. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the medal number control section timer interrupt processing.

The medal number control section 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the medal number control section timer to be activated. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S402, in order to prevent the count value of the WDT from exceeding the initial setting value and a WDT interrupt from occurring (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality), the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the medal count control unit timer is used). The restart is performed once every 0.745ms, which is the interrupt cycle.

In step S403, input port status update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input ports are stored in the signal status storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, rental notification reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 117.

In step S405, processing for updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 119.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 120.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 131.

In step S408, a medal number control command transmission process to the game control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 132.

In step S409, display processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 133.

In step S410, timer update processing is performed to update various timers in respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (a power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the medal number control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power recovery, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal". Note that when the gaming control unit 302 detects a power cutoff, similar processing (step S214 in FIG. 102) is executed, but the processing here ends before the processing on the gaming control unit 302 side ends. If this happens, commands from the game control section 302 cannot be received. In order to avoid such a problem, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the processing here ends after the processing on the game control section 302 side ends.

Next, details of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be described using FIG. 117. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4001 that is executed first, the lending notification reception flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental machine 700, the process advances to step S4003, and if not received, this rental notification reception process is ended.

In step S4003, information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, a loan number determination process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 118.

In step S4005, the determination result in step S4004 is set as the result of receiving the number of lending sheets.

In step S4006, the rental notification reception flag is set to ON, and this rental notification reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 118, details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of FIG. 117 will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 117.

First, in step S4101 that is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the data of the received rental notification.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, the number of borrowed sheets is determined. Finish the process.

In step S4104, the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notification is compared with the value of the confirmation rental serial number stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process advances to step S4105, and if the two are different, this rental The number of sheets determination process ends. Note that if the previous lending notification was received normally, the confirmation lending serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 115 (updated from the previously received lending serial number). .

In step S4105, if the received lending notification message length and command type information correspond to the lending notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, this lending number determination process ends. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 0, the process advances to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process advances to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process advances to step S4108, and if the same value is 15,000 or more, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information type of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification was 2, that is, whether the gaming machine information notification was about hole con/fraud monitoring information, and the value of the gaming machine information type is determined. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109, and if the same value is not 2, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4109, if the value of the counted number in the previously transmitted counting notification is 0, the process advances to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 50 or less, the process advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of rental sheets ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and this lending number determination process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 119, details of the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process (step S405) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 116 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4201 that is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S4213. In addition, this VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the rental machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state if it is normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process advances to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process advances to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4206, the value of the counting long press timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 500 ms), and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process advances to step S4208, and if the same value is not 1, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process advances to step S4211, and otherwise, this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4213, the counting long press flag is set to OFF.

In step S4214, the value of the count long press timer is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

Next, details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 116 will be explained using FIG. 120. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4301 that is executed first, if switching from OFF to ON of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, the process advances to step S4302, and in other cases, this game control unit command reception processing end.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a gaming control state command, the process advances to step S4304, and if the received command is not a gaming control state command (it is a gaming control priority command), the process advances to step S4305. In step S4304, gaming control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 121.

In step S4305, a game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 122.

Next, details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 120 will be described using FIG. 121. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 120.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process advances to step S4404, and if the received command is any other command, the process advances to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, and a check is made in which the last command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. This is a command to send a thumb. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process advances to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated according to the contents of the 1st to 40th commands in step S4403 is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the gaming control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is considered normal. It is determined, and the process advances to step S4405, and if the two are different, this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 85(a)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process advances to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquisition chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in the RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID obtained in step S4408 match, the process advances to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process advances to step S4414.

In step S4410, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 85(c)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358. Through steps S4411 and S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 85(b) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and this gaming control state command receiving process is ended.

Next, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 120 will be explained using FIGS. 122 and 123. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 120.

First, in step S4501 that is executed first, if a triple command has been received, the process advances to step S4502, and if the command is other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. 123. As mentioned above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. 92(a) is is a triple command. That is, if the above triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to step S4502 in FIG. 123. The process will proceed to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 and the contents thereof are stored in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process advances to step S4507. If they are different, this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag to be described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510. In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is equal to the value of the gaming control command serial number (gaming control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), step S4511 If the two are different, the process advances to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. 123.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 109 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4514 of FIG. 123, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process advances to step S4515; otherwise, the process advances to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process advances to step S4517; otherwise, the process advances to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 124.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process advances to step S4519; otherwise, the process advances to step S4520.

In step S4519, payment command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 125.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process advances to step S4521; otherwise, the process advances to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 126.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process advances to step S4523; otherwise, the process advances to step S4524.

In step S4523, payout command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 128.

In step S4523, error command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 130.

Next, details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 122 and 123 will be explained using FIG. 124. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 123.

First, in step S4601 that is executed first, information indicating "re-request" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process is ended.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands), the process advances to step S4605; otherwise, this input command Ends reception processing.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception processing is ended.

Next, details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 122 and 123 will be explained using FIG. 125. This figure is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 123.

First, in step S4701 that is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4702, if the current value of the bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this payment command receiving process is ended.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "inconsistency in number of paid sheets" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and this settlement command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 122 and 123 will be explained using FIG. 126. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 123.

First, in step S4801 that is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the game interval abnormality timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds).

In step S4804, the type information setting value is set to 11H (see FIG. 88(a)), and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the game control unit 302) is set as the count information setting value. Ru. Here, the set information is later included in gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception processing is ended. Note that details of the game information setting process will be described later using FIG. 127.

In step S4807, information indicating "gaming interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the gaming information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever acceptance command receiving process in FIG. 126 and the gaming information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command receiving process in FIG. 128 will be described using FIG. 127. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 126 and 128.

First, in step S4901 that is executed first, the number of game information is incremented by one.

In step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (it is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 126 or step S4A14 in FIG. 128) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the value of the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is ended. Here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 126 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 128 is set as type information 1. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 126) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the value of the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 126) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process is ended.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided in order to transmit information about both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the rental machine 700). It is something that That is, when payout information (step S4A14, etc. in FIG. 128) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (step S4804, etc. in FIG. 126) is set in type information 2 and count information 2. may be set to . Note that from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be sent (cleared) to the lending machine 700, so the payout information may not be the type information. 2 and count information 2 is never set.

Next, details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 122 and 123 will be explained using FIG. 128. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 123.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, the game medal number clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the player wins in the replay, the process advances to step S4A04, and if the player does not win in the replay, the process advances to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of payout coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the three commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands). In step S4A09, information indicating "game order abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

In step S4A11, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 129.

In step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process advances to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command receiving process is ended.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 88(a)) is set as the type information setting value.

In step S4A15, if the replay winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the game control section 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set in the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A17, the current bet amount is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process shown in FIG. 127 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 128 will be explained using FIG. 129. This figure is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 128.

First, in step S4B01 that is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended. In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 130, details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 122 and 123 will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 123.

First, in step S4C01 that is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control section 302, the error on the medal number control section 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control section 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "gaming control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if information indicating "abnormality in the game order" (error code E2) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8) is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if information indicating "defective game control RAM" (error code rE) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08, otherwise, this error command reception process is ended.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is ended. By setting this flag on, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 122).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be described using FIG. 131. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4D01 which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04. In step S4D02, information indicating "gaming control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and the process advances to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process advances to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and this error monitoring process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 132, details of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 116 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, the information of the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-mentioned power-on flag is off, the process advances to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control unit is ended.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be sent to the gaming control unit 302 (response command set in any of the input command reception process in FIG. 124, the settlement command reception process in FIG. 125, or the payout command reception process in FIG. 128) is set. If no response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E05, and if some response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). This embodiment employs a configuration in which the medal number control section 350 repeatedly transmits the medal number control state commands (six types of commands) explained using FIG. 90 to the game control section 302 in order. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into an upper byte and a lower byte and transmitted using two of six types of commands; The value of the number of game medals acquired when transmitting the first command is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in any of the input command reception processing of FIG. 124, the settlement command reception processing of FIG. 125, or the payout command reception processing of FIG. 128 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any of the input command reception processing of FIG. 124, the settlement command reception processing of FIG. 125, or the payout command reception processing of FIG. 128 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the strobe counter value is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the same value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process advances to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. Note that this value is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are output to the game control section 302, and the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control section ends. Note that the information output here is received by the game control unit 302 side when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process in FIG. 116 will be described using FIG. 133. This figure is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 116.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if they are the same value, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the value of the number of game medals for display.

In step S4F05, the value of the number of game medals for display is subtracted by 1.

In step S4F06, a value equivalent to 4 ms is set to the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display display process is ended.

《Modification 1》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 1) of the process related to medal insertion will be explained using FIGS. 134 to 136. 134 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 96, FIG. 135 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 99, and FIG. 136 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 124. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 134, among the processes shown in FIG. 96, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 96 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In the modification shown in FIG. 135, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 99, and step S1421 is provided. This process will be explained below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In the modification shown in FIG. 136, step S4603 of the processing shown in FIG. 124 is deleted. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided beyond the route of No in the determination of step S4604, and furthermore, step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4621, information on the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is referred to, and if the flag is off, the process advances to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of medals included in the received command (the first command among the three commands), that value is set as the value of the number of game medals, and the process advances to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is set to 0, and the process advances to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this submitted command reception processing is ended.

《Modification 2》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 2) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 119.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 137, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. 119. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and further, step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the press time of the count button 171.

In step S4222, the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171.

《Modification 3》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 3) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 119.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 138, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. 119. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the route of No in the determination of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are further provided before step S4210. Furthermore, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process advances to step S4232, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process advances to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 139. Note that FIG. 139(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 139(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 139(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S501. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed. Note that details of this command processing will be described later using FIG. 139(d).

In step S509, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the effect data read in step S509, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 139(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 139(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 139(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, the device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S515, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 139(a) will be described using FIG. 139(d). This figure is a flowchart of command processing (step S507) in FIG. 139(a).

First, in step S541 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S543; otherwise, this command processing is ended.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 140. Note that FIG. 140(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 140(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 140(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 140(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 140(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S609, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 140(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603. Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 140(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 140(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 140(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 140(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S625; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S625, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S631; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S631, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

《Operation explanation》
The operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained below.

[Operation when power is turned on]
In the medal number control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clearing processing is performed and the state returns to the state when the power was turned off (Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 107). Note that when the power is turned on for the first time, it is in the initial state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No determination in step S3003 in FIG. 107). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM defect" in the RAM defect information, information indicating "RAM defect" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 107). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 109). This error information is transmitted to the game control section 302 (FIG. 132), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 104 and 95). Note that even if the game control section 302 receives an error from the medal number control section 350, the contents of the RAM are not cleared. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, by setting the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON, various information is updated (initialized) when receiving the gaming control unit status command (FIG. 107). (Yes in step S3007 and step S4407 in FIG. 121).

Further, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 94). The medal number control unit 350 that has received this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 107). At this time, the medal number control unit 350 once permits the interrupt process, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, disables the interrupt process and performs the subsequent process. The process upon reception can be reliably executed (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 107). Furthermore, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 107).

In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of game medals can be initialized by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of Yes in step S3008 in FIG. 107). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the gaming medal number clear detection information, but while this information is set, information regarding this clearing is included in the gaming machine information notification and the rental machine 700 (Fig. 111). Note that the game medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 128).

[Transmission of game control status commands (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, game control status commands consisting of 41 types (see FIG. 89) are transmitted to the medal number control unit 350. . Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control status commands are sent one by one to the medal number control unit. It is set in the buffer (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 105). However, if the game control priority command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 105).

After the game control status command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set on (step S2208 in FIG. 105). ). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control unit 350 side receives a command. Note that the strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt processing and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 105), but the output from the I/O port remains unchanged. . This makes it possible to more stably receive commands on the medal number control unit 350 side. When the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 105). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time one interrupt process is executed. In addition, while the transmission state continues for 1.49ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98ms), the gaming control unit 302 has two reception timings (interrupt processing of 0.745ms is performed twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

[Transmission of game control priority command (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control status command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but the game control priority command gives priority to the medal number control unit 350 depending on the game status in the game control unit main process. It is transmitted to the number control section 350. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the gaming control command transmission processing (FIG. 105), the gaming control command transmission processing is executed in the next timer interrupt processing (the next gaming control status command is The game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing before the game control state command is set in the transmission buffer, so that the game control priority command is given priority to the medal number control unit 350. The game control priority commands include the input command associated with the operation of inserting game medals, the settlement command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets, the start lever reception command associated with acceptance of start lever operation, and the input command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets. There are payout commands associated with payout, error generation commands associated with error occurrence, and RAM clear commands associated with RAM clearing (FIG. 92(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals, the second command is a command that includes the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals. This command includes a checksum based on the contents of two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the values of the upper bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

Note that if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information indicating “request”, the command is retransmitted. (No determination in step S1308 in FIG. 98, No determination in step S1310) exceeds the upper limit number of retransmissions, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal number control unit 350. (No determination in step S1302 and step S1306).

Furthermore, if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information other than “request”, this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command sequence number is incremented by 1 (see Figure 98 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)]
When a game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals (requested number) required by this operation is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 96). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, the 1 bet button and the MAX bet button, can be used to perform the placing operation. If the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required to set the maximum bet amount is set to the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 96), and if the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is set to the requested number of medals. is set (step S1109 in FIG. 96). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the insertion operation (No determination in step S1106 in FIG. 96).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the input command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 96, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 99, and FIG. 100). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 105).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 105), the checksum is updated, and the upper byte data is added to 1. The command is added and updated to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands that make up the input command) is sent to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command in the transmission buffer is sent to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 105), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. At the same time, a command consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum (the third of the commands composing the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 99). ~S1411, Figure 100). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The input command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above-described flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 96).

Note that in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the process of the input command described above is not executed (No determination in step S1104 in FIG. 96).

In addition, even if the bet button is operated, the input command is not sent from the time the input command is sent until the response command is received from the medal number control unit 350 (step S1112 in FIG. 96 receives the response command). ).

Further, when the bet button is operated, the command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a response command to the input command is received or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350. (Step S1114 in FIG. 96). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payment operation (transmission of payment command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current number of bets is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current number of bets can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current number of bets is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 in FIG. 96, step S1203 in FIG. 97).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the payment command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 97, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 99, and FIG. 100). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 105).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as that for the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

A settlement command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the current value of the number of bets becomes 0. is set (Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 97).

In the above example, the current bet value becomes 0 after receiving the response command (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the current bet value is subtracted). Therefore, in the state before receiving the response command, the value of the current bet number has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added to the number of game medals in the medal number control unit 350 that has received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If a response command indicating "normality" is not received, the current bet value will not be subtracted and an error will occur (No determination in step S1206 in FIG. 97), but this error can be avoided by some means. Then, since the value of the current number of bets is not subtracted, as a result, the number of medals increases by the amount that the number of game medals is added by the medal number control unit 350, and game medals are fraudulently acquired by the settlement operation. It turns out. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the value of the current number of bets is set to 0 before and after sending the settlement command, and a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command is not used). Note that in a configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication status may not be detected, but by using a configuration that uses response commands for input commands, errors in the communication status can be detected, so communication quality will not deteriorate. You can do it like this. Note that a command index may be managed between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350, and an error may be determined when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on incorrect information from being performed.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the payment and may treat it as an error. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

It should be noted that if a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the processing of the above settlement command is not executed (No determination in step S1202 in FIG. 97).

Furthermore, when the payment button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not a payment command is sent or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 97). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the payment button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is greater than or equal to the startable number, the upper byte data indicating that it is a start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value. A command consisting of (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 95). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a payout winning combination is won, the value of the payout number is set to the number of game medals (requested number) required for payout (step S1602 in FIG. 101). Next, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 99, and FIG. 100). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 102, FIG. 105) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 105).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as the input command, the explanation will be omitted. The payout command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is “normal”, the payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. A command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 101). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and the payout cannot be accepted, so the command indicating this state is 1 sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 101). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can perform an effect corresponding to the overflow. Note that if the overflow condition is not resolved, the retransmission of the payout command is repeated and the game becomes unable to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171. Once the overflow condition is resolved, the performance corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can be played. That is, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with the situation by himself without calling a store clerk.

[Operation when receiving medal number control command]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 104), it determines the type of this command (game control status command (FIG. 90) or response command (FIG. 92). (b)), and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the type of command (step S2102 in FIG. 104).The response commands for the input command, settlement command, and payout command are the contents updated here. In addition, if the received command is a command that includes an error code, this error code will be used as an error code in the game control unit 302, provided that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set. The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 104).

[Transmission of medal number control command (from medal number control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal number control state commands (see FIG. 90) are transmitted to the game control section 302. Specifically, by the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit 350 that sends a medal number control command to the gaming control unit (step S408 in FIG. 116, FIG. 132), one medal number control state command is sent. 132 (Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 132). However, if the response command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S4E04 of FIG. 132).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 132). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 132), the command will be received on the game control section 302 side. In addition, in managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that is incremented by 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, it is set to on. It is set to off between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 132). Note that the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 132). In other words, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. . In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98ms (0.745ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49ms interrupt processing), so the command It is possible to prevent omissions.

[Operation when receiving game control status command]
When the medal number control section 350 receives a command from the game control section 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 120), if this command is a game control state command, the game control state command reception process (FIG. 120) is performed. Step S4304 (FIG. 121) is executed.

As for the game control state command, 41 types of commands (FIG. 89) are sequentially transmitted, but among these, the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of FIG. 121). judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 121, S4410-S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in RAM and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match. (Yes in step S4409 in FIG. 121). Note that if the IDs do not match, error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 121). In addition, if all RAM is cleared in the medal number control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM has been cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the above chip ID check is not performed. The update process is executed (the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is turned on in FIG. 107, and the determination is No in step S4407 of FIG. 121).

[Operation when receiving game control priority command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 120), if this command is a game control priority command, the game control priority command reception process (FIG. 120) is performed. Step S4305, FIG. 122, FIG. 123) is executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 123).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (input command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 122), and the third command is If so, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if it is abnormal, information indicating "request" is sent as a response command. (Steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 122).

Next, if the gaming control command serial number update flag is on, the gaming control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the gaming control command serial number updating flag is set to off (Fig. 122 (Yes determination in step S4507). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error has been resolved (FIG. 130).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 122). Since both the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 increment the command serial number by 1 (step S1312 in FIG. 98, step S4511 in FIG. 122), these values will match if there is no abnormality. Note that if these values do not match, error code E3 is set to the error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 122).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 123).

[Operation when receiving input command]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, input command reception processing is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 123, FIG. 124). In this process, if the value included in the input command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of coins) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of coins is added to the number of medals inserted, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, After the number of game medals requested to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 124). Note that if the requested number of coins to be inserted is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 124). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 111).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to on (step S3509 in FIG. 113), and when this flag is on, information indicating "re-request" is included in the response command. is set (No determination in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 124).

[Operation when receiving payment command]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 123, FIG. 125). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as the number of coins requested for settlement) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 125). If the current value of the number of bets is 0, the number of coins requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the number of coins requested for settlement is added to the number of gaming medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 125). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 111). Note that if the current bet number is not 0, error code E6 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4702 of FIG. 125).

[Operation when receiving start lever reception command]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 126). If this flag is not set to on, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 126), the initial value is set in the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 126), and further, game information is set. The processing to do so is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 126). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates reception of the start lever. Further, the current bet amount is set in the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the rental machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 111). Note that if the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, error code E5 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4802 in FIG. 126). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 94) in the game control unit 302, but by using this timer in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, Preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving a payout command]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, first the game medal number clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on, but the configuration is such that this information is sent to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when this payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A02 of FIG. 128). This flag is set to ON when the start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used to prevent fraud.

Next, if the player has won a prize in the replay, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 128). In cases other than replay winnings, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid out coins) is 15 or less, the value of the number of paid out coins is set to the number of paid out medals and the additional value of the number of game medals, respectively (Fig. 128 steps S4A07, S4A08). Note that the value of the number of payout medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 111). Note that if the number of coins to be paid out is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A05 and step S4A06 in FIG. 128).

Subsequently, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 128, FIG. 129). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is less than or equal to 16383, which is the upper limit for the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 129). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit for the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 129). In addition, regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as described later (see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control unit 350)]), in actual operation, the number of game medals is equal to the actual threshold value. If it exceeds the actual threshold value, it cannot be increased by dispensing (response command ``abnormal''), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by dispensing (response command ``normal''). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment); for example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 128). Furthermore, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 128). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates that there has been a payout. Further, the number of coins to be paid out (the current number of bets in the case of replay winnings) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the rental machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 111).

[Game machine information notification (regularly sent from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S304 in FIG. 106, FIG. 111). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 111). In addition, 90 ms is set to the count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification (step S3303 in FIG. 111).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting and determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transferring the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set as the number of game medals for count determination (step S3304 in FIG. 111).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall console/fraud monitoring information (Figure 87 (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hole console/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 112). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at approximately 60-second intervals, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type at approximately 180-second intervals, and 2 is set to the gaming machine information type at other times. . In other words, in gaming machine information notifications with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly includes hole control and fraud monitoring information, but gaming machine installation information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and about 180 seconds. Gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. The data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b)), including gaming machine information according to these gaming machine information types, is set in the sending buffer to the lending machine (step S3306 in FIG. 111). ), are transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 111). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 111).

In addition, the hole console/fraud monitoring information corresponding to gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid out medals, and the number of gaming information, but this information is not sent to the lending machine. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 111).

[Count notification (periodically sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S305 in FIG. 106, FIG. 113). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 111, step S3501 in FIG. 113).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be notified of the counting (FIGS. 87(a) and 87(c)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 113). , S3519). Note that the counting sequence number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 113).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 in FIG. 113, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 113). On the other hand, if the number of tokens to be counted is set to a value other than 0, the number of tokens to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 113), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 113). step S3514). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 113). The scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 116, FIG. 119).

[Setting of planned number of medals to be counted (number of medals control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, the scheduled number of medals to be counted is updated in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 116, FIG. 119). In this process, the number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and a count notification containing this information is transmitted to lending machine 700.

First, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 119), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms have passed since it was pressed), the count button 171 is The long press flag is not set to on (Yes is not determined in step S4207 in FIG. 119). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (Yes in step S4210 of FIG. 119, step S4212).

Next, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 119), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500ms have passed since the press was pressed), the count long press flag is set to ON and the count is started. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 119). After that, as long as the counting button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and each time a counting notification is sent, the number of sheets to be counted is based on this scheduled number of sheets. will be set. On the other hand, if you release the counting button 171 while the count long press flag is on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 119). Yes is determined in step S4211, and No is determined in step S4211).

[Rental notification (regularly sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 117). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification and the checksum included in the rental notification match (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 118). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation lending serial number of the medal number control unit 350 and the lending serial number included in the lending notification match (step S4104 in FIG. 118). Note that the confirmation lending serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 115), and is configured so that they match if communication is normal. has been done. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rental sheets included in the rental notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 118). On the other hand, if the number of lending sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (No determination in step S4106 in FIG. 118).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4107 in FIG. 118). In this embodiment, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it is configured such that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is possible. It will behave the same. Further, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase the number by lending, and in other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the same operation as in this embodiment is performed. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending. , it is sufficient that there exists a value that is the actual threshold value, and any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment).For example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process. do not have.

Alternatively, the above determination may be made based on the added number of game medals instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a value that is an actual threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. That is, this configuration can also be said to be such that in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4108 in FIG. 118). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4109 in FIG. 118). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes do not coexist.

Finally, if the number of lending sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4110 in FIG. 118). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (Yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 118).

The determination result of the above process is set as the rental number receipt result, and the rental notification reception flag is set on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 117).

In addition to the above lending notification reception process, the medal number control section 350 executes a lending notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control section main processing (step S306 in FIG. 106, FIG. 114). In this rental notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the rental notification reception flag is on for 170ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 113, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 114). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 116, FIG. 117).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the rental notification reception flag is not turned on by the time 170ms elapses from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 114). The value of this rental machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when executing the rental machine reception result response transmission (step S3701 in FIG. 115), but if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter reaches 1, an error occurs (Fig. 131 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, after the lending notification reception confirmation process, if the lending notification reception flag is set to on, the lending reception result response transmission process is executed in the medal number control unit main processing (steps in FIG. 106). S308, FIG. 115).

In this rental reception result response transmission process, parameters related to rental machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 115).

Subsequently, if the lending number reception result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 115). Further, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is set as the confirmation lending serial number, 1 is added to the value of the confirmation lending serial number (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 115). That is, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notification.

Subsequently, the data to be the subject of the lending reception result response (Figs. (a) and (e)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in Fig. 115). Through the above process, if the result of receiving the number of borrowed sheets is "normal", the currently received loan serial number will be sent; if the result of receiving the number of loaned sheets is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be sent. . Note that if the result of receiving the number of lending medals is "normal", the value of the number of lending medals is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 115).

[Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 102). For example, if a strobe signal for command transmission from the medal number control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 103). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350. If the error status is set, a process to notify that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 95, step S1603 in FIG. 101). Therefore, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal number control section 350 side. For example, if there is no error on the game control section 302 side, an error on the medal number control section 350 side is notified. will be done. Further, the error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 102).

[Operation in response to error (medal number control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, if it is determined that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 107, step S4414 in FIG. 121, step S4512 in FIG. 122, step S4706 in FIG. 125, Step S4807, Step S4A05 in FIG. 128, Step S4A09 in FIG. 128, Step S4D02 in FIG. 131, Step S4D06 in FIG. 131, FIG. 109). This error code information is transmitted to the game control section 302 by the medal number control state command. Note that when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 130). Thereby, the configuration is such that an error on the game control section 302 side is processed more preferentially than an error on the medal number control section 350 side.

[Modified example of input operation]
134 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 96, FIG. 135 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 99, and FIG. 136 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 124. be. The operations performed by these processes will be described below.

In the process of inserting medals in FIG. 96, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current number of bets, and an insert command including this information is sent to the medal number control unit 350. (Figure 99). On the other hand, in FIG. 134, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the number-of-insertion limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 134), and the 1 bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 134). Then, an input command including information on the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (FIG. 135).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 136, if there is a number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is The response command is returned to the game control unit 302 (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 136). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 134).

In the input command reception process of FIG. 136, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number, the input number limitation flag is referred to (No determination in step S4604 of FIG. 136). If the input number limited flag is on, no processing is performed on the requested number of coins, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No determination in step S4621 in FIG. 136). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 134), so the current number of bets is maintained without changing. It turns out.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 136, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number and the input number limitation flag is off, the same operation as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number will occur (see FIG. 136). (Yes is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to become zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by the response command. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 134).

In the above modified example, if the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested in the input command is not sufficient, if the input number limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number of tokens, and if the input number limit flag is off, then 0 is returned for the requested number of medals. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number. With this configuration, when the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302, the operation of not responding and the operation of responding as much as possible are used. A limited flag) is sent together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet number, it may be possible to prevent the current bet number from unintentionally becoming a disadvantageous value.

Note that in this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, the value required to set the maximum bet amount is set as the requested number of coins. A configuration may also be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets, as shown in FIG.

For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, if the 1 bet button 130 is operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. When an input command is transmitted with the maximum bet number as the requested number, the medal number control unit 350 does not accept this requested number (exceeds the maximum bet number). In this case as well, there will be a case where the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302. In such cases, by sending the information for proper usage and the requested number of sheets together, you can choose between an action that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an action that corresponds to the requested number of sheets as much as possible (for example, returning 0 as a response command). For example, it is possible to use a command that returns the maximum bet amount as a response command.

《Operation example》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation related to counting process]
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a first example in which the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 141(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 141(a), time passes from left to right. Note that the same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 141(a), arrows are marked with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 141(b). These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170.

Further, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 141(a), the timing at which the count notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The number of coins counted (the number of gaming values transmitted to the rental machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Furthermore, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "counted number". Furthermore, below that, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 141, the operation of the counting button 171 is started when the "number of game medals" is 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 141(b), the number "250" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after starting the operation of the counting button 171, the counting button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171. Even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the counting button 171 continues to be operated, becomes a long-press operation, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets (step S4209 of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 119). ). In the following description, operating the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more will be referred to as a long press, and operating the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting the operation will be referred to as a short press. The scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 119 is executed at a 0.7 ms cycle, and while the counting button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is updated at a 0.7 ms period. It continues to be overwritten with the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 141(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "250" is subtracted by "1". This change display is performed by displaying a number subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals by the display display process shown in FIG. 133. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. Display (a display that is performed before displaying the number of game medals after the reduction of 50 medals, and a display that makes it clear that the number of game medals is changing) is performed. Then, when approximately 200 ms has elapsed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 141(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, the number of medals to be counted is set again based on the value of the scheduled number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 medals are sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The count notification will be sent again. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 141(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, when about 200 ms have elapsed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 141(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is the 50 medals. It will decrease to 100 pieces. It is assumed that the counting button 171 is subsequently released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-press operation of count button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of sheets to be counted (50 sheets in this case) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the "number of game medals" also remains at 100. Furthermore, since the change display is performed in a shorter time (approximately 200 ms) than the counting timing of 300 ms, after the player visually confirms the number after 50 medals have been reduced, if he/she wishes to keep that number of game medals, , by ending the operation of the counting button 171, that number of game medals can remain.

Also, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before the first counting timing arrives after you start operating the counting button 171 (if you release your hand at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 141(a)), , one sheet is added to the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 119), and when the counting timing arrives, that one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249, and the number "249" is displayed on the number of game medals display device 170.

In addition, if the counting button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the counting button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, if the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times before the counting timing arrives. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by 1 each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the counting timing arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (corresponding to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short presses so far is transmitted as a count notification.

On the other hand, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since you started operating the counting button 171 and before the first counting timing arrives (see arrow B shown in FIG. 141(a)), (If you take your hand off at the right timing), even if 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 119, so the 50 sheet counting notification will not be sent and the The value of "count" becomes 0 (a count notification with a count of 0 is sent). Similarly, if the display on the game medal number display device 170 changes from 250 to 200 over about 200 ms, and then the counting button 171 is released before the next counting timing arrives (FIG. 141(a) Even if you release your hand at the timing of arrow C shown in ), a counting notification of 50 sheets will not be sent, and the "count" value will be 0 sheets (a counting notification with a counted number of 0 sheets will be sent). ).

FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing a first example of the effect when counting is being performed.

FIG. 142 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the counting button 171 is pressed briefly and one coin is counted, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display notifying that counting is being performed. For example, if the game background display is displayed, , the display continues. Further, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272. For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, that output is continued. If a small number of counting sounds are output, they may mix in with other performance sounds and give the player a different sense of expectation than the expectation that the other performance sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If there is a large number of counting sounds, the output time will be longer, so there is less risk that the sound will mix with other performance sounds, and the effect on other performance sounds will be small. Note that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be outputted, as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is held down and 50 sheets are counted, a display notifying that counting is being performed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. . That is, as described above, the security command sent from the gaming control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound when information representing 50 sheets is transmitted as information representing the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the second sub-control unit 500 also receives information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the number of sheets to be counted, it displays a counting notification.

Furthermore, as the long press continues and 50 sheets are being counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound of "piyo piyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more. Since the length of the counting sound that is output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound that is output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds as if it is being output continuously. For example, if the counting sound is longer than 0.5 seconds, it will overlap with the counting sound that is output at the next 50 sheet counting timing, and continuity will be maintained, and the counting sound will not be output during consecutive counting periods. Continue without interruption. Continuous counting is recognized by the text display "Continuous counting" and continuous counting sounds.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing this, for example, if a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is pressed for a long time when less than 50 medals remain (for example, 10 medals remaining), 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is only a little time remaining from the change in the performance sound. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. In this embodiment, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the value of the current number of bets does not change, but in this FIG. 143, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed. This is a modification example in which a settlement process (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrease to the number of game medals) is performed beforehand.

In the example shown in FIG. 143, if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, the settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. be exposed.

In FIG. 143, the "current number of bets" is shown, and below that, the value of the "number of gaming medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is three. In response to this bet operation, three medals are subtracted from the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and the number is reduced from 68 to 65. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the counting button 171 is operated, an up edge of a signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, the number of betted coins is first returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to 68. In other words, the state returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After this cancellation, counting processing is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, 50 coins are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 18 coins.

In this example, the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" by operating the count button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 80, but the number of game medals changes due to further counting processing. You end up doing it. In this configuration, if only the current number of bets is desired to be changed, the settlement button 134 may be operated. For example, if you want to change to a 1-coin bet after placing a 3-coin bet, operate the settlement button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals" and then make a 1-copy bet again. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Incidentally, since the settlement process can be performed by operating the count button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

FIG. 144 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information representing the number of coins to be counted is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the game control unit 302 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets that are included in the security command and is sent until the number of sheets that is sent becomes 0, at which point it becomes 0 (when counting ends). Execute the counting end effect with . The counting end performance here is a performance according to the number of counts to be performed at one time.

FIG. 144(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). During counting, the effect image display device 157 displays a counting effect (for example, displays the text "Continuous counting" and outputs a counting sound, as explained using FIG. 142), and when counting is completed, a counting effect is performed. , a counting end effect 1 is performed in which characters "Counting End" are displayed on the effect image display device 157. On the other hand, FIG. 144(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a counting end performance performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). When the counting of more than a predetermined number of coins is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the character display of ``Counting completed'', a warning display of ``Be careful not to save too much'' is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear. Therefore, it is desirable that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals." Therefore, it is preferable to provide notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. The alert display described using FIG. 144(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the count button 171, and urges the lending machine 700 to transfer gaming value appropriately. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative number of sheets counted. For example, if the cumulative count is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative count exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect B is performed. shall be carried out. Further, counting performance A is a performance that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting performance B is a performance that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative number of coins may give an unfavorable impression to the player.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be explained.

FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such conventional slot machines, the subject of actual medal settlement processing includes not only the betted medals but also the stored medals (for example, the maximum number of medals that can be bet is 3 and the maximum number that can be stored is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be processed for settlement.) When this payment process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying a demo screen on the effect image display device 157. That is, there is a certain amount of time while the payment processing, which may involve the physical discharge of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, a demonstration is performed. Shift to demonstration performance based on commands.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the betted medals (currently the number of bets, maximum 3), and since physical medals are not ejected, The processing time involved in payment is very short. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time related to payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is such that the performance is executed based on the execution of the payment process, this performance will only be performed for a short period of time before the demonstration performance, and there is a risk that the performance will feel strange to the player. There is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 145, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 performs a production based on this settlement button command. (output of checkout sound, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 145, when the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed. As a result of this settlement operation, the number of betted medals (3 medals) is added to the "number of game medals" and becomes 68 medals from 65 medals.

FIG. 145 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. Even if the payment operation is performed, the payment sound is not output from the speaker 272. Further, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the payment display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 145 immediately switches to demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demo command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration more clear.

In addition, the specification may be such that the payment performance is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While this payment performance is being executed, the payment performance is continued even if the demonstration performance has been started, so that both performances are executed. Although it is expected that the frequency of checkout operations will be lower than with conventional slot machines, there is a non-zero possibility that checkout operations will be carried out due to fraud (so-called cheating), so it is possible that there are checkout operations in the surrounding area. Let everyone know what happened.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes depending on the length of time for which the counting button 171 is operated will be described.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 119, the scheduled count number updating process shown in FIG. 137 is adopted.

FIG. 146(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. 137. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press step value. That is, until the value of the long press step value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press step value increases, the value of the counting long press timer decreases by a predetermined period of time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the counting long press timer is gradually becoming shorter. When the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 146(b) is a table showing specific values of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 137. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. That is, until the value of the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press stage value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30, etc., the result is a stepwise increase. When the long press step value is 4 or more, the number of sheets to be counted is a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 146(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long press timer shown in FIG. 146(a) and the scheduled number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 146(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 146(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as an ON state.

From the time the counting button 171 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a counting long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137), and the timer is When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Then, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.9 seconds) with a long press step value of 2 is set (steps shown in FIG. 137). S4221). If the counting button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the 10 sheets set as the number of sheets to be counted will be counted at 0.9 seconds. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

Eventually, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (as shown in FIG. 137). Step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the count timing of 20 sheets will be 0. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long press step value of 4 is set (steps shown in FIG. 137). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the counting timing will arrive at 30 sheets, which was set as the number of sheets to be counted. This will be counted.

Then, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set on the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). As a result, if the counting button 171 is maintained in the operated state, 50 sheets will be counted every time the counting timing arrives.

Note that in the example described here, as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, but the operation time of the count button 171 As the timer becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the value of the long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases. Alternatively, the value of the counting long press timer may become shorter, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, the value set in the counting long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. You can.

FIG. 147(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 146(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 146(c), after the long press step value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer will be constant at the shortest time of 0.3 seconds, and the number of sheets to be counted will be constant at the maximum of 50 sheets. become. This state may continue until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300 pieces), the final stage process is executed. You may also do so. The final stage process here is a process in which, as the number of game medals decreases, the value of the count long press timer is lengthened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 147(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the "number of game medals" is set to 299 with the scheduled number of medals to be counted set to 50. The "number of game medals" is less than a certain value (300 medals).

When the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 137). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137) and becomes longer.

Eventually, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Further, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137), and becomes longer again.

If the count long press timer value becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137), and becomes even longer.

Then, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Note that a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted. Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is again set to the value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 137). Note that a value exceeding a value of 1.2 seconds (for example, a value of 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 147(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the player releases the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 becomes OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage process described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and furthermore, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer. The "number of game medals" becoming 0 is reduced. Note that if you want to set the "number of game medals" to 0, you can continue to operate the counting button 171 until the display on the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 147(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 146(c), a power outage occurs when 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 147(b), the count button 171 remains operated after the power outage occurs and until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, the medal number control unit 350 selects the maximum number of medals (in this example, 50 medals) as the number of medals to be counted. ) (step S4222 shown in FIG. 137). Even if the control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the count button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets may be set slightly smaller than the maximum number (for example, 30 sheets). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Further, although the explanation here has been about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. That is, if the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, the medal number control unit 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the counting long press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 137).

FIG. 148 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 138.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the ON state remains ON, automatic counting will be performed even if you release your hand from the counting button 171, and the count will be counted for 0.3 seconds. Each time the timing comes, 50 pieces are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reduce the number of game medals to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

Note that when automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 described using FIG. go. On the 7-segment display that is the game medal number display device 170, the change display that subtracts 1 at approximately 4ms intervals is caused by afterimages, so that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking. It may look like this. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the currently displayed number may become difficult to understand. In addition, players who choose automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "Number of game medals" to 0, and there may be cases where there is little need to display changes and show how they are being subtracted by 1. be.

Further, since there is no operation by the player during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to use a lamp or the like to notify that automatic counting is being performed. Furthermore, if there is a payout based on the game result during automatic counting, that payout is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and will be included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 149(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and 50 sheets are counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 149(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also written under the "number of medals counted". In this example, the user releases the counting button 171 when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting will automatically end and you will have to operate the counting button 171. In this case, the "number of game medals" will no longer decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after automatic counting, you can start playing quickly because there are still numbers left. There are cases where it is desired to count all the game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if you press and hold for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Note that although the certain value is set to 50 coins, a certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50 coins. After counting, you can leave your desired number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0 coins, and in a bonus game state, such as during an AT game, a certain value is set to 50 coins. Since there is a low possibility of ending the game in the bonus game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, if less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and if 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started quickly. Moreover, the reverse is also possible. If a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by issuing a notification to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started quickly.

FIG. 149(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs during automatic counting and power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 149(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power outage occurs while 50 medals are being counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives due to automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is started during a power outage and the power is restored while it is being operated, After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if 2 seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not elapsed. That is, when the first counting timing arrives after power is restored, 50 sheets are counted. Therefore, even if the user takes his hand off the counting button 171 before 2 seconds have passed after the power is restored, automatic counting is started.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 150 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 150 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the manner in which the counting button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, characters "Counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. That is, the character display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, a segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 150 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the medal number control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302 including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting, in the counted number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 sends the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information representing the number of coins to be counted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the text "Counting automatically" and a message 157m. Automatic counting status notification is performed while automatic counting is being performed. Note that while automatic counting is being performed, notification may be provided by sound or lamp. In FIG. 150, characters "Automatically counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. Further, below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as ``Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button.'' In a state where automatic counting status notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, an explanation such as ``you can play games'' is also given. In a state where automatic counting state notification is being performed, notification that game progress is possible is performed. It is reported that it is possible to proceed with the game, such as operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting. Note that during the counting process, operations on the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. In addition, since it is expected that there will be cases where you want to manually end automatic counting after automatic counting has started, if you operate the counting button 171 again after automatic counting has started, automatic counting will end. Good too. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the count button 171 is in the ON state, automatic counting is performed even if the count button 171 is released. In this example, after 2.0 seconds have elapsed and the first counting timing has arrived, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may be output from the time point when 2.0 seconds have elapsed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound is output continuously. The sound and the fourth counting sound that is output next are also output continuously. Note that in addition to the volume, rhythm, pitch, tone color, etc. may also be changed. That is, the counting sound only needs to change in stages. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Note that the volume may not increase at predetermined time intervals, and only the tone may change at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting only of instrument sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of a plurality of sounds including instrument sound A and instrument sound B, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of instrument sound A and instrument sound B. The sound is made up of a plurality of sounds, including instrument sound B and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, counting 5,000 coins earned through a game at once takes approximately 50 seconds. If the counting sound is continuously output during this period, it may be unpleasant to the user's ears, and may also be disliked by the player next to him. As a countermeasure for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and thereafter be silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, and after the counting sound has been output for a predetermined period of time, the sound may be set to a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that have a function that allows players to perform various customizations, the type of counting sound, the volume, and the way it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases), etc. The player may be able to make a selection. This can also make counting more interesting.

Furthermore, in addition to sound, a lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp or the image may be changed in stages.

FIG. 152 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171.

In the example shown in FIG. 152(a), a power outage occurs before the count button 171 is started to be operated and the count long press flag described using FIG. 119 (or FIGS. 137 and 138) is set to on. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. If the on signal is detected without an up edge being detected after the power is restored, the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has continued to be operated, and the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and restarts the process for 0.5 seconds from the time of power restoration. It is determined whether the counting button 171 remains operated until the elapsed time. Here, if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the count long press flag is set to on, and if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted at the counting timing. It is counted.

If a long press is performed after the power is restored, a long press notification may be performed. If the long press is continued at the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, the long press notification starts from this point. This means that if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the button will not be pressed for a long time, and the count will start after 0.5 seconds have elapsed and before the first counting timing arrives. If the button 171 is released, no sheets will be counted, so if the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed, the button 171 must be kept pressed for a long time. Pressing notification starts.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be due to an erroneous operation. For this reason, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be determined that the counting button 171 has been erroneously operated and no sheets are counted. Note that FIG. 152(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 152(b), since the counting button 171 has been operated during the power outage, the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continued to be operated, a long-press determination is not made and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), the long press is determined based on whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, so even if an up edge is not detected, Long press determination is executed.

FIG. 153 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 152.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 153(a), the power outage occurs when X seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation. , and then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if an on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, press and hold for the X seconds that had elapsed before the power was cut off. If the operation of the count button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the count button 171 will be operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long press flag is set to on, assuming that the count is still in the state of being pressed.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 153(b), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long-press operation, after starting the operation of the count button 171, and then Power will be restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 153(b), a standby process is provided for a certain period of time (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until an appropriate timing for performing counting processing. When the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the count button 171 is performed as in FIG. 153(a). In other words, if an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, the X seconds that had elapsed before the power cut is determined as a long press operation. If the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button 171 remains in the operated state, the count long press flag is set to on.

FIG. 154 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 152.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 154(a), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), if an on signal is detected without an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 being detected, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that this has continued and starts a timer dedicated to when the power is turned on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for power-on to the count long press timer, which is set to 500 ms as an initial value in step S4206 in FIG. 119. By doing this, when the long press operation is performed immediately after the power is turned on, the count long press flag is set to ON, and when the count timing comes while the count button 171 is being operated continuously, 50 The pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 154(b), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operator takes his hand off the count button 171 during the power outage, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in conjunction with power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Further, the timer setting value exclusively for power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value exclusively for power-on (for example, 2 seconds) in the third modification. If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated for power-on is counting time, and the operation of the counting button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the counting long press flag is set to on. Ru. That is, while this timer is counting time, at least one of the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 and the on signal is detected, and the on signal is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display, described using FIG. 141(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 155(a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 155(a), the number “100” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 155(a) shows how "1" is subtracted in the order of "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the time required to display the change is approximately 4 ms x 50 = approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display for subtraction is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to display the change for subtracting 50 sheets.

FIG. 155(b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 155(b). When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display during subtraction. FIG. 155(b) shows how "1" is added in the order of "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "106".

If 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of coins allowed to be paid out under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" will be displayed at approximately 4ms intervals. In order to display changes (addition and subtraction) in increments, the time required for displaying changes is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is also possible to perform a change display in which 65 sheets are added.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 156(a). In this example, the change is displayed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle, all segments of all 5 digits are lit (display "88888"), and all segments of all 5 digits are turned off. In this example, the display (display of "00000") is switched every 8 ms. Eventually, in this example, after 250 ms have passed, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all the digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a failure has occurred in all the digit segments of the game medal number display device 170 that causes the display to stop. If it is recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change is displayed.

Although all digits are used to display the change here, only some digits may be used to reduce processing load and data capacity. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. If all digits are not used and the rightmost single digit is not included, it may give the impression that the rightmost single digit segment has failed, so it is used to indicate that there is no failure. It is best to include the rightmost digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 156(b). In this example as well, the number changes from "100" to "85". That is, it changes from a 3-digit number to a 2-digit number. Therefore, changes are displayed using three-digit segments. The changing display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating around. According to this change display, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes starting from "100". In this example, when 250 ms has passed since the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Note that if the change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes with "85" as the end point.

A display that changes stepwise by a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed while sandwiching the two types of change display described above using FIG. 156. Specifically, when changing from "100" to the final value of "60" (target value), "100" → change display → "80" → change display → display "60". Become. Further, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal number display device 170, the emitted light color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example in which the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170.

The medal number control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "number of game medals" (displayed number of game medals shown in FIG. 90) to the game control section 302 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the “number of game medals” in the security command, and transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the "number of game medals" is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is displayed as is, according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 157 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. Further, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held to count 50 sheets. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 133, and the game medal number display device 170 starts displaying changes that subtract "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In addition, in FIG. 157, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that all seven segments appear to be lit and some segments appear to be blinking slightly due to afterimages. In the game medal number display device 170, a change display that subtracts "1" is performed in about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when the count of 50 medals is performed, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is sent during the transmission period (100 ms) of the security command. Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 157, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command after approximately 20 ms have passed since the counting of 50 sheets, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process in which an image displaying "100" is replaced with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 157 described above, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side that receives the information on the "number of game medals" does not display any change, and the main control unit 300 side that outputs the information, Displays changes. By doing this, the numerical value "50" finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be understood from the display on the effect image display device 157, and "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display is complete at the point when the change display is completed.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 157.

In the modification shown in FIG. 158, the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 also displays a change in which the number is subtracted by "1". Moreover, the change display takes more time than the change display on the game medal number display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This time of 280 ms is the time period for the game medal number display device 170 when 50 medals are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time required to display the addition change (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) and less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

The player usually looks at the performance image display device 157 in many cases, and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170. As mentioned above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals", and that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 should be increased. To do this, it is necessary for players to pay attention to the "number of game medals." The reason why the ``number of game medals'' is also displayed on the performance image display device 157 is to make the players pay as much attention to the ``number of game medals'' as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. It becomes difficult. Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the number of game medal display device 170, the player can It can be expected that the player will also pay attention to the speedy game medal number display device 170. If the player looks at the game medal number display device 170, no performance display is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.

In addition, in the change display on the performance image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also an animation display indicating that the change is in progress, it is easier to draw attention to the "number of game medals", and the counting is also performed here. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, it is possible to make the change display suitable for the period of change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same manner as the change display by the game medal number display device 170. You can easily recognize that a change display is being performed.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 157.

In another example shown in FIG. 159, the game medal number display device 170 does not display a change, but only the “number of game medals” on the effect image display device 157 displays a change. That is, in this other example, the display display process shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal number display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. The following changes are displayed.

In this other example as well, as in the modified example shown in FIG. It can be expected that they will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which is quick to display. By looking at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 160(a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be made exceeding the payout threshold.

This FIG. 160(a) shows the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. Further, below that, the number of payout coins to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum stored number of coins.

In a state where the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373 medals, a further payout of 15 medals corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals (corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals allowed under the rules) occurs. The payout number of 15 coins is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. When the number of payout medals of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum stored number of medals and exceeds the payout threshold in step S4B03 of FIG. 129. Therefore, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is transmitted from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 transmits a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 101). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 160(a), an upper limit exceeded error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and the count is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. A text display prompting the user to operate the button 171 is displayed. That is, the upper limit exceedance error notification is executed even during the game.

Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be lit as an upper limit exceedance error notification.

FIG. 160(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification.

A blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 160(b), the upper limit error notification text is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The upper limit exceedance error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives the payout response command including “normal” from the medal number control unit 350, it transmits the payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 101). On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), when receiving the payout command while the upper limit exceedance error notification is being executed, the execution of the upper limit exceedance error notification is terminated. Note that if the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceedance error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceedance error notification can be ended early.

Further, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the information representing the "number of game medals" that has been sent is the number of medals for the payout threshold (16383 medals), even if the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an error notification that the upper limit has been reached. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a text message that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be ended early.

Further, other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added include when there is payment and when there is lending from lending machine 700. Although this embodiment does not determine whether the upper limit has been reached for settlement, it may be determined whether the upper limit has been reached in the same way as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored medals and the settlement threshold is exceeded, the settlement response command will include "abnormality" and the medal number control unit 350 will send it to the game control unit 302. Allow it to be sent. Even if the payment response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the number of displayed game medals exceeds the upper limit. , the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number than the maximum memory number (for example, 15,000), and if the "number of game medals" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an error exceeding the upper limit lending will occur. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 of FIG. 115 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. The notification of the lending error exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the fact that the upper limit lending error has occurred from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302 and further from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, the production image display device 157 Notification can be made on the slot machine 100 side, such as the speaker 272 or the lamp.

FIG. 161(a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be made exceeding the second payout threshold.

In FIG. 161(a) as well, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and below that the number of payout medals to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

A command including the display number of game medals (number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. A second payout threshold (for example, 15,000 pieces) is set in the game control unit 302, which is smaller than 16,383 pieces (payout threshold), which is the maximum number of pieces stored in the RAM 358. In the game control unit 302, if the number of game medals to be displayed that has been sent a command is equal to or higher than this second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified that an error indicating that the number of game medals to be displayed is close to the upper limit has occurred. Sends an error occurrence command indicating this. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, an upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 161(a), on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, a character display prompting the operator to operate the counting button 171 is displayed as an upper limit notification so as to overlap the game background display. Displayed. That is, in this example as well, the upper limit approaching notification is executed during the game. FIG. 160(a) shows the effect image display device 157 that has switched from displaying this upper limit nearing notification to displaying upper limit exceeding error notification.

Note that as the upper limit approaching notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit. In addition, it was decided that the near-limit notification will continue from the start of the near-limit notification until the start of the upper limit exceeded error notification, but considering the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals, the near-limit notification will continue during one game. The notification may be carried out only during a part of the time. For example, the notification may be performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceedance error notification is a notification carried out during one game. For example, if it is known that there are only a few bonus periods left for AT games etc. even if the upper limit approaching notification is started, it is possible to easily give priority to the remaining AT games etc. Furthermore, when switching from upper limit nearing notification to upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 161(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification.

Even when the upper limit is near, a blinking display may be performed on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 161(b), the character display of the near upper limit notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The near upper limit notification is also displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives a command including the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit 302 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to notify the first sub-control unit 400 that the number of game medals to be displayed is about to error. Sends an error clearing command indicating that the error has been cleared. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), the execution of the near-upper limit notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Further, a second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit approaching notification. This near-limit notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second threshold for payout may be set in the medal number control unit 350. In this case, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, and if the number is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, A command for notification is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a command for notification to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to perform the upper limit impending notification. Then, when it becomes less than the second threshold for payout, a notification end command is transmitted through the route of medal number control section 350→game control section 302→sub control section (400, 500). Note that the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification is preferably longer than the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the upper limit approach notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking cycle is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the upper limit nearing notification is displayed in a blinking manner, the upper limit exceeded error notification may be displayed constantly. You will be able to easily recognize the high level of urgency of notification.

FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 162(a) displays a display indicating that the upper limit is near, overlapping the game background display. Note that the upper limit approaching notification display may be displayed constantly, but it is a blinking display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit nearing notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control section 302 transmits an error occurrence command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit (400, 500) side performs error notification based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is an increased possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting counting. Note that even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 162(a) displays an error notification of a door opening error overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for the door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) is always displayed as the words "Door is open." This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the near-limit notification display, but it may also be displayed on a layer before the near-limit notification display so that it overlaps with the near-limit notification display. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on a layer deeper than the blinking upper limit notification, and the blinking upper limit nearing notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You can do it like this.

FIG. 162(b) shows that in contrast to the door open error display which is always displayed, a character display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed every second. The right side of FIG. 162(b) shows that the character display of the upper limit nearing notification disappears due to the blinking display, and the door open error display that remains constantly displayed is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, the highly urgent door open error display is easy to see. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but a notification sound of an upper limit approaching notification is not output.

Although the error is not as urgent as the door open error, there are errors such as ``Please stop the spinning reel'' and ``A communication error has occurred, which may be caused by a disconnected wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700.'' ” may be displayed to request improvements, and in addition to these displays, notifications urging counting may also be provided.

FIG. 163(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if there is no payout, all reels 110 to 112 stop, and if there is a payout, the bet is placed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the payout is completed. If no operation is performed, the state shifts to a demonstration state (demonstrating). Further, when the payment button 134 is operated, the process also shifts to the demonstration mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 163(a), during a game (during a bet, while the reels are rotating 110 to 112, or during a payout), the text display indicating that the upper limit is near is started, and the transition is made to the demo without the counting button 171 being operated. . The effect image display device 157 displays a game background display during the game, but switches to the demo display when the demo is in progress. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even in the case of transitioning to the demonstration, the text display of the upper limit nearing notification continues to be displayed as long as the "number of game medals" does not become less than the second threshold for payout. If the transition is made during the demonstration, there is a high possibility that the players will leave their seats. By prompting the player to operate the count button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100. Note that the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be constantly displayed to ensure visibility of the near upper limit notification.

FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demonstration image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 163(b). The notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since we want the user to operate the counting button 171 with priority, the notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size. Further, below that, a warning message is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away, such as ``Be careful not to forget or steal your card.'' Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second threshold for payout, is displayed. Note that "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 163(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a number less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting counting disappears (is not displayed), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. Note that the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the performance image display device 157 has decreased to "14,950".

FIG. 164(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 164(a), the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X pieces correspond to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. On the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed prompting the player to count the number of game medals because the number has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting this counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number, the notification to encourage counting continues. That is, the notification that prompts counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50 x 100 for two times). The arrow indicating the notification period in the figure represents the period during which notification prompting for counting, such as "Please operate the counting button", is being made.

If you set the specification to start the notification when the specified number is reached, and immediately end the notification when the number falls below the specified number, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted.In this example, the specified number to start the notification is The notification will continue until the number is less than . By doing so, repetition of notification and counting operations can be reduced. Incidentally, the notification prompting the counting may be made always at a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. You can encourage children to count in large numbers.

Note that the prescribed number may be a threshold for payment, a threshold for lending, or another threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a bet operation, the number of "game medals" will be reduced by the predetermined number above, although it will only be reduced by a maximum of 3 medals in the first place. Regardless of the value, the notification prompting counting may be continued.

FIG. 164(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout (15,000 in this example) in a certain game, a notification to prompt counting is started. The notification prompting counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting counting is started, the player does not operate the counting button 171 and continues playing the game. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout, a notification prompting the player to count is performed once every multiple games (four games in this example). Therefore, for three games after the notification prompting counting is given, no notification prompting counting is made. During the three games in which no notification is given to encourage counting, the performance display such as the game background display displayed on the performance image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may improve the interest of the game. Note that, when the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout, the notification prompting counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during three games in which no notification to prompt counting is made, the notification to prompt counting will not be made until the second threshold for payout is exceeded. It won't happen. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game in which a notification prompting counting is being made, the notification prompting counting that has been in progress will disappear (become invisible). ).

Next, notification regarding counting will be further explained.

FIG. 165(a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which notification is issued to prompt counting every time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. Note that each of the figures ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 165 shows the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 165(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the user to count is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 1,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the next change in the "number of game medals" (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 2,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 3,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 3,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches the second payout threshold of 15,000 pieces, the display prompting for counting continues until the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 pieces, as shown in FIG. 161(a). It will be displayed. In addition, if the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the message "You have reached 15,000 or more" and a display prompting you to count may continue to be displayed, or if the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than the second payout threshold. If it is below the payout threshold, the actual value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (eg, 15,015 medals are now displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the user can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170. Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, it is easy to know how much has been lost. It should be noted that a display prompting for counting may be displayed in accordance with the time that has passed since the start of a bonus game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a bonus game such as an AT game, a display prompting for counting will be displayed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting will be displayed when 20 minutes have passed, and a display will be displayed when 30 minutes have passed. A display will be displayed to encourage the following. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing an example when the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) suggesting or representing that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 pieces during the AT state, as shown in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. A message will appear prompting you to do so. In this example, the count button 171 continues to be pressed and operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

The state advantageous to the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the "number of game medals" by paying out. Therefore, the state is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to continue to increase, and it can be said that the entire number of game medals can be counted (outputted to the lending machine 700). However, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and the next game will not be possible unless they are lent out from the lending machine 700. I end up. Further, even if the situation is advantageous, there may be cases where the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the situation is advantageous, a notification is made to the effect that it is advisable to keep a small number of game medals. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 165(b) is in a state where the “number of game medals” has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has a message “Stop counting. Please proceed with the game.'' A notification (counting completion guidance notification) is made to the effect that it is advisable to leave a small number of game medals. That is, before the counting of all the game medals is finished, the counting completion guide notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting completion guidance notification shown here, a notification such as ``It is better to leave the gaming value aside'' or ``If you count all the games, you will not be able to play the game'' may be used. In other words, before the counting of all the game medals is completed, a drawback in the case where all the game medals are counted may be notified.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 165(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of game medals, he releases his hand from the counting button 171, and the counting ends when he leaves 50 as the number of game medals. are doing.

FIG. 165(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the disadvantageous situation for the player refers to a situation in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is played repeatedly without being lent out. An example is the normal state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 165(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 165(c), the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued when the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). has decreased beyond that. If the situation is disadvantageous to the player, there is a lower possibility that the player will continue playing the game after the counting ends, so no notification will be made to the effect that it is better to keep a small number of "game medals". In this example, the long-press operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes 0. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

FIG. 166(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 165(b). Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 165(b) will be mainly explained.

In the example shown in FIG. 166(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 166(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting has ended once." ing. To restart counting once it has been forcibly ended, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

FIG. 166(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 166(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 166(a), and the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "number of game medals" Since the number has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), counting is forcibly terminated once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous situation, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the count button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" falls below a predetermined value, counting in increments of "50" by pressing and holding the count button 171 does not work, and even if the button 171 is pressed and holding, it only counts in increments of "1". That is, each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" decreases by "1". This is because, for the same reason as mentioned above, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and if you do not lend them out from the lending machine 700, Since the next game will not be possible, in order to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, only "1" is counted.

Eventually, when the number of game medals reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the words "Counting has ended".

Note that if the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting in increments of "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 166(c) is an example of the modification described using FIGS. 166(a) and 166(b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). In the modified example as well, if the player is in a disadvantageous situation, it is effective to press and hold the counting button 171 until the "number of game medals" reaches 0, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, the normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing, the same process as in the case of the player's advantageous state (FIG. 166(a) and The process shown in FIG. 165(b) or the process shown in FIG. 165(b) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 167 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state. If this VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 using a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 90 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 95 is No, and the process proceeds to the previous process until the VL signal is turned on. I can't proceed. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. That is, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, some operations are operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal turns off after the first half of the game starts (the reels start rotating), the second half of the operation (operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) will not be valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it is possible to proceed with the game. If the operation becomes invalid while timing the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the operation becomes valid and it is necessary to judge the timing from scratch, which may give an annoying impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though it is not possible to count, if the game progress operation up to determining the validity of the internal winning by lottery is enabled, for example, if a result advantageous to the player is obtained and the game suddenly becomes a big success. If the presentation is started, there is a risk that the player's desire to continue playing the game may increase. As a result, there was a possibility that there would be a delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal was turned off, but the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be disabled. It is possible to promptly notify the player that the VL signal has been turned off. Note that even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is performed. Furthermore, if it is treated as an error, an error clearing operation is required, but since the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the rental machine 700 side is suspected, so an error clearing operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). I don't even ask for it. Note that, as in the example below, a configuration may be adopted in which error notification is performed while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 167(a) shows whether the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 (throwing) and the operation of the start lever 135 (lever) (throwing/lever operation) are treated as valid or invalid. There is. Further, below that, the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, below that, the state of the VL signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), when the VL signal is on, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Further, error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operations of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Furthermore, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 167(a) displays text such as "Communication with rental machine not established." Note that the error notification may be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal turns off, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In the modified example described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are performed in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout). As shown in FIG. 167(a), for example, when the VL signal is turned off in the state of 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player could end the game at any time. Therefore, the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk should promptly Promote repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 167(b) shows a first modification example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550, which is 15,000 or more, which is the second threshold for payout.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the input operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) becomes invalid, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 167(b), if the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game cannot be played. Until this happens, we do not intentionally stop the progress of the game so that players can enjoy it. Furthermore, the fact that the game continues even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout means that the player is often in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and in this state, the player cannot continue playing the game. Stopping the game is highly likely to reduce the interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the player does not intentionally stop the progress of the game.

In the first modified example in FIG. 167(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but in this modified example as well, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. is displayed.

FIG. 168 shows a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value.

The state shown in FIG. 168(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 168(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is more than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Additionally, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The second modification shown in FIG. 168 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the game may have just started, so it does not interfere with the progress of the game that has just started. There is a purpose. In addition, in the slot machine 100, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear no matter what kind of trouble occurs, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will be great. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout), the progress of the game is stopped and prompt repair by the clerk is encouraged. Furthermore, if there is a large number of game medals, it can be assumed that the player can perform counting operations at any time, so the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. The aim is to encourage store staff to make repairs as soon as possible.

From what has been explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the situation is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the number of game medals by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state. is a state (for example, a normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed as shown in FIG. 167(a). At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 167(b). All operations in the operation are treated as valid operations. Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 168(a). All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed, as shown in FIG. 168(b). The operations of at least some of them may be disabled.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, in order to make the player aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store staff to repair the situation at an early stage, at least one of the multiple types of game progress operations can be performed. operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, there is a possibility that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, there is a possibility that counting is not necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to hinder the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the ``number of game medals'' is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the player is made to notice early and the store staff In order to encourage early recovery, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled when the VL signal is turned off.

FIG. 169 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 169(a), it is handled as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and a request is made to the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) to perform an error cancellation operation. As explained above, there is a high possibility that the VL signal is turned off because the lending machine 700 is not powered on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by indicating an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 169(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the count button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 169(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. The fact that the VL signal is turned off means that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the rental machine 700 side can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If an error notification is made on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without the need for the notification on the slot machine 100 side immediately. Furthermore, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, a counting notification may not be sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing this, the slot machine 100 can make notifications with the minimum number of opportunities, and by suppressing excessive notifications, the player can play the game comfortably.

Note that after the operation of the counting button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal is turned back on.

[About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus state, is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In this situation, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. If counting is performed while the player is playing the AT game, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, when a performance associated with counting is performed while proceeding with the AT game, the execution period of this performance becomes long, making it difficult to perform a performance with an ending scene that anticipates the end of counting, for example. Further, when a counting effect (FIG. 142, etc.) is executed in connection with the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, reducing the interest of the game. On the other hand, by designing the game so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such problems can be made less likely to occur. Can be done. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. When counting is performed while playing the AT game, the number of game medals continues to decrease. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is held down, it is expected that the number of sheets will decrease by approximately 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when performing an effect associated with counting while proceeding with the AT game, it is possible to estimate the end of the execution period of this effect. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) depending on the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the above-mentioned counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance is ended in accordance with the counting process, but may be configured such that the counting performance may be ended even when the counting process continues. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is performed uniformly according to the execution period of the counting process, the counting effect may be executed for a long time, reducing the interest of the game, or the counting effect may interfere with other effects. There is a possibility that problems may arise. This problem can be prevented in some cases by terminating the counting performance even when the counting process continues. Note that such a configuration includes, for example, a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated depending on the gaming situation or the passage of time, or a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . Note that if the counting process ends before these counting performance termination conditions are satisfied, the counting performance may be ended or the counting performance may be continued.

Furthermore, the content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of game medals that have been counted. In this case, the performance content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the performance content may be set based on the cumulative number of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. You can also do this. Further, for example, when the amount of game medals that have been counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased). After the player acquires a large number of game medals, the player starts counting and can select a game move. In addition, regarding such a counting performance according to the amount of game medals, if the counting process and counting performance are terminated midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, even after a counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, one second), It is also possible to restart the lost counting performance from the middle. In addition, the counting effect continues to be executed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is not started while this counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect that is currently being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined time may be the same as, for example, the determination time of long press of the counting button 171.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If a performance that requests an operation on such an operating means is performed while the counting performance is being performed, there is a possibility that an erroneous operation may be induced. For this reason, while the counting performance is being performed, the performance that requires operation of some kind of operating means may not be performed (or the probability of execution may be reduced). Furthermore, effects that become extremely difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effects may be similarly restricted. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a performance is limited during execution of the counting performance. Note that the performance does not have to require operation of the operating means; for example, it is recommended not to execute a performance that involves a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or a performance that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until the end. It's okay.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamps are on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect changes to a counting effect. may be replaced with a counting performance. Furthermore, when starting some kind of performance while the counting performance is being executed, the counting performance may be replaced by a performance that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes depending on the degree of game progress while the counting process is being executed, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses while the counting process is being executed. You can also do this.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting effect are finished, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if a new number of game medals is acquired and the counting process starts, it will be possible to The counting performance that has ended may be restarted from where it left off.

Furthermore, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being executed, such as not being able to start the next game while the counting process is being executed.

[About the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during the counting process]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of up to 50 game medals. FIG. 170(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is held down from a state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and then the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow from when all the game medal numbers are transferred to the lending machine 700 until the game medal number becomes 0 is shown.

In the above counting process, the value of the current number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting judgment. (Figure 113). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (by payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 170(b) shows a change in the number of game medals when 8 game medals are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow shown in FIG. 170(a). has been done. In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 game medals remaining, and the 8 payout amount is added to the remaining 28 game medals. After that, all remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example shown in FIG. The number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 in Figure 170(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 in Figure 170(b)) no longer match, and the counting process This may result in a workload when the data needs to be checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing is not reflected immediately; for example, the increase in the number of game medals is This increase may be reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0 or after the counting process that was being continued is finished by releasing the counting button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if you continue to press and hold the count button 171, count the 120 sheets that were stored when you started pressing and holding the count button 171, and then count the 8 sheets that increased while pressing and holding the count button 171. do. For example, if you release the long press on the count button 171 midway, the long press on the count button 171 will be resumed after counting 60 of the 120 sheets that were stored when you started holding the count button 171. I counted 68 pieces that I had memorized at the time. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 → 18. In FIG. 170(c), 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 170(a), but until the number of game medals reaches 0. does not reflect this increase (same flow as in Figure 170(a)), but this increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It has been shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals at the time the counting process starts (120 in FIG. 170(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals reaches 0 (FIG. 170(c)) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 170(e), while the number of 70 game medals is being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 170(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 coins that were stored when the game started, the 8 coins that were paid out were counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

Note that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these increases may be reflected later, or the count process may continue. If there are, the number of game medals may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes 0.

Note that the display on the game medal number display device 170 when the above configuration is adopted may also be a display that matches the change in the number of game medals. Further, an increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the display of a decrease in the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in value due to the counting process in this case, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is a deviation by the amount of increase). FIG. 170(d) shows the flow when a configuration is adopted in which the increase in the number of game medals (payout and settlement operations) is immediately reflected on the display, compared to the flow in FIG. 170(c). There is. In this configuration, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display will be in a state where there is a deviation by the above-mentioned increase, but they will be in a state where they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the counting button 171 to end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the value of the actual number of game medals will differ. The values of the number of game medals on the display match.

Note that the timing to reflect the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 anew, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing when the number of game medals reaches 0 while the counting process continues, and in this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again. It may also be possible to move it (the counting process continues, FIG. 170(e)).

Incidentally, the increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operations, but either one of these may be the target of the configuration described in FIG. 170(c), or both may be the target.

[About the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button]
In the embodiment described above, if you want to change the bet to 1 medal after placing a bet on 3 game medals, operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals", and then By operating the bet button 130 for one bet again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one bet. In this case, it is necessary to operate the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130, but it may be configured such that this operation can be performed by operating the bet button 130 once. An example of such a configuration is a configuration in which when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is at the maximum value, the settlement button process (FIG. 97) is executed and then the process for the bet button operation is executed. Can be mentioned. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is at the maximum value, the amount of change in the number of bets from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is set as the number of coins to be settled. In addition to transmitting the settlement command (FIG. 92), the current bet value may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a part of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and a separate input process or input command is not required. Note that these configurations are an example of a configuration in which the current number of bets is set to the minimum value based on the operation means that can set the minimum value of the number of bets when the current number of bets is the maximum value. Equivalent to.

Note that when the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2, etc. by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, and only by operating the bet button 130. You can now change the settings for the number of bets.

Note that if there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and an input sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For this operation, the checkout sound and the input sound may be output continuously. However, since there is a risk of confusion for the player if two types of sounds are output for a single operation, the current number of bets will change from the maximum value to the minimum value when the bet button 130 is operated. , the input sound may be output without outputting the payment sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters etc. indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters indicating that payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he or she has operated the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the production according to the number of game medals]
Hereinafter, a configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be explained using FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance performed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal performance is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special performance is executed when the number reaches the predetermined number.

First, FIG. 171 (a1) shows the situation at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start = 500), and FIG. 171 (a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state, FIG. 171(a3) shows what happens when medals are acquired in the AT state, and FIG. 171(a4) shows what happens when the AT state ends. In addition, in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right corner of the screen. Displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 171(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special performance is not performed and the normal performance (FIG. 171(a2)) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 171(b1) to (b3) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, from a state where the normal performance is being executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 171 (b1)), to a state where medals have been acquired and the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number ( 171 (b2)), and then a state in which special effects are being executed (FIG. 171 (b3)). In this special performance, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM will be different from the normal performance. In other words, the performance changes when a large number of game medals have been obtained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the different effects are not limited to the above example of special effects, and various effects can be used. These different productions are not limited to configurations that use different productions, for example, while a base production is being executed, another production can be inserted into a part of it, resulting in a different production as a whole. Good too. For example, when displaying the number of game medals or the number of medals earned, the color of each digit may be changed to a rainbow color, or the color of each digit may be changed periodically. The numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Further, the state in which the performance is made different is not limited to the AT state, but may be any state in which the performance is different when the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance is switched immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but it is sufficient that the performance executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number. The presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and further satisfies some condition (for example, playing the number of games, winning a switching lottery), or whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number or not. It is also possible to have a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 171(c1), when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest) is displayed at the ending time.

In addition, it is not limited to a configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach a predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting the setting value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which is a trigger for making the values different, may be provided separately.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the number of game medals is used to determine whether or not to execute a different effect or display. A similar effect may be achieved even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is used as the determination target. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of held medals, but a portion thereof (for example, when the number of held medals is 5000, 1000 of them) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information regarding the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or by the host server, the above number of medals can be calculated using the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals. A configuration similar to that using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 and the information regarding the gaming value managed by the host server may be used to determine whether or not to perform a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, a different effect is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one) satisfy some condition. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are performed depending on the case. Note that the value of the above judgment target may not be displayed, but if the value to be judged is displayed as in the example above, the relationship between the judgment target and the performance cannot be grasped. It is expected that the game will become easier and more interesting.

Furthermore, in the above example, a configuration has been described in which the number of game medals and the number of held medals are used as the determination target for whether or not to perform different effects or displays, but the number of acquired medals in the AT state may be used as the determination target. FIGS. 172(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). Of this flow, Figures 172 (d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000, similar to the case explained using Figures 171 (b1) to (b3). However, in this example, the execution of the special performance is determined based on the number of acquired medals, so unlike FIGS. 171 (b1) to (b3), no special performance is performed at this point. Thereafter, the state becomes such that the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this case) (FIG. 172 (d5)), and then the state enters where a special performance is being executed (FIG. 172 (d6)). In this example as well, the presentation changes as the number of acquired medals increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG. 171 (c1) are displayed because the number of acquired medals has reached 2000.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was explained in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, and the number of acquired medals reach a predetermined number. The configuration may be such that the number of medals is used, and the number of acquired medals is used to perform other parts of the performance, as appropriate. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-described performances can be executed in parallel, such as a performance using the number of held medals and a performance using the number of acquired medals. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not performed in a situation advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of medals held, but when such a situation occurs, a different effect is executed. It is also possible to use a configuration in which multiple types of determination targets are used and the results are combined. [About operations when errors overlap]
Error-related operations will be described below with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of game medals overflows. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 173(a1) to (a3), from a state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 173(a1)), the count button 171 is operated (FIG. 173(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. 173(a3) until the value on the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 as a result of the transmission to the slot machine 700. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit of the number of game medals, and when a winning combination with a payout is won and the sum of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 129). In this overflow state, the payout-based addition process is not executed and the overflow state is in a waiting state for resolution, which can be said to be a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to transfer the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. In FIGS. 173(b1) to (b4), the number of game medals changes from the upper limit value (FIG. 173(b1)) to an overflow state (FIG. 173(b2)) after winning a combination with a payout. After that, press and hold the count button 171 (FIG. 173(b3), move 50 as the number of game medals to the lending machine 700, and decrease the value of the number of game medals display device 170 by 1), and the overflow state will be resolved (FIG. 173(b3). The series of steps up to b4)) is shown. Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 173(b4) indicates that the overflow condition has been cleared, and is displayed for about a few seconds and then erased. Furthermore, when the overflow condition is resolved, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed for a long time, but if the count button 171 is not pressed for a long time, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly pressing the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the game control unit 302 can detect various errors (for example, the error shown in FIG. 88(b)) that hinder the progress of the game. Since these errors require countermeasures on the part of the store, the system is configured to disable the player from proceeding with the game and to notify them of these errors. 174(c1) to (c3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 174(c1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 174(c2)), and then the 174 shows a series of steps from when the user takes action and when the reset button R is operated, the error is resolved (FIG. 174(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in Figure 174 (c3) indicates that the error that occurred (in this example, the disconnection error in the medal number control section) has been resolved, and after being displayed for a few seconds, will be deleted. Note that the reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control section, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As explained above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, the abnormal game order error shown in FIG. 88(b), the chip ID number mismatch, etc.) There are two types of errors: a game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control unit 350 that can be canceled by a player's operation (for example, an overflow state, hereinafter referred to as a medal number control error). A medal number control error is an error that does not have a serious effect on game progress compared to a game control error. For this reason, if these errors occur overlappingly, it is conceivable to give priority to the game control error with high importance and eliminate it. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. In addition, in the following explanation, examples of a medal number control section disconnection error and an overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control section 302 and errors related to the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. A similar cancellation method can be applied to errors.

FIG. 175 (d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a winning combination with a payout is entered from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 175(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the counting button 171 in order to release the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal number control section disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (the game control error and the medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 175(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 175(d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal number control unit disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating an overflow state (Fig. 175 (d2)) is cleared when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control section. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred over the message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred, or display a message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section. Messages related to both errors may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying messages related to both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from a display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where a game control error and a medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the overflow state is not canceled because the counting process is not executed. At this time, a message indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid is displayed. In addition to the message shown in FIG. 175 (d3), when the count button 171 is operated, the operation of the count button 171 is invalid, and the disconnection error in the medal number control section has been resolved first. A message is displayed prompting you to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to process the medal number control unit disconnection error with priority.

It is assumed that the store then takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 175 (d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the medal number control unit disconnection error has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 175 (d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that in FIG. 175 (d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the counting button 171 as described with reference to FIG. 173, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be canceled. FIGS. 175(d7) and (d8) show that the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the counting button 171 in the same way as FIGS. 173(b3) and (b4). In this case, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals after the overflow condition is resolved.

In order to realize the above operation, the process corresponding to the operation of the operation means (counting button 171 in the above example) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed while the game control error is occurring. Good too. 176(e1) to (e3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 176(e1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 176(e2)), and this error Although the counting button 171 (operating means for canceling the overflow state) was operated during the occurrence of the overflow, a message is displayed indicating that the operation is invalid (the counting process is not executed) (Fig. 176 ( e3)) has been shown.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the operating means for canceling the game control error and the operating means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such as allowing both errors to be canceled by the reset button R. Note that the error canceling operation means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, an operation means installed inside the game machine). In this configuration, if a game control error occurs while a medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the error cancellation operation means (the medal number control error is not canceled, and the game control error is canceled). Control errors are prioritized and canceled), so that highly important game control errors can be prioritized and canceled.

[About notification of counting process (1)]
In a situation advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below is such that the volume of this performance is reduced while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). This provides a case where the sound is lowered (or muted). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the performance, and to allow the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of count notification. Note that, hereinafter, the count notification based on the change in the performance sound volume will be referred to as count notification A. Note that here we will mainly explain a configuration that changes the volume of the performance by counting processing, but a configuration that changes the performance in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in display) (a part of the lamp may change, the color of the lamp, the lighting mode may change).

In some cases, the so-called demonstration performance is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), but in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), the demonstration performance is executed. In this case, the performance in a state advantageous to the player is continuously executed. The above-mentioned counting notification A can make it possible to grasp the execution of the counting process even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification A is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effects caused by the last stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect). It may also be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the performance is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation was performed on the reels (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption). In this case, the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in the performance volume due to the count notification A. Further, in the case where performance volume reduction due to passage of time and execution of count notification A overlap, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to volume reduction due to count notification A.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A that is being executed is terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed is returned) in response to an operation on some operation means.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is determined whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, as shown in FIG. 142), but when the above-mentioned count notification A is executed, a count sound corresponding to such a count process may be output. Also, for example, while the above counting notification A is executed only when all reels have stopped rotating, the counting sound can be output at any time in response to the counting process. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here can be changed while changing the volume depending on the situation, for example, set the volume to 50% while the reels are rotating, and set the volume to 100% while the reels are stopped. You may also add Further, it is also possible to combine not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, a count display related to the counting process, and a combination thereof) with the counting notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and allowing the counting display to be performed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). (while the reels are spinning, only the counting sound is output). In addition, as another example, the counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting sound is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). After that, execution is allowed (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[About notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output the counting sound is determined depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, FIG. 142), and the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 142). , a configuration that outputs a counting sound according to the counting process was mentioned.

In a situation that is advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). At the same time, a case is provided in which the effect sound is maintained in an advantageous state. With this configuration, the effect sound in an advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Furthermore, the counting sound allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the counting notification by this counting sound will be called counting notification B.

Although the count notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification B is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the final stop operation for the reels has been performed and all reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo performance). It may also be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after any operation is performed on any operating means.

In addition, in the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed were explained, but for example, when there is a counting sound of the first aspect and a counting sound of the second aspect as the counting sound ( For example, the melody may be different, the tone color, the number of notes, the volume, etc. may be different). In other words, the case where the count notification B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output, and the case where the count notification B is not executed is read as the case where the count sound of the second aspect is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second aspect is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the production of an advantageous state, the counting process can be executed without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the game is inside.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, when the counting effect of the first mode is executed, when the counting sound of the second mode is output, when the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , respectively. Since there are various types of performances, not just audio, for example, if the counting performance of the second aspect is a type of performance that does not interfere much with the production of an advantageous state, it can be done without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the configuration of the count notifications (count notification A, count notification B) explained above will be described using FIGS. 177 to 179. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when an output permission period for the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 177(a), and FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 177(b).

177(a) and 177(b) both show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. This is an example of operation. FIGS. 177(a) and 177(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. It is assumed that in the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output, except when the counting sound is output.

The example in FIG. 177(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 178(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 178 (a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. In addition, as shown in Figures 178 (a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game is performed. FIG. 177(a) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 177(a) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 178 (a3) shows that, at this timing (a3), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed.

The following timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display shown in FIG. 178 (a3) continues as shown in FIG. 178 (a4), and the AT performance sound continues as is. There is. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (a5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 178 (a5), the display in FIG. 178 (a3) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (a6) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display in FIG. 178(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 178(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the text "Counting" in the frame at the top left of the screen has been erased.

The following timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 178(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 178(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 177(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 179(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this case, FIG. 179 (b2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. In addition, as shown in Figures 179 (b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the next game start operation. FIG. 177(b) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 177(b) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and as shown in FIG. 179(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 179(b2) continues. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the count button 171 is continuously pressed. FIG. 179 (b4) shows that, at this timing (b4), the performance when winning a prize (in this case, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed. Note that at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the AT effect sound is output. Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (b5), as shown in FIG. 179 (b5), the display of FIG. 179 (b4) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is being held down for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 179(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 179(b6). In addition, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT performance sound resumes. Note that as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (b7), and the AT effect sound is output. Note that as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b8) is the timing when the count button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 179(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 179(b8). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the text "Counting" in the upper frame on the left side of the screen has been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

[About display and presentation based on information from the medal number control unit]
In this embodiment, the game control unit 302 controls the game medals by the medal number control status command (see FIGS. 86 and 90) that is sent periodically (every 5.9 m8ms in FIG. 86) from the medal number control unit 350. Information such as numbers can be grasped (Fig. 104). Then, some of this information is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (FIG. 86) that is sent periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 86) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can control various displays and effects based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and effects.

In the above configuration, the time it takes to establish communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the same as the time required for establishing communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the time until establishment, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the game control unit 302 has not yet received the medal number control status command from the medal number control unit 350. will be sent. The security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal number control unit 350, so if various displays and performance controls are performed based on the information included in this security command, the actual state may differ. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the first security command after the power is turned on after receiving the medal number control state command. Further, the security command may be sent after providing a sufficient waiting time.

Further, until communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established, even if the first sub-control section 400 receives a security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time elapses. good.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the number of medals control status command (the number of medals control unit 350 and the number of medals control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating that the communication is normal is included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and performance controls on the condition that this information is included. It may be possible to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent information different from the actual state from being provided to the player.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation from the time the security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals between security commands, if this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and performance controls. Put it away. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in accordance with control related to the game (FIG. 86), but the latest information is included in these various processing commands, and this information is used to By controlling various displays and effects, it is possible to reflect the latest information.

<others>
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Correspondence between the structure of the invention and the embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 96 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game machine characterized by the following is described. Further, the game machine described above,
The insertion operation means includes a first insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130) and a second insertion operation means different from the first insertion operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first input operation means has been operated, the first input operation information (for example, an input command with a requested input number of 1 coin) is transmitted to the game value number control means as the input operation information. and send it to
Based on the fact that the second loading operation means has been operated, second loading operation information that is different from the first loading operation information (for example, if the requested number of sheets to be loaded is 3) is determined as the loading operation information. means for transmitting an input command) to the game value number control means;
The gaming value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the requested number of coins to be inserted, one coin);
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, a second game value update process different from the first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, the number of game medals for the requested number of inputs is 3). subtraction).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 98);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the response information is received within a predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the production control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 96). ),
The means outputs the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the elapse of the predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 96, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (description of [operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100), the game machine comprising:
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 96 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 96 waits until a response command is received; A gaming system is described which is characterized by:

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113).
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113);
In the counting process, when the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer and the input operation information is received while the game value update process is being performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In one counting process, the gaming value number control means stores a part of the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means in the transmission buffer, and extracts a part from the gaming value number. This is a means that may subtract a part of the number of game values (for example, since the maximum number of medals counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 119), it may become a part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, the game value number control means receives the input operation information between the end of one counting process and the start of the next counting process. If so, it is a means for transmitting the first response information to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 98),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, No determination in step S1306 of FIG. 98), and the operation on the input operation means is performed. (For example, step S1113 in FIG. 96 is not executed because the response result is abnormal.)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 98);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming medium management device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 134 to 136, if the determination is Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 136, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 134 to 136 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 136, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When receiving the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted, performs an input process to input the gaming value of the requested input number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 134);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 134, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the fact that the maximum number insertion operation means has been operated, generates maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command in which the maximum number of bets is the requested number of coins), which is the insertion operation information. Means capable of transmitting to the gaming value number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([Modifications to the input operation example)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on turning on a limited number of inputs flag),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information includes the predetermined information. In this case, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , a modification of FIGS. 134 to 136, No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 136, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information. In this case, the game value update process is executed to set the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means to 0, and the response information includes information indicating the number of game values before it becomes 0. to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of FIGS. 134 to 136, No determination is made in step S4604 of FIG. 136, Yes determination is made in S4621, and the number of game medals is all subtracted. (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including information indicating the number of gaming values before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inserting the gaming value of the number of gaming values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 134). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
As the insertion operation means, there is a minimum number insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means converts the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested number of coins of 1), which is the insertion operation information, into the game value based on the operation performed on the minimum number insertion operation means. means capable of transmitting to a number control means;
The number of game values control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information,
The minimum number insertion operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 134);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 98);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124), the game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 134 to 136, if the determination is Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 136, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 134 to 136 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 136, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value corresponding to the number of input requests (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 134);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 134, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 96). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 124),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 124),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 134 to 136, if the determination is Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 136, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 134 to 136 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 136, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value corresponding to the number of input requests (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 134);
If the response information including the information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 134, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means controls the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information and the game value number storage. The means may total the number of game values stored in the means and subject it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 125),
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 98);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming medium management device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes) ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the gaming value number storage means. means for summing up the stored number of game values and subjecting it to the second counting process;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 129),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been successfully completed. For example, step S1607 in FIG. 101),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A game machine comprising: a game value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage unit,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming medium management device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes) ,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 111), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes) , a gaming system characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. It is a means that can perform processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 118);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 118, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a second value. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of payouts to (for example, Yes determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 129);
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the second value, the number of game value control means controls the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 129),
The second value is a value larger than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 129, step S4107 in FIG. 118),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 114);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number of game values control means is means having a transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device, and the number of game values control means is configured to control the number of game values. If the number of gaming values stored in the storage means does not exceed the first value, the response information is stored in the transmission buffer, and the response information is transmitted as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device. After the buffer is cleared, the unit is capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage unit (for example, step S3712 in FIG. 115). (Yes judgment)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the number of game value control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , Yes determination in step S3703 of FIG. 115, step S3706), means for transmitting the response information including first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the first value, the number of game value control means controls the number of game values without updating the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, if the determination in step S3703 in FIG. 115 is No, step S3706 is not executed), and the response information including second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is transmitted to the external processing device ([ Loan receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 118);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 118, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device is described. Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 118);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 118, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. It is a means that can perform processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 114),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 115),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer that temporarily stores the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is a means for storing the gaming value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and also performing the gaming value updating process (for example, the gaming value number control means in FIG. 113 Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 118), the game value number control means controls the external processing. In addition to updating the communication number with the device (for example, a Yes determination in step S3703 in FIG. 115, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 115);
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, a determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 118), the number of game value control means controls the external The response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is sent without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, No determination in step S3703 in FIG. 115, step S3706 is not executed). Means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, No determination in step S3712 of FIG. 115, S3714 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the gaming media management device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 114),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the gaming media management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game media management device, the Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 115);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 114),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 115),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means that can execute the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 119). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with presentation means (for example, presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined presentation (for example, FIG. 142),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. It is a means that can set a promotion state (for example, FIG. 147(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number of gaming values control means is a means for not transmitting the number of gaming values to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 119, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 119). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). A game media management device is described, which is characterized in that the game media management device transmits data repeatedly.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 119). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means that can execute the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 137). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 137);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 137) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 146);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The degree of increase in the second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operation state (FIG. 146);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. This is a means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (FIG. 147(b)).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted as the number of gaming values to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 142),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the number of gaming values controlling means controls the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means. is means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where the second value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 147(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 137). ) to the game media management device, and when the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, in FIG. 137 step S4208),
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 137) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 146);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 137). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 137);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 137) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 146);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means that can execute the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 in FIG. 138) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 138) is set as the number of gaming values. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 138),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 138, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 148),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for making a predetermined notification when the automatic counting state is set (FIGS. 150 and 151);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with presentation means (for example, presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined presentation (for example, FIG. 142),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means controls the automatic counting state. It is a means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 149(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 149(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game, and a game value update process that updates the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means. Game value number control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 in FIG. 138) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 138) is set as the number of gaming values. S4209) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 138),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 138, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 148),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 of FIG. 138) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 138) is set as the number of gaming values. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 138),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 138, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 148),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means that can execute the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 152(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
If the operating means has been in the predetermined operating state since a power outage occurred and the power was restored, the gaming value number control means is configured to be in the predetermined operating state before the power outage. means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time in which the predetermined operation state is in the state after power restoration, regardless of the time (FIG. 152(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and the power is restored. There is (Figure 152(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted as the number of gaming values to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 142),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means to A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 152(a)),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 152(a)),
A gaming system is described. Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 155 to 159),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms),
The display means is means for displaying the change in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 155 and 156);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation on the operation means,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 119). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 119);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 119) is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period as the number of game values;
The number of gaming values control means is a means for not transmitting the number of gaming values to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 119, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 155 to 159),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. is a means that can be performed (for example, FIGS. 155 to 159),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 107),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 in FIG. 107),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, an abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined period (for example, transmitting one command with 8 interruptions (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, in FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When determining that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 107, step S4407 in FIG. 121, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 107),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 in FIG. 107),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 107),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 in FIG. 107),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 103),
There is described a game machine characterized in that an abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation in response to an error (game control unit 302)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
When determining that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 107, step S4407 in FIG. 121, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 129, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 101),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding when the predetermined information is received (for example, if the determination is No in step S1606 in FIG. 101 and the process is repeated, [game control by payout)] Operation of the unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 160(b));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 129, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 101),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 129, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 101),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )]), a gaming system characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A gaming value number control means (e.g., , medal number control unit 350),
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur when lending beyond the upper limit).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of causing the performance means to perform a demonstration performance when a game is not being executed,
The predetermined performance is a performance that is performed even when the demonstration performance is being performed (for example, FIG. 163(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 160(b));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The game machine includes: a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming media management device and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit; ,
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the rental information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process that bidirectionally communicates with the external processing device and updates the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the rental information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a host server) and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned gaming values based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of lending. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (e.g., No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 95);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, does not perform error notification for VL signal abnormality);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. is a possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 160(b));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the game media management device and advances the game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals), and the main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals) The means is capable of deriving the number of loaned gaming values based on the receipt of lending information from the user and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of lending (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, Step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the gaming media management device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the gaming media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 in FIG. 95);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the external processing device and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned gaming values based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of lending. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (e.g., No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 95);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., including a process of transmitting the gaming value number to an external processing device and a gaming value updating process of subtracting the gaming value number) based on the operation of the counting operation unit. , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113).
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) in which auxiliary functions that are advantageous to the player can be operated;
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 142) in conjunction with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first gaming state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process. Small (In the description of [About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing], the amount of increase in the number of gaming medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of gaming medals per unit game due to counting processing) (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The above-mentioned counting effect is an effect that has an end condition that is different from the end of the above-mentioned counting process. (see configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance while the counting performance is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration that does not perform a performance that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The specific performance is a performance that requires an operation from the player;
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The counting performance is a performance whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the number of gaming values by the counting process,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the amount of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described. There is.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the immediately preceding counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting process is terminated halfway due to the completion of the counting process. is,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), even after the counting performance ends midway, the immediately preceding counting performance (counting performance that ended midway) ) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means continues the counting performance within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and if a new counting process is started while the counting process continues, the performance control means controls the counting performance to continue. It is a means of continuous execution,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), the counting effect continues even after the counting process ends, and when a new counting process starts, the counting effect that is being executed (see the configuration to keep it as is), is described.

Further, a game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding payment (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of settled gaming values based on the reception of the first information, performs the gaming value update process based on the settled number, and then controls the number of gaming values for the first information. Means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means that can set the number of bets to 0 based on the operation of the payment operation means.
A game machine (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a payment command (response command not used)) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding the input (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the second information, performs the gaming value update process based on the input request number, and then Means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on reception of response information to the second information.
A game machine (for input commands, refer to a configuration using response commands) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the gaming value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at periodically visited transmission timings (for example, transmitting the number of gaming medals by counting processing (count notification). ) is every 300ms, Figure 84),
When the gaming value number control means ends the transmission of the gaming value number excluding the increased gaming value number at the current transmission timing of the transmission timing, the gaming value number control means controls the number of gaming values at the next transmission timing of the transmission timing. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of game values at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 170(c) and 170(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals during the counting process is first completed, the increased number of game values is transmitted at the transmission timing. will be sent),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, effect image display device 157, number of game medals display device 170);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is a means capable of performing a subtraction display that subtracts the number of game values in accordance with the number of game values subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is means that can execute the subtraction display that reflects the increase when there is an increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues (FIG. 170(d)). f)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 125),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 101). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, step S4B04 in FIG. 129),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the settlement operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means calculates a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the payment information to the game value number control means;
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((refer to the description of [Regarding the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button])) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment information to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is means that does not output the settlement sound when the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the bet number is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the gaming value number;
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Also,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of game values acquired in the game stored (for example, the number of medals held is the number of game values acquired in the game stored),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means executes a first performance when the number of judgment targets has not reached the predetermined number, and executes a second performance based on the fact that the number of judgment targets has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration that executes different effects depending on the number of game medals in the description of [About effects according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the judgment target at least in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be judged is displayed. (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, a performance according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], (See the configuration that executes a performance using the number of medals you have and a performance using the number of acquired medals in parallel),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the certain gaming state, there are cases where the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state exceeds the number included in the external information. If the counting process is not carried out under favorable conditions, the number of medals earned may exceed the number of medals held).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a setting suggestion performance according to the determination target ("When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number," in [About the performance according to the number of game medals]) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 117, step S3714 in FIG. 115),
The performance control means is means that can display the number of game values in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possession" in FIG. 172),
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance in the certain gaming state according to the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state.
A game machine characterized by this (in the description of [Regarding production according to the number of game medals], a configuration in which the number of acquired medals in the AT state is the subject of determination, see FIG. 172) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired gaming values in the certain gaming state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 172),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of game values when a game value is acquired in the certain gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a performance according to the number of game values in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], it is possible to execute performances in parallel). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes reversible and the second error becomes unresolvable.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 175) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 174),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 173),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 173);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 173);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 175);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
(Refer to the configuration in which the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [About the operation when errors overlap]), which is characterized by the following: There is.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes the first state that is reversible and the second error is not reversible. ,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 175) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 175 (d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification regarding the second error (see FIG. 175(d2));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 175(d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is a means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 175 (d4) to (d6));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [About operations when errors overlap]), (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means,
A game machine (see FIGS. 173(b2) to (b4)) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 174),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 173);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 175);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means, and stores the number of game values related to the game values used in the game. A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358),
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed with all of the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. is a means,
A gaming machine characterized by this (in the description of [About notification of counting process (1)], refer to the configuration in which counting notification A is executed in a state where all reels are stopped) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The voice output means is configured to output the voice output means when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after all the stop operations for the plurality of rotating reels have been performed in the first gaming state. It is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)], a predetermined period of time has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all reels have stopped rotating) (Refer to the configuration for executing count notification A under the condition of .) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second performance sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The audio output means is a means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is decreased.
There is described a game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which the counting notification A that is being executed is terminated when an operation on some operating means is triggered in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means,
Equipped with
The game control means is a means that can set a second game state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of performing demonstration production,
The presentation means is a means for not performing a demonstration presentation when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state;
A game machine characterized by the following (in the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]), a so-called demonstration performance is not performed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demonstration performance is performed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 113), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player, and the sound output means is a means that can set a first performance sound (for example, AT state) in the first game state. , AT state production sound).
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second effect sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The audio output means is a means that may maintain a state in which the first performance sound is output when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A game machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means may output the second effect sound when the counting process is executed with all the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. be,
A game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is executed in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second effect sound when any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second performance sound from the time the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. a stop button (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139);
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a first mode when the counting process is executed while all the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. It is a means in which there are cases,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a second manner when the counting process is executed while any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. It is a means of outputting
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is configured to output the second sound output when the counting process is being executed after the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating. means for outputting the performance sound in a second mode,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) containing information on the number of game values received from the number of game value control means to the production control means,
The performance control means is means for executing first control regarding the number of gaming values based on receiving the command;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The performance control means is a means that does not execute the first control even if it receives the command until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is means that does not execute the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for executing the first control based on the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means being normal;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the production control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is sent at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, the various processing commands in FIG. 84) including the information on the number of game values received from the game value number control means to the production control means in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a means to
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may not be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Pachinko machine 200 Game board 200
208 Decorative pattern display device 208a to 208c Decorative pattern display area 208d Production display area 212 First special pattern display device 214 Second special pattern display device 230 First special pattern starting port 232 Second special pattern starting port 235 Variable winning port 300 Main Control unit 400 First sub-control unit

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine equipped with a counting means capable of counting a game value and a notifying means capable of executing a first notification, wherein the first notification is the execution of a game stop. The notification means may execute the first notification when at least a first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is such that the counting means starts from a value lower than the first value. This is a condition that is met when the first value is counted, and when the first condition is met in a small hit state and the game ball passes through a specific area (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ) , the notifying means does not execute the first notification after the end of the small winning state , the first condition is satisfied in the small winning state, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the "second case"), the notifying means executes the first notifying after the end of the small winning state .

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop at an appropriate timing, without giving players excessive expectations, and It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine not shown) has a counting means (for example, a reference value counter update process) and a notification means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208, a speaker 120, and various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 25), The first notification is a notification to notify the execution of the game stop (for example, an image including the character string "Complete function activated, ends today"), and when at least the first condition is met, the notification means will issue the first notification. The first condition is when the counting means counts the first value from a value lower than the first value (for example, when counting 195,000 as the value of the reference value counter). If the first condition is met in a small winning state and the game ball passes through a specific area (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the above-mentioned condition is satisfied after the small winning state ends. If the notification means does not execute the first notification, the first condition is satisfied in the small hit state, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), The game machine is characterized in that the notification means executes the first notification after the small winning state ends.
Furthermore, in the first case, the firing device may not stop after the small hit state ends, and in the second case, the firing device may stop after the small win state ends.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a counting means capable of counting a gaming value and a notifying means capable of executing a first notification, wherein the fourth notification is the execution of a game stop. The notification means is a means that can execute the third notification, and the third notification is a notification to notify the execution of the game stop, and when at least the first condition is satisfied, the The notification means may execute the fourth notification, and the first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the counting means counts the first value from a value lower than the first value. , If the first condition is satisfied in the small hit state, the fourth notification is executed, and if the first condition is satisfied in the small win state and the game ball passes through a specific area (hereinafter, (referred to as the "first case"), the third notification is not executed in the next state after the small winning state ends, the first condition is satisfied in the small winning state, and the specified If the game ball does not pass through the area (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the third notification is carried out in the next state to which the small winning state has ended and transitioned. It's a game machine.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the notification (first notification) suggesting the execution of the game stop at an appropriate timing, without giving players excessive expectations, and It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine not shown) has a counting means (for example, a reference value counter update process) and a notification means capable of executing the first notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device 208, a speaker 120, and various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 25), The fourth notification is a notification that foretells the execution of the game stop, the notification means is a means that can execute the third notification, and the third notification is a notification that notifies the execution of the game stop, The notifying means may execute the fourth notifying when at least the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is such that the counting means selects the first value from a value lower than the first value. This is a condition that is satisfied when the count is counted (for example, when 195000 is counted as the value of the reference value counter) , and when the first condition is satisfied in the small hit state, the fourth notification is executed and the small If the first condition is satisfied in the winning state and the game ball passes through a specific area (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the above-mentioned first condition is satisfied in the next state after the small winning state ends. If the third notification is not executed , the first condition is satisfied in the small hit state, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the small win state is The gaming machine is characterized in that the third notification is executed in the next state after the end of the game .
Further, in the first case, the firing device may not stop after the small hit state ends, and in the second case, the firing device may stop after the small winning state ends.

Claims (7)

A counting means capable of counting gaming value;
a notification means capable of performing the first notification;
A game machine comprising:
The first notification is a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop;
The notification means may execute the first notification when at least a first condition is satisfied;
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the counting means counts the first value from a value lower than the first value,
If the first condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied, the notification means does not perform the first notification;
A game machine characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the state is not in an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied once the first condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the demonstration performance is not performed after the first condition is once satisfied.
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
When at least the first condition is met, the notification means may perform a second notification;
The second notification is a notification based on the gaming value,
The notification time of the second notification is longer than the notification time of the first notification,
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 5,
The notification means includes a display means,
The display means is capable of displaying a demonstration performance,
The display means is a means capable of executing the second notification while displaying the demonstration performance,
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The game will be stopped if at least the third condition is met,
The third condition is a condition that is satisfied when the counting means counts the second value from a value lower than the second value,
the second value is greater than the first value,
A game machine characterized by:

Images